Web LCT Alcplus2 Idu

WEB LCT
ALCplus2 IDU
ALS series equipment with ALCplus2 I DU
management software application
Release 1.1
User manual
MN.00237.E - 003
Volume 1/ 1
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-
national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-
played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS, MS Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP, HP OpenView NNM and HPUX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Mozilla Firefox is a Mozilla Foundation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003 1
WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU
Contents
WEB LCT APPLICATION............................................................................................................ 9
WEB LCT ALCPLUS2 IDU APPLICATION.................................................................................. 12
VERSION........................................................................................................................... 13
LIMITS.............................................................................................................................. 14
INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................... 15
START-UP .............................................................................................................................. 16
START-UP FROM BROWSER ................................................................................................. 17
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (Ethernet connection) ......................................... 17
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (USB connection) ............................................... 18
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (serial connection).............................................. 18
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (connection via modem)...................................... 19
Messages displayed at the start of WEB LCT..................................................................... 20
START-UP FROM SCT/LMT ................................................................................................... 23
WEB LCT ALCPLUS2 IDU PAGE ............................................................................................... 25
INFO/STATUS EQUIPMENT AREA .......................................................................................... 26
To verify the version of the WEB LCT application............................................................... 28
To verify/modify the timeout used for the update of all the information present
in the WEB LCT page..................................................................................................... 28
To execute the login of the user ..................................................................................... 28
To execute the logout of the user ................................................................................... 29
CONTEXTUAL AREA............................................................................................................. 30
EVENTS LIST AREA............................................................................................................. 33
To verify/modify the filters applied to the list of the alarm/status signals.............................. 34
Alarm and status signals (more info)............................................................................... 34
MAIN MENU ........................................................................................................................... 35
EQUIPMENT PROPERTIES .................................................................................................... 36
To verify the equipment properties ................................................................................. 36
To modify the equipment identifier.................................................................................. 37
To modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment............................................ 37
To execute the equipment software reset......................................................................... 37
To align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC............ 37
PORT CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................................... 38
To verify/modify the parameters of the communication ports reserved to the
local and remote supervision of the equipment ................................................................. 38
Ethernet port ......................................................................................................... 39
LCT PPP port .......................................................................................................... 40
Radio 1A port ......................................................................................................... 40
2Mb/s EOC port ...................................................................................................... 41
IP Over OSI port..................................................................................................... 42
To execute the equipment software reset......................................................................... 43
ROUTING TABLE................................................................................................................. 44
To verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway currently used by the selected
equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway)...................................... 44
To add an element to the Routing Table........................................................................... 45
To remove one or more elements from the Routing Table................................................... 45
To set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway...................................................... 46
To delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway ............................................................ 46
Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info) ................................................................ 46
STORED ROUTING TABLE .................................................................................................... 48
To verify the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address present into the backup
memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway)....... 48
To add an element into the Stored Routing Table.............................................................. 49
To remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table ........................................ 50
To set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table ............ 50
To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table................... 50
REMOTE ELEMENT TABLE .................................................................................................... 51
To verify the remote equipment list................................................................................. 51
To add a station to the list ............................................................................................. 52
To rename a station of the list........................................................................................ 52
To remove a station of the list ........................................................................................ 53
To add an equipment to the list ...................................................................................... 53
To remove an equipment from the list ............................................................................. 54
To reset the remote equipment list ................................................................................. 54
Remote equipment list (more info).................................................................................. 54
PERFORMANCE MONITORING............................................................................................... 56
Measures available for the ALCplus2 IDU equipment.......................................................... 57
Quality parameters description (PM measures) ................................................................. 58
To verify the status of the PM measures .......................................................................... 61
To activate a PM measure.............................................................................................. 62
To activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously................................................ 62
To deactivate a PM measure........................................................................................... 62
To deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously.............................................. 63
To display the results of a measure and the status of the threshold exceeding alarms............ 63
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure........................................................... 64
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure ...................................................... 69
G828 Radio <radio branch> measure ........................................................................ 74
G828 E1 Line Side measure ..................................................................................... 78
G828 E1 Radio Side measure ................................................................................... 82
G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> measure ......................... 84
ACM Radio A measure ............................................................................................. 89
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure....................................................................... 95
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure....................................................................... 98
PM measures (more info)..............................................................................................101
REPORTS & LOGGERS MAINTENANCE...................................................................................102
To save the equipment configuration, the alarm/status signals and the operations
executed by the users to file .........................................................................................102
To delete the signals stored into the equipment controller .................................................105
To delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller .......................................105
SNTP & WAKE UP CONFIGURATION......................................................................................106
To verify the SNTP functionality.....................................................................................106
To set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality ..................................107
To disable the SNTP functionality ...................................................................................107
To verify the Wake Up functionality status ......................................................................108
To set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality .............................108
To disable the Wake Up functionality..............................................................................109
Server NTP functionality (more info) ..............................................................................109
Wake Up functionality (more info)..................................................................................110
SD MEMORY MANAGEMENT.................................................................................................111
To verify the status and the configuration of the SD memory.............................................111
To execute the automatic equipment restart from SD memory in case of replacement
of IDU unit .................................................................................................................113
To execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory.....................114
To execute the management and maintenance of the SD memory......................................115
To delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD memory ............115
To disable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory......................................116
To disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench
after an automatic sw update from SD memory .........................................................116
To force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from
the SD memory to the controller..............................................................................116
To copy the equipment sw from the SD memory to the controller (Sw Dwl SD) ..............116
SD memory card (more info).........................................................................................117
SOFTWARE INFO & MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................119
To verify the firmware version of the equipment ..............................................................119
To update the firmware of the equipment .......................................................................120
To switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the main controller .................121
To verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment ................................................121
To update the WEB LCT application................................................................................122
To verify the communication stack in use........................................................................122
To modify the communication stack in use ......................................................................123
To execute the equipment software reset........................................................................123
Update of the equipment firmware (more info) ................................................................124
BACKUP/RESTORE CONFIGURATION....................................................................................125
To save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup) ....................................125
To transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration restore).................125
To retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before
the last operation of configuration restore (configuration revert) ........................................126
Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (more info) ...............................................126
UNIT LIST ........................................................................................................................127
To verify the characteristics of the equipment units (real configuration) ..............................127
ACTIVE MANUAL OPERATION ..............................................................................................129
To verify the active manual operations ...........................................................................129
To verify/modify the manual operation timeout................................................................130
ALARM SEVERITY CONFIGURATION .....................................................................................131
To verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms.......................131
To enable/disable an alarm...........................................................................................132
To enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm...................................................132
To change the severity level of an alarm.........................................................................133
Enabling/forwarding/severity of an alarm (more info) .......................................................133
VIEW LOGGED USER..........................................................................................................134
To verify the users connected to the equipment ...............................................................134
To force the logout of a user .........................................................................................135
USER MANAGER................................................................................................................136
To verify the user list ...................................................................................................136
To add a user to the list ...............................................................................................137
To modify a user into the list.........................................................................................137
To delete a user from the list ........................................................................................138
To change the password and the timeout of the System user (System Password).................138
To change the network password and timeout (Network Password) ....................................138
To change the password and timeout of the NMS5UX user (CEM password) .........................139
To verify/modify the IP address of remote machines that contain a remote user (different
from WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to
the equipment of remote users......................................................................................139
User list (more info).....................................................................................................140
FEATURES MANAGEMENT ...................................................................................................141
To verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment .....................................................141
To enable the new functionalities ...................................................................................142
RMON..............................................................................................................................143
To display the enabling/disabling status of the collection of the statistic counters
of the equipment Ethernet ports ....................................................................................143
To activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ................................144
To deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port.............................144
To display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port (RMON)..............................144
Implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by WEB LCT ...................146
EQUIPMENT MENU ............................................................................................................... 148
MAIN MENU......................................................................................................................149
EQUIPMENT......................................................................................................................150
Configurator ...............................................................................................................151
To verify/modify the radio configuration....................................................................151
To verify/modify the management of STM-1 stream ...................................................153
To verify/modify the management of synchronisation .................................................153
To verify/modify the management of nodal configuration ............................................153
To verify/modify the equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (AlcPlus2...) ...........154
To verify/modify the number of equipment of the nodal configuration (AlcPlus2...) .........154
To verify/modify the equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (ALplus).................154
To verify/modify the number of equipment of the nodal configuration (ALplus)...............154
To verify/modify the protection of the nodal configuration (ALplus)...............................155
Mod. Cap/Link ID.........................................................................................................156
To verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and
the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation ............................................156
To display the table summarizing the radio transport ..................................................158
To modify the reference band/modulation .................................................................159
To modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation..........................................159
To modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled) .................................159
To modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled) 160
To modify the number of E1 streams permanently allocated (high priority streams)........160
To modify the number of E1 streams assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams) ...160
To verify/modify the link identification number ..........................................................160
To verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.) ......................161
Adaptive modulation (more info)..............................................................................162
General Preset ............................................................................................................164
To verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception......................................164
To verify/modify the enabling of the switch in transmission .........................................164
To verify/modify the T and N parameters (Tx Switch Control) ......................................165
To reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote... alarm (Tx Switch Control) .......................166
To verify/modify the radio branch label .....................................................................166
SYNCHRONISATION...........................................................................................................167
To verify the status of the synchronism sources...............................................................167
To enable/disable the use of a synchronism source in input ...............................................169
To verify/modify the use priority of a synchronism source in input......................................171
To force the use of a synchronism source in input ............................................................171
To set a synchronism source in input as preferential.........................................................172
To set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for T2/T3 2.........................................172
To set the source type used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0) ................................172
To verify the alarms status of synchronism source in input ................................................173
To force the status of the T0 synchronisation...................................................................173
To verify the alarms status of T0 synchronism.................................................................173
To manage the output of synchronism (T12) on tributary A/B and set the interface
(output/input) of tributary A/B ......................................................................................174
To re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation..........175
Management of synchronisation (more info)....................................................................176
Synchronism sources in input ..................................................................................176
Internal synchronism T0 .........................................................................................179
Synchronism in output T12 .....................................................................................179
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation....180
BASE BAND ......................................................................................................................182
Ethernet Switch...........................................................................................................183
To verify/modify the aging time of the MAC addresses stored in the specific table...........183
To verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet .........................................185
To verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field........................................185
To verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue ......185
To verify/assign the output queue to a packet, in input to any Ethernet port,
according to its Tag 802.1p.....................................................................................185
To verify/modify the time interval (Hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding
modality is activated and deactivated .......................................................................186
To verify/modify which queue a packet must be assigned to, in input from
the Ethernet ports, depending on its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3) ....................................186
To verify the existing virtual LANs............................................................................187
To create a virtual Lan............................................................................................189
To modify the configuration of a virtual Lan...............................................................189
To delete a virtual Lan............................................................................................190
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4..........................................................................................191
To verify/modify the enabling status of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4).........192
To verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the external port
(Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface) ........................................................194
To verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation
is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the external port
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................195
To verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the external port
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................195
To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address
in the specific table (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) ............................................................196
To restart the auto negotiation procedure for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) 196
To verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role)
(Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface) ........................................................196
To verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles
of the line synchronism (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface) .......................196
To verify/modify the interface type of the external port (Lan3, Lan 4) ...........................197
To verify/modify the default Vid value of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) ......197
To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from
the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) ...............................................................199
To verify/modify the behaviour of the external port towards the packets in output
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................199
To force the value of Vid of the external port to the default value
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................200
To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the external port
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................200
To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from
the external port to the output queue (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)...................................201
To verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from
the external port which, in output, the Tag is added to (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) ...........202
To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................202
To verify the status of the external port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................202
To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the external port
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................204
To verify/modify the priority of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (SPT/ELP) .....204
To verify/modify the connection cost of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
(STP/ELP) .............................................................................................................204
To verify the status of the external port in relation to the ethernet line protection
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................204
To enable/disable the ethernet line protection for the external port
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................205
To verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality
of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)............................................................206
To activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the external port
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................207
To verify the current status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) ........................208
To verify the type of laser module (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)................................209
To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)............209
To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface).......209
To enable manually the laser transmission (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) ....................210
To execute the test laser functioning status (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)...................210
Port A ........................................................................................................................211
To verify/modify the enabling status of the internal port .............................................211
To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address
in the specific table for the internal port....................................................................212
To verify/modify the default Vid value of the internal port ...........................................212
To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from
the internal port ....................................................................................................214
To verify/modify the behaviour of the internal port towards the packets in output ..........214
To force the value of Vid of the internal port to the default value..................................215
To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the internal port ..215
To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input
from the internal port to the output queue ................................................................215
the internal port which, in output, the Tag is added to ................................................216
To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (internal port)217
To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol............217
To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the internal port................................218
To verify/modify the priority of the internal port (STP)................................................219
To verify/modify the connection cost of the internal port (STP) ....................................219
Spanning Tree.............................................................................................................220
To verify/modify the version of the Spanning Tree protocol .........................................220
To verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets ...................................221
To verify/modify the Forward Delay interval ..............................................................221
To verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets .......................................222
To verify the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol .........222
To verify the MAC Address of a bridge ......................................................................223
To verify/modify the priority of a bridge....................................................................224
To verify the status of the external ports in relation to the ethernet line protection .........224
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (more info) .................................................................225
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (more info) ................................................................225
TDM Tributaries...........................................................................................................227
E1 .......................................................................................................................228
STM-1..................................................................................................................231
VC-4....................................................................................................................240
VC-12 ..................................................................................................................245
Cross Connection.........................................................................................................251
To display the connections of the equipment in graphic format.....................................251
To display the connections of the equipment in table format ........................................257
To execute a Tributary-Radio connection...................................................................258
To execute a Tributary-Tributary connection..............................................................258
To delete one or more connections...........................................................................259
To enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop) ..............................................259
To disable an Auto-Loop .........................................................................................260
To verify/modify the connection label .......................................................................260
To execute an E1 NBUS <-> E1 connection (AlPlus/3 Element/Protected)......................261
Cross connection matrix (more info).........................................................................261
RADIO .............................................................................................................................265
Radio Branch ..............................................................................................................266
To verify/modify the RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment ....266
To verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier .............................................268
To verify/modify the operation of the transmitter .......................................................268
To verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply................................................268
To verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) .........................................269
To verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx).....................................269
To verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC....................................................269
To verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter ..........................271
To verify/modify the intervention threshold (High/Low) of the ATPC device....................271
To display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/
reception for every ACM profile................................................................................271
MAINTENANCE..................................................................................................................273
LAN Statistics..............................................................................................................274
To verify the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ethernet ports........274
To reset the counters results ..................................................................................276
S/N Meas ...................................................................................................................277
To verify the measure of the S/N ratio......................................................................277
Fade Margin................................................................................................................278
To execute the calculation of the link margin and check/delete the results (Fade Margin) 278
Messages displayed during the execution of the Fade Margin .......................................280
To verify the values of the power parameters stored into the equipment and
used for the calculation of the Fade Margin................................................................280
Calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin) (more info) .............................................281
PRBS .........................................................................................................................282
To verify the PRBS measure status...........................................................................282
To activate/reset the PRBS measure.........................................................................283
To deactivate the PRBS measure..............................................................................283
To verify/modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure ..................................283
To enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure.................................................284
Radio Loop .................................................................................................................285
To verify the radio loops status................................................................................285
To activate a radio loop ..........................................................................................286
To deactivate a radio loop.......................................................................................286
Radio loop (more info)............................................................................................286
Radio Switch A............................................................................................................287
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches...................287
To modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch) .................288
To modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch).............288
To modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential)..........289
To modify the Wait Time parameter .........................................................................289
To force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration.............................................................................................................289
Radio switch (more info).........................................................................................289
SWITCH...........................................................................................................................291
STM-1........................................................................................................................292
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch....................292
To modify the management of the STM-1 switch........................................................293
To modify the logic of STM-1 switch .........................................................................294
To set the primary STM-1 stream as preferential ........................................................294
To force the switch on preferential STM-1 stream without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration.............................................................................................................294
STM-1 switch (more info)........................................................................................295
Nodal Bus...................................................................................................................296
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch .....................296
To modify the management of the nodal switch .........................................................297
To force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for
the Wait Time expiration.........................................................................................297
Nodal switch (more info).........................................................................................298
USER INPUT .....................................................................................................................299
Local User Input ..........................................................................................................300
To verify the local user input status..........................................................................300
To verify/modify the name of a local user input..........................................................301
To verify/modify the rest condition of a local user input ..............................................301
To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local user input............301
Enabling the user input alarms (more info)................................................................302
Remote User Input ......................................................................................................303
To verify the remote user input status ......................................................................303
To change the name of a remote user input ..............................................................304
To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote user input ........304
USER OUTPUT...................................................................................................................305
To verify the user output status.....................................................................................305
To verify/modify the name of an user output ...................................................................306
To verify/modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an user output .....................306
To verify/modify the signals coupled to the user output ....................................................306
To enable the forced activation of the relays contact from operator ....................................307
To force the user output activation.................................................................................307
To remove the forcing of the user output ........................................................................307
ALARMS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 308
OPERATIONS LIST ............................................................................................................... 313
PARAMETERS LIST............................................................................................................... 321
GLOSSARY ........................................................................................................................... 327
ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 330
WEB LCT APPLICATION
The WEB LCT application allows an user connecting to an equipment via his own machine (pc, workstation,
etc.) using the operating system* and the Web browser at his disposal.
WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller. It does not require any additional module
installed on the user PC, except for the SCT/LMT program or the WEB Lct Console program, necessary to
WEB LCT for the management of the file transfer between PC and equipment (FTP), of the serial/USB/mo-
dem connection (PPP) and of the help on-line of WEB LCT (Help Web Server).
* For operating systems different from MS Windows, a FTP server, an Help WEB server and a PPP management module
must be installed on ones PC.
The WEB LCT application can be started:
From browser (see Fig.1).
In this case, by means of the WEB LCT interface, it is possible to manage 2 machines at most:
local equipment (equipment which you are connected to) and remote equipment (equipment de-
fined as Remote Link in the remote equipment list of the local equipment).
From SCT/LMT program (see Fig.2).
In this case, the WEB LCT interface of the equipment selected by the SCT/LMT interface is
opened.
Through the WEB LCT application, it is possible to manage:
The equipment configuration: radio configuration, capacity, modulation, RF channels, tributar-
ies, parameters, etc. (pag.148).
The properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, etc.) and to execute the reset of the
equipment software (pag.36).
The communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment
(pag.38).
The stating Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment
(Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway) (pag.44).
The static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address stored in the equipment (Stored Rout-
ing Table and Stored Default Gateway) (pag.48).
The remote equipment list (pag.51).
The measures of Performance Monitoring (pag.56).
The saving to file of the equipment configuration, of the status/alarm signals and of the opera-
tions executed by the users (pag.102).
The automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment from a network element
and the Wake Up trap (pag.106).
The memory card SD for the backup/restore of the equipment configuration and software
(pag.111).
The equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software present in the equipment and the communica-
tion stack used by the equipment (pag.119).
The back-up/restore of the whole equipment configuration (pag.125).
The hardware constituting the equipment (pag.127).
The manual operations and the relevant timeout (pag.129).
The forward status of the alarms and their severity level (pag.131).
The users connected to the equipment (pag.134).
The equipment users list (pag.136).
The functionalities enabled for the equipment (features key) (pag.141).
The statistic counters of the Ethernet ports of the equipment (pag.143).
In order to access the WEB LCT page, a valid SCT/LMT user (username and password) is necessary. With
valid user (username and password) we mean an user present in the users list stored in the controller (see
pag.140).
It is possible to open:
More WEB LCT pages on more machines or on the same machine, using the same user or dif-
ferent users.
Only one WEB LCT page relevant to the same equipment.
More WEB LCT pages relevant to different equipment.
For more information about the limits of the application, refer to the specific paragraph (pag.14).
Fig.1 WEB LCT application (start-up of the WEB LCT page from browser)
Fig.2 WEB LCT application (start-up of the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT)
WEB LCT ALCPLUS2 IDU APPLICATION
The WEB LCT application is called WEB LCT <equipment type> depending on the equipment type to man-
age.
This guide describes the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU application present in the equipment of series ALS with
ALCplus2 IDU.
In this guide, to make the writing easier, the wording:
WEB LCT identifies the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU application.
ALCplus2 IDU identifies the equipment of series ALS with ALCplus2 IDU.
VERSION
The version of the WEB LCT application present in the equipment controller can be verified opening the
relevant WEB LCT page and executing one of the following operations:
Select the About tab.
Select the command Main Menu > Software info & Maintenance > Web LCT tab.
LIMITS
* If the WEB LCT page is opened from browser (local equipment and remote equipment - see Fig.1). If the
WEB LCT page is opened from SCT application, the user can connect only to the local equipment (see
Fig.2).
Maximum number of... Limit
Equipment into the remote equipment list 100
Stations into the remote equipment list 30
Equipment which can be connected contemporarily via a single
WEB LCT page
2 *
Users (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT e NMS5UX) contemporarily connected
to an equipment via the WEB LCT page
2
Signals into the Events List area 400
INSTALLATION
WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller. It does not require any installation on the
user PC.
To install or update the WEB LCT application present in an equipment, see pag.122.
As help to the WEB LCT application for the management of the FTP, PPP and Help Web Server, it is neces-
sary to use the SCT/LMT or WEB Lct Console program.
The instructions for the installation of the SCT/LMT and Web Lct Console programs are reported in the rel-
evant manuals.
START-UP
WEB LCT can be run:
From browser (pag.17).
In this case, by means of the WEB LCT interface, it is possible to manage the local equipment
(equipment which you are connected to) and the remote equipment (equipment defined as Re-
mote Link in the remote equipment list of the local equipment).
From the SCT/LMT program (pag.23).
In this case, the WEB LCT interface of the equipment selected by the SCT/LMT interface is
opened.
For the management of the FTP, PPP and Help Web Server, it is necessary to start even the SCT/LMT or
WEB Lct Console (WLC) program.
The instructions to start the SCT/LMT and Web Lct Console programs are reported in the relevant manuals.
START-UP FROM BROWSER
The following procedure requires that:
The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment which you are connecting to.
The user, you wish to use to open the WEB LCT page, is valid. With valid user (username and
password) we mean an user present in the users list stored in the controller.
Depending on the type of used physical connection PC-equipment, follow the specific procedure:
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (Ethernet connection) - pag.17.
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (USB connection) - pag.18.
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (serial connection) - pag.18.
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (connection via modem) - pag.19.
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (Ethernet connection)
If this type of connection is used, checks or settings are not generally necessary. Only if more
network cards are equipped, it will be necessary to select the card you wish to use (Host Adapter) (see
Web Lct Console user manual).
When the equipment is connected to the PC via LAN network, the relevant WEB LCT page can be opened
also selecting the equipment from the address book of Web Lct Console (see relevant documentation).
1. If not already active, run WLC program (see relevant documentation).
2. Run a browser.
3. Type in the address box:
http://<IP address of the local equipment>
With IP address we mean the address of the equipment supervision port from which you wish to reach
the equipment itself.
The WEB LCT login page opens.
4. Type, into the User box, the name of the SCT/LMT user to use to activate the connection.
5. Type, into the Password box, the access code coupled with the set user.
6. Check the Remember Me box if you wish that, on the next opening of the WEB LCT application of the
considered equipment, the current username and password are automatically displayed. Otherwise un-
check the considered box.
7. Press Login.
If the typed values are correct, the WEB LCT page of the local equipment and of the remote equipment
is displayed.
Fig.3 shows an example of WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU pages.
The items present in the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page of the local equipment and of the remote equip-
ment are the same and are described in Fig.5.
As regards the messages that can be displayed during the start procedure of WEB LCT go to pag.20.
After the opening of the WEB LCT page depicted in Fig.3, the Login page of the browser remains avail-
able pointing out the characteristics of the connected equipment. In any moment, it is possible to close
the WEB LCT page and re-open it without executing the login but simply selecting the label Click here
in the Login window.
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (USB connection)
If this type of connection is used, before activating the connection, the USB driver must be
installed and configured (see Web Lct Console user manual).
Then, if you think the USB driver does not operate correctly, execute the controls pointed out in the Web
Lct Console user manual.
When the equipment is connected to PC via an USB connection, the connection management is implement-
ed by WLC program.
1. Connect the equipment to ones PC by means of the USB cable.
2. If not already active, run Web Lct Console program and open the relevant graphical interface (see rel-
evant documentation).
The Web Lct Console window opens.
3. Press Options.
The Options window opens.
4. Select the Connect using direct serial cable option in the PPP area.
5. Press Ok.
6. Execute one of the following operations:
In the Web Lct Console window, press Connect.
Select , press the right button of the mouse and select Connect in the pop-up menu.
If the connection operation is successful, the default browser is opened with the WEB LCT login page.
10.Press Login.
is displayed.
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (serial connection)
If this type of connection is used, checks or settings are generally not necessary as, at the
installation of WLC, the Remote Access (LctDirectPPP) is automatically installed and config-
ured.
If you think the Remote Access does not operate correctly, verify its configuration as points out in Web Lct
Console user manual.
When the equipment is connected to PC via the serial connection, the connection management is imple-
mented by WLC program.
1. Connect the equipment to ones PC by means of the serial cable.
3. Press Options.
4. Select the Connect using direct serial cable option in the PPP area.
5. Press Ok.
10.Press Login.
is displayed.
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (connection via modem)
If this type of connection is used, before activating the connection, the default modem must be config-
ured (see Web Lct Console user manual).
When the equipment is connected to PC via modem, the connection management is implemented by WLC
program.
1. Connect the equipment to ones PC by means of the modem.
3. Press Options.
4. Select the Connect using a modem option in the PPP area.
5. Press Ok.
10.Press Login.
is displayed.
Messages displayed at the start of WEB LCT
At the start of WEB LCT, the display of the message:
Welcome in the WebLct Software upload utility.... The WEB LCT program is not present on the
equipment you wish to connect to.
In order to install WEB LCT, follow the procedure To update the WEB LCT application (pag.122)
starting from step 3.
Warning: in order to view the contents you must install Adobe Flash Player.... It is necessary to
install or to update the version of Adobe Flash Player present on ones PC for a correct use of
WEB LCT. The program can be installed/updated from the web site:
www.siaemic.com > Login (to access to the Download area the registration is necessary)
> Download area - Software > WEB LCT (Windows version) > Adobe Flash Player...
www.adobe.com.
Login Fail. Problem: Invalid User!. It means that the typed username is wrong and/or not
present in the equipment user list or that the user password is wrong.
Login Fail. Problem: The equipment is update protected by element manager, retry to login as
Read Only user. It means that the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/
NMS5LX supervisory system and the NMS5UX user has prevented the possibility, for the SCT/
LMT user, to be able to execute the login of the equipment.
In this case, it is necessary that the NMS5UX user enables again the SCT/LMT user for the ex-
ecution of the operation.
Login Fail. Problem: To many WEB users!. It means that the equipment has been connected to
the maximum number of allowed users (see par. Limits - pag.14).
Fig.3 WEB LCT page (local and remote equipment)
Fig.3 notes
(1) The local equipment is the equipment which you are connected to (equipment which the IP address
typed in the command line of the browser corresponds to).
At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the local equipment with the
user/profile entered during the login request. In any moment it is possible to execute the logout
(pag.29) and re-execute the login (pag.28) using the same or a different user with respect to that
used for the login.
If the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system, the su-
pervisory system considers the connection of a SCT/LMT user with Read Only profile a LCT connec-
tion in Monitoring mode. While the supervisory system considers the connection to the equipment
of a SCT/LMT user with Station Operator or System profile a LCT connection in Configuration mode.
(2) For a correct display of the equipment in the WEB LCT page, it is NECESSARY insert in the remote
equipment table of the local equipment:
The local equipment with type Managed by SCT.
The remote equipment with type Remote Link.
If an equipment of type Remote Link is not present in the remote equipment table, the message
Warning: Unable to open remote element interface... is displayed in this area, pointing out the ab-
sence of the remote equipment. Select the label Click here to display, in the WEB LCT page of the
local equipment, the Remote Element Manager contextual area (see Fig.15) where the remote
equipment table can be managed.
At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the remote equipment in Monitor
modality. In order to set or modify the parameters of the remote equipment, the user shall execute
the login for the remote equipment. Even for the remote equipment, in any moment it is possible
to execute the logout and re-execute the login using the same or a different user with respect to
that used for the first login.
If more equipment configured as Remote Link are present in the remote equipment list, the ap-
plication will automatically acknowledge as remote equipment the FIRST equipment of Remote Link
type present in the list, even if this one is not physically connected, with respect to the local equip-
ment, to the other side of the radio link.
In the remote equipment table, the equipment are sorted in increasing order by their IP address.
Moreover, the bar Remote Element List is displayed on the right side of the WEB LCT page of the
local equipment: selecting the bar, the Available Remote Element List pop-up window is displayed,
where the equipment configured as Remote Link present in the remote equipment list is listed.
For each equipment, the following characteristics are reported:
Station. Station name.
Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.
IP Address. IP address.
Radio Direction. Radio direction (radio branch)
Radio Link Status. Radio link status between local and remote equipment. Wording:
Link Up (green). The radio link is active.
Link Down (red). The radio link is inactive.
Conn. Status. Connection status between equipment and WEB LCT page (PC). Wording:
Connected (green). The connection is active.
Unreacheable (red). The connection is inactive.
Selecting an equipment in the list, the relevant WEB LCT page is displayed. For example, if the fol-
lowing remote equipment list is defined for the local equipment A:
Equipment B - 172.18.10.23 - Remote Link
Equipment C - 172.18.10.25 - Remote Link
At the opening of the WEB LCT page of equipment A from browser, the WEB LCT pages of equipment
A and equipment B (equipment of type Remote Link present in the Remote Element Table with low-
est IP address) will be displayed. In order to display the WEB LCT page of equipment C, instead of
that of equipment B, it is sufficient to open the Available Remote Element List window and select
the area pointing out the characteristics of equipment C.
To close the Available Remote Element List pop-up window, select the bar Remote Element List.
START-UP FROM SCT/LMT
The following procedure requires that:
The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment you are connecting to.
The user, you wish to use to open the WEB LCT page, is valid. With valid user (username and
password) we mean an user present in the users list stored in the controller.
The SCT/LMT is installed on the PC. More information about the SCT/LMT program is reported
in the relevant documentation.
1. If not already active, run SCT/LMT program (see relevant documentation).
2. Activate the connection with the wished equipment (see relevant documentation).
3. Double click on the record representing the equipment in the SCT/LMT window or selecting the record
of the equipment and the Equipment > LCT Interface command.
The WEB LCT page of the equipment opens.
Fig.4 shows an example of WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page.
The items present in the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page are described in Fig.5.
At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the equipment with the user/profile
of the equipment in the SCT/LMT window.
In any moment, it is possible to execute the logout (pag.29) and re-execute the login (pag.28) using
the same or a different user with respect to that used for the login.
If both the LCT module and the WEB LCT module are available for a given equipment type, the se-
lection of the equipment in the SCT/LMT window and the successive selection of the LCT Interface
command automatically open the LCT equipment interface.
Some equipment types have only the WEB LCT program and not the LCT module. In this case, when
the LCT Interface command is selected, a message is displayed warning that, for the considered
equipment type, only the WEB interface is available. The message is displayed even if the selected
equipment type has the LCT module but this has not been installed on ones PC.
In this case, there is no need to differentiate the opening of the WEB LCT page according to the con-
nection type, as the connection management is executed by the SCT/LMT program itself. For more infor-
mation, refer to the relevant documentation.
Fig.4 WEB LCT page (local equipment)
WEB LCT ALCPLUS2 IDU PAGE
Fig.5 shows an example of WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page subdivided in the following areas:
Info/status equipment area (pag.26)
Contextual area (pag.30)
Events List area (pag.33)
Fig.5 WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page
INFO/STATUS EQUIPMENT AREA
The info/equipment status area points out the characteristics and the connection status of the equipment
as depicted in Fig.6.
The information displayed in the area are updated at regular intervals depending on the timeout set by
the user.
Moreover, by means of the items present in the area, it is possible:
To verify the version of the WEB LCT application (pag.28).
To verify/modify the timeout used for the update of all the information present in the WEB LCT
page (pag.28).
To execute the login of the user (pag.28).
To execute the logout of the user (pag.29).
Fig.6 info/status equipment area (WEB LCT page)
Fig.6 notes
(1) The wording ALCplus2 IDU points out the ALCplus2 IDU radio equipment.
(2) The field is not present if no identifier is assigned to the equipment.
(3) Label:
Read & Write, Station Op or System. The equipment is in connected/login status and the user
who has required the login has, respectively, a profile of type Read and Write, Station Op-
erator or System.
Monitor. The equipment is in connected/monitor status or in connected/login status the user
who has required the login has profile of type Read Only.
(4) Tab:
About. Displays the version of the WEB LCT application present on the equipment.
Options. Displays and manages the timeout used for the update of all the information
present in the WEB LCT page.
Login. Manages the login and the logout of the user.
(5) Label:
On Line (green). The equipment is in connected status. In this condition, the parameters can
be verified/modified.
Off Line (red). The equipment is in disconnected status. In this condition, the parameters
cannot be verified/modified. The browser sends the command of reconnection at regular in-
tervals (timeout set by the user) until when the equipment returns in connected status or
the WEB LCT page is closed.
(6) Box:
Urg. Status of the urgent alarms (alarms with Critical or Major severity). The box, according
to the severity of the alarms present into the equipment, can get different colours:
Orange. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Major severity
Red. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Critical severity.
Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Critical or Major severity.
Not Urg. Status of the not urgent alarms (alarms with Minor or Warning severity). The box,
according to the severity of the alarms present into the equipment, can get different colours:
Light blue. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Warning severity.
Yellow. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Minor severity.
Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Minor or Warning severity.
Radio 1A. Status of the radio connection with branch 1A.
Depending on the equipment configuration type, the box can take on different colours. In
detail in configuration:
1+0. Color box:
Green. The radio connection works properly.
Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A.
1+1. Color box:
Orange. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A (the branch 2A works
correctly).
Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A (the branch 2A does not
correctly work).
Radio 2A. Status of the radio connection with branch 2A.
The parameter is meaningful only for equipment in protected configuration.
If the box is of color:
Orange. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A (the branch 1A works correct-
ly).
Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A (the branch 2A does not correctly
work).
ManOp. Activation status of the manual operations. If the box is of color:
Light blue. A manual forcing is enabled (e.g. a loop).
Grey. No manual forcing is active.
Dwl. Activation status of the update of the equipment firmware. If the box is of color:
Light blue. The firmware update is in progress.
Grey. The firmware update is not in progress.
x C. Operating temperature of the equipment. If the box is of color:
Green. The operating temperature of the equipment is lower than 75C.
Orange. The operating temperature of the equipment is between 75C and 80C.
Red. The operating temperature of the equipment is higher than 80C.
<radio configuration>. Wording:
1+0. Unprotected radio configuration.
1+1 FD. Radio configuration with hetero-frequential protection.
1+1 HS. Radio configuration with iso-frequential protection.
The absence of alarms, of manual forcing and of download in progress is pointed out by the grey
box.
(7) For each branch, a line is foreseen pointing out from left to right in the column:
Radio. Branch which the data present in the relevant row refer to. Wording:
Tx.... Operating status and radio parameters of the branches (1 and 2) relevant to
transmission.
Rx... Operating status and radio parameters of the branches (1 and 2) relevant to
reception.
The boxes Tx2A and Rx2A are present and meaningful only for the equipment in protected
configuration.
The operating status of the branch, independently if the switch is automatic or manual, is
represented by the colour of the box:
Green. Working branch.
White. Standby branch.
In the equipment in 1+1 hetero-frequential configuration, the branches 1 and 2 transmit at
the same time; in this case both the Tx1A and Tx2A boxes will be green.
ACM Prof. Current ACM profile.
TDM Cap. Radio capacity reserved to the TDM tributaries (E1, STM-1).
ETH Cap. Radio capacity reserved to the Ethernet tributaries.
Chan - Freq. RF channel expressed as channel number (Chan) and relevant frequency
(Freq).
The wording UNAVAIL. points out that the RF channel is not set.
Power. Power in input to the receiver (lines Rx) and in output to the transmitter (lines Tx).
In the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration, the wording Std-by is present in the
line Tx relevant to the standby branch.
Both the powers are measured at the antenna flange.
To verify the version of the WEB LCT application
1. Select the About tab (see Fig.6).
The About tab opens.
The Version parameter points out the version of the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU application present in the
equipment controller.
To verify/modify the timeout used for the update of all the information
present in the WEB LCT page
1. Select the Options tab (see Fig.6).
The Change Options tab opens.
The Event polling interval parameter points out the time interval (timeout) between two successive up-
dates of the information present in the WEB LCT page.
2. To modify the parameter, set a number between 5 and 30 seconds.
3. Press Ok.
To execute the login of the user
1. Select the Login tab (see Fig.6).
The Change Login tab opens.
2. Type the name of the user, with which you wish to execute the login, in the User box.
3. Type the access code associated to the set use into the Password box.
4. Press Login.
If the operation is successful, the profile of the user who has executed the operation is pointed out in
the Curr. Profile box (Read and Write, Station Operator or System).
If the system displays the following message:
Login Fail. Problem: Invalid User!, it means that the typed username is wrong and/or not
present in the users list of the local equipment or that the user password is wrong.
Login Fail. The equipment is update protected by element manager, retry to login as Read Only
user, it means that the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX super-
visory system and the NMS5UX user has prevented the possibility, for the SCT/LMT user, to be
able to execute the login of the equipment. In this case, it is necessary that the NMS5UX user
enables again the SCT/LMT user for the execution of the operation.
Problem: To many WEB users! it means that the equipment has been connected to the maxi-
mum number of allowed users (see par. Limits - pag.14).
To execute the logout of the user
1. Select the Login tab (see Fig.6).
The Change Login tab opens.
2. Press Logout.
If the operation is successful, the wording Monitor is displayed in the Curr. Profile box.
CONTEXTUAL AREA
The contextual area is the part of the WEB LCT page where the equipment parameters are displayed. Its
content changes accordingly to the selected command.
In WEB LCT the commands allowing to verify/modify the equipment parameters are collected in the fol-
lowing menus:
Main Menu (pag.35). Commands for the management of the general equipment parameters
as, for example, the configuration of the supervision ports, the Routing Table, the remote equip-
ment table, the measure of Performance Monitoring, etc.
The commands of the Main Menu are displayed in the contextual area at the opening of the
WEB LCT page or each time you select the command Go to Main or Equipment Menu > Main
Menu as depicted in Fig.7.
Equipment Menu (pag.148). Commands for the management of the configuration parameters
typical of the equipment type which the WEB LCT page refers to.
The command of the Equipment Menu are displayed in a pop-up area that opens when the
mouse pointer passes over the Equipment Menu as depicted in Fig.8.
When a command is selected in the Main Menu or in the Equipment Menu, the contextual area displays
all the parameters relevant to the selected command.
Fig.9 displays an example.
For some commands, the parameters are subdivided in tabs. If all the tabs are not displayed at the same
time, the arrows keys are displayed to scroll the tabs.
In detail, use the keys to scroll the tabs and the key to display the list of the tabs.
The contextual area can moreover display the following messages:
WARNING. Access enabled only for SYSTEM users. The selected command is available only to
the user with profile System.
You are forcing a manual operation. Operation timeout: <value>. The setting you wish to exe-
cute is a manual operation subjected to timeout.
For each equipment, a timeout can be set after which the relevant active manual operations
are automatically deactivated (see pag.129). The wording No Timeout points out that the time-
out is disabled; this means that a manual operation remains active until when the user deacti-
vates it.
Requesting Data. Please wait!, Sending Data. Please wait!. The request or the sending of data
is respectively in progress between the PC and the equipment.
Operation Fail! Wrong value assigned! A not allowed value has been set.
Operation Fail! Unable to Get or Update parameter(s). Wrong user profile or not logged yet! The
operation cannot be executed because the user profile in use is not enabled to execute the action
or is not logged to the equipment yet.
Not Implemented Yet!. The command is not available for the current version of the program.
Fig.7 Main Menu commands (WEB LCT page)
Fig.8 Equipment Menu commands (WEB LCT page)
Fig.9 Contextual area (WEB LCT page)
Fig.9 notes
(1) Select the Help command to display the help on-line.
(2) Select the Go to Main command to display in the contextual area the commands of the Main Menu
(pag.35).
(3) Press Refresh to force the reading of the data from equipment.
If the push-button is not available, the connection with the equipment is not active.
(4) Press Apply to make the set changes operative.
Generally, on the selection of the push-button, a confirmation window is displayed. Some confirma-
tion windows are timed (for example, the confirmation windows of the manual operations). When
this period (pointed out by the clock) is elapsed, if the operator has not confirmed the operation,
the window is closed and the operation cancelled.
If the Apply push-button is not available:
It is not possible to execute changes because the user profile does not allow this or the
equipment is in connected/monitor status.
No parameter present in the window has been modified. In this case, the push-button be-
comes available when the value of a parameter is changed.
Another push-button is present in the contextual area for the confirmation of the operation
or the change of the parameters.
EVENTS LIST AREA
The Events List area displays the list of the status and alarm signals stored in the equipment controller as
depicted in Fig.10.
By means of the items present in the area, it is possible:
To verify/modify the filters applied to the list of alarm/status signals (pag.34).
While, by means of the Main Menu > Reports & Loggers Maintenance command, it is possible:
To save the equipment configuration, the alarm/status signals and the operations executed by
the users to file (pag.102).
To delete the signals stored into the equipment controller (pag.105).
For more information about the status/alarm signals, refer to pag.34.
Fig.10 Events list area (WEB LCT page)
Fig.10 notes
(1) To each signal a record is associated, where the following information is reported:
<Coloured box>. Box:
Green. Status signal.
Light blue. Alarm detected with Warning severity.
Yellow. Alarm detected with Minor severity.
Orange. Alarm detected with Major severity.
Red. Alarm detected with Critical severity.
Grey. Alarm detected/cleared.
Alphanumeric string which details the nature of the signal.
When the mouse passes over a signal, a window is displayed where the following information is re-
ported:
Signal type:
Status. Status signal.
Warning. Alarm detected with Warning severity.
Minor. Alarm detected with Minor severity.
Major. Alarm detected with Major severity.
Critical. Alarm detected with Critical severity.
Cleared. Alarm detected/cleared.
Logic group which the signal belongs to: LIM, RT, COMMON, etc.
Date/time of the signal detection (field In:).
Date/time of the signal clearing (field Out:).
This field is present only for the detected/cleared alarms (signals of type Cleared).
The date/time is set by the network element that has generated the signal. The format of the date/
time is the following: month/day/year hour:minutes:seconds.
(2) Wording:
Filter is Off. No filter is active.
Filter is On. At least one filter is active.
(3) The information present in the list are updated at regular intervals.
The period between an update and the successive one is pointed out by the clock.
If you want to update the information immediately without waiting for the refresh period select the
Reload command.
To verify/modify the filters applied to the list of the alarm/status signals
1. In the Events list area of the WEB LCT page (see Fig.10) if present the wording:
Filter is Off. No filter is active for the status/alarm signals displayed in the area.
Filter is On. At least one filter is active for the status/alarm signals.
2. To verify the status of the filters, select the Filter is... command.
A tab opens where the following filters are displayed:
Status. Status signal.
Warning. Alarm detected with Warning severity.
Minor. Alarm detected with Minor severity.
Major. Alarm detected with Major severity.
Critical. Alarm detected with Critical severity.
Cleared. Alarm detected and cleared.
Box:
. Filter active. For example, if the Status box is active the status signals will not be present in
the list.
. Filter inactive.
3. To modify the filters, activate/deactivate the specific boxes.
4. Select .
Each time a filter is applied, not only the currently displayed records are considered, but even all the
records stored in the equipment controller.
The setting of the filters remains valid until it is not modified by the user or the WEB LCT is closed.
Alarm and status signals (more info)
The term alarm defines the fault signal generated by an error or malfunction of the equipment or of any
component that composes it.
The term status identifies instead the signals referring to any event that does not points out a malfunction
but a status change, an operation in progress or an operating indication.
A maximum of 400 events are recorded in the equipment controller. When this limit is exceeded, each new
event will overwrite the oldest event.
The term event defines each single signal of status, detected alarm and cleared alarm.
MAIN MENU
In the Main Menu of the WEB LCT page, the following commands are present:
Equipment Properties (pag.36). It manages the properties (identifier, addresses, reference
date/time, etc.) and executes the equipment software reset.
Port Configuration (pag.38). It manages the communication ports reserved to the local and
remote supervision of the equipment.
Routing Table (pag.44). It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address
currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Stored Routing Table (pag.48). It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway
address stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
Remote Element Table, (pag.51). It manages the remote equipment list.
Performance Monitoring (pag.56). It manages the Performance Monitoring measures.
Reports & Loggers Maintenance (pag.102). It saves to file the equipment configuration, the
status/alarm signals and the operations executed by the users.
SNTP & Wake Up Configuration (pag.106). It manages the automatic acquisition of the ref-
erence date/time of the equipment from a network element and the Wake Up trap.
SD Memory Management (pag.111). It manages the memory card SD for the backup/restore
of the equipment configuration and software.
Software info & Maintenance (pag.119). It manages the equipment firmware, the WEB LCT
software present in the equipment and the communication stack used by the equipment.
Backup/Restore Configuration (pag.125). It manages the backup/restore from file of the
whole equipment configuration.
Unit List (pag.127). It manages the hardware constituting the equipment.
Active Manual Operation (pag.129). It manages the manual operations.
Alarm Severity Configuration (pag.131). It manages the alarm transmission and their sever-
ity level.
View Logged User (pag.134). It manages the users connected to the equipment.
User Manager (pag.136). It manages the list of the equipment users.
Features Management (pag.141). It manages the functionalities enabled for the equipment.
RMON (pag.143). It manages the statistic counters of the Ethernet ports of the equipment.
For each command, the relevant description points out the user profile necessary to be able to use it. In
detail, the wording:
Monitor. Equipment in connected/monitor status.
Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator or System. Equipment in connected/login status
and that the user, who has requested the login, has respectively profile Read only, Read and
write, Station operator or System.
Moreover, if the commands allows executing some settings or changes, for each user profile the type of
operation that can be executed is pointed out. The option Reading points out that it is possible to check
the parameters, the option Writing that it is possible to set or to change them.
EQUIPMENT PROPERTIES
* The Station Operator user cannot align the reference date/time of the equipment to the date/time of the
PC.
The Equipment Properties command manages the properties and executes the equipment software re-
set.
In detail, it is possible:
To verify the equipment properties (pag.36).
To modify the equipment identifier (pag.37)
To modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment (pag.37).
To execute the equipment software reset (pag.37).
To align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC (pag.37).
To verify the equipment properties
1. Select the Main Menu > Equipment Properties command.
The Equipment Properties contextual area opens, where the equipment properties are displayed (see
Fig.11).
Fig.11 Equipment Properties contextual area
Fig.11 notes
(1) Box:
Agent IP Address. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment.
Ethernet IP Address. IP Address of the communication port with the LAN network of the
equipment.
MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment.
Curr. Profile Reading
Reading/Writing
Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write
Station Operator*, System
Ethernet/OSI Address Relation. IP Address of the inner port for the interfacing with the OSI
router (IP Address) and the NSAP address (Gosip) of the equipment.
The parameters are meaningful and available only if the equipment is inserted into an
OSI network.
(2) Date, time format: month/day/year, hour: minutes: seconds.
To modify the equipment identifier
The Equipment Properties contextual area opens (see Fig.11).
2. Into the Equipment ID box, type an alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
The new value is pointed out into the ID field of the WEB LCT page.
To modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment
2. Into the Agent IP Address box, type, for each one of the four available spaces (subdivided by a point),
a number comprised between 0 and 255.
To execute the equipment software reset
After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.
2. Press Restart.
The message Are you sure to restart the equipment? is displayed.
3. Press Ok to execute the operation.
To align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time
of the PC
The operation could cause the logout of the user.
2. Press Align. Equip. Date/Time with PC Date/Time and confirm.
The value, present into the Equip. Date/Time box, is updated with the one present into the PC Date/
Time box.
PORT CONFIGURATION
The Port Configuration command manages the communication ports reserved to the local and remote
supervision of the equipment.
To verify/modify the characteristics of the communication ports reserved to the local and remote
supervision of the equipment (pag.38).
To execute the equipment software reset (pag.43).
To verify/modify the parameters of the communication ports reserved to the
local and remote supervision of the equipment
1. Select the Main Menu > Port Configuration command.
The Port Configuration contextual area opens, where the communication ports of the equipment are
displayed (see Fig.12).
2. To verify the parameters relevant to a port, bring at front the specific tab.
3. To modify the parameters of the:
Ethernet port (pag.39)
LCT PPP port (pag.40)
Radio 1A port (pag.40)
2Mb/s EOC port (pag.41)
IP Over OSI port (pag.42)
5. Press Store and confirm.
6. Press Restart and confirm.
Fig.12 Port Configuration contextual area
Reading/Writing
Station Operator, System
Fig.12 notes
(1) For the ALCplus2 IDU equipment are available the following tabs:
Ethernet. Communication port with the LAN network.
LCT PPP. Port for the connection to the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program
or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
Radio 1A. 64Kbit/s communication channel of the EOC radio frame.
2Mb/s EOC. Communication port represented by the 2Mb EOC signal.
IP Over OSI. Inner port for the interfacing with the OSI router.
Depending on the type of protocol managed by the selected equipment (IP/OSI), only the tabs rel-
evant to the communication ports managed by this protocol will be available.
(2) Push-button:
Restart. It executes the software reset of the equipment.
Store. It stores the values into the equipment controller.
Retrieve. It reads again the values set into the equipment controller.
Ethernet port
Parameter/area:
IP Address. IP address, of the communication port with the LAN network.
To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a
number comprised between 0 and 255. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of
the relevant IP NetMask field.
IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
number comprised between 0 and 255.
MNGT/x Alarm Sev. Enabling/severity status of the alarm of missing/fault of the connection cable
(MNGT/x Cable Fail) relevant to the Ethernet LAN port:
Disable. Disabled alarm.
Status. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level: status signal.
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level respectively:
Warning, Minor, Major or Critical.
To change the parameter selects the box and then the option from the list.
MNGT/x Cable Cross. Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the specific Ethernet LAN port:
mdi. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).
mdi-x. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.
In band management. Activation status of the in band supervision (the connection to the super-
vision is achieved by means of the traffic Lan tributaries).
In detail, if the LAN x box:
. The in band supervision on the specific LAN is not active.
. The in band supervision on the specific LAN is active.
To modify the parameter, activate/deactivate the specific boxes.
A VLan for this management can be reserved only when the in band supervision is active (at least
one LAN x box active).
In detail, if the value present in the VLan ID box is:
0. No VLan is reserved for the in band supervision.
Value different from 0. For the in band supervision, the VLan with the specific ID is reserved.
The x value points out the number of the Ethernet LAN port.
LCT PPP port
Parameter/push-button/area:
IP PPP Address. IP/PPP address of the port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/
LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
the relevant IP PPP NetMask field.
IP PPP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet
port (if the equipment is managed by IP protocol) or IP Over OSI (if the equipment is managed by
OSI protocol) as IP PPP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP
address is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the
user.
PC IP Address. IP address of the remote equipment:
Port IP Address + 1. The IP address of the considered port increased by 1 is assigned to the
remote equipment.
For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 is assigned to the port, the address
10.10.10.9 will be automatically assigned to the remote equipment.
Eth Broadcast Ip Address - 1 or IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1. The last IP address valid
for the IP subnetwork connected to the considered port is assigned to the remote equipment.
For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 with mask 255.255.255.0 is assigned to the
port, the address 10.10.10.254 will be automatically assigned to the remote equipment.
It is suggested to use this setting if you wish to use only one IP address, within the IP sub-
network, for the connection to the PC.
If the equipment is managed with protocol:
IP, the value Eth Broadcast Ip Address -1 is present.
OSI, the value IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1 is present.
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The address set by the user in the fields xxx is assigned to the remote
equipment.
In order to modify the parameter, select the wished option and, only for the last option, type the
wished IP.
The PPP operating mode is automatic: the port self-configures in Server mode and, when the connection
is set up, assigns the IP address to the remote equipment (see parameter PC IP Address).
Radio 1A port
Port available only for the equipment managed with the IP protocol and if the in band supervision is
disable (see Ethernet port - pag.39).
Parameter/push-button:
IP Address. IP/PPP address of the 64Kbit/s communication channel of the EOC radio frame.
user.
PPP Mode. Operating mode:
Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and keeps
active the connection to the remote equipment.
Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for the
remote equipment sets up the connection.
Bridge. Bridge connection (same IP network) between local and remote element.
To change the parameter selects the wished option.
2Mb/s EOC port
Port available only for the equipment managed with the IP protocol.
Parameter/push-button/area:
IP Address. IP/PPP address of the communication port represented by the 2Mb EOC signal.
user.
PPP Mode. PPP operating mode:
Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and keeps
active the connection to the remote equipment.
Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for the
remote equipment sets up the connection.
Signal input. Interface type to be used for the port under examination:
Not used. No interface.
E1. One or more 16Kbit channels of a timeslot relevant to A or B tributary (2Mbit/s).
To change the parameter select the wished option.
EOC. Setting of the 2Mb tributary/timeslot/16Kbit used for the connection with the remote terminal.
In detail, parameter:
2Mb Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used points out that the
system does not use any tributary.
If a value is not available, this means that the relevant tributary is used as output of the
T12 synchronism (see Fig.51).
Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot.
To change the parameter, type the number of the timeslot (value between 1 and 31).
16 Kbit PPP Map. Used 16Kbit (boxes with green color). The 16Kbit with the boxes of white
color are not used.
To change the parameter, select the wished boxes. At each selection, the box change its sta-
tus, it switches from active (green color) to deactivated (white color) and vice-versa.
The EOC area is available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal input area.
IP Over OSI port
Port available only for the equipment managed with the OSI protocol.
IP Over OSI tab
Parameter/area:
IP Address. IP address of the inner port of the equipment, for the interfacing with the OSI router.
the relevant IP NetMask field.
IP NetMask. Mask for the inner network address definition.
EOC Radio Side 1A. Usage modality of the Radio channel:
Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.
User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.
Bridge. The radio channel is used in Bridge Mode.
To change the parameter selects the box and then the value from the list.
Signal input. Interface type to be used for the port under examination:
Not used. No interface.
E1. One or more 16Kbit channels of a timeslot relevant to A or B tributary (2Mbit/s).
EOC. Setting of the 2Mb tributary/timeslot/16Kbit used for the connection with the remote terminal.
In detail, parameter:
2Mbit/s Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used points out that
the system does not use any tributary.
If a value is not available, this means that the relevant tributary is used as output of the
T12 synchronism (see Fig.51).
Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot.
16 Kbit PPP Map. Used 16Kbit (boxes with green color). The 16Kbit with the boxes of grey
color are not used.
To change the parameter, select the wished boxes. At each selection, the box change its status, it
switches from active (green color) to deactivated (grey color) and vice-versa.
The EOC area is available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal input area.
EOC 2Mbit Side. Usage modality of the EOC E1 channel:
Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.
User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.
The EOC 2Mbit Side area is available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal
input area.
NSap tab
Area:
Gosip Address. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address.
The IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved and Sel parameters cannot be changed.
To change the parameter:
System ID, type the wished value into the relevant boxes.
Press Set as MAC to set as physical address the System ID value.
AFI, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list.
Domain, type the values of the bytes that represent the domain.
Area, type the values of the bytes that represent the area.
Routing. Routing level of the OSI router:
L1. Intra domain (inside the domain/area)
L2. Extra domain (outside the domain/area).
1. Select the Main Menu > Port Configuration command.
The Port Configuration contextual area opens (see Fig.12).
2. Press Restart.
The message Are you sure to restart? is displayed.
3. Press Ok to execute the operation.
ROUTING TABLE
The Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address current-
ly used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
To verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway currently used by the selected equipment
(Running Routing Table and Default Gateway) (pag.44)
To add an element to the Routing Table (pag.45)
To remove one or more elements from the Routing Table (pag.45)
To set/modify the IP address used as Default Gateway (pag.46)
To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway (pag.46)
For more information about the Routing Table and the Default Gateway go to pag.46.
To verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway currently used by the
selected equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway)
1. Select the Main Menu > Routing Table command.
The Routing Table contextual area opens, where the setting of the static Routing Table and the address
of the Default Gateway currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default
Gateway) are displayed (see Fig.13).
Fig.13 Routing Table contextual area
Fig.13 notes
(1) Wording:
Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.
Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.
Reading/Writing
Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program
or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
Radio 1A. Communication port represented by the radio signal.
2Mb/s EOC. 2Mb EOC communication port.
<no wording>. Inner port (internal loopback).
The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI),
The current setting of the parameters relevant to each single port can be verified selecting the Main
Menu > Port Configuration (pag.38) command.
(2) Wording:
Local. The element has been automatically inserted by the controller. The element identifies
the network and/or the interface directly connected with the equipment.
NetMgmt. The element has been manually inserted by the user (static element).
Ospf. The element has been automatically inserted by the OSPF protocol (dynamic element).
Other. All the other situations that are not comprised into one of the previous cases (this
label generally does not shown; it has been anticipated for future uses).
To add an element to the Routing Table
The Routing Table contextual area opens (see Fig.13).
2. Select the Add tab.
The Add New Route Item tab opens.
3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the destination element (equipment, network, etc.).
For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between
0 and 255.
4. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the network address definition of the destination element
(equipment, network, etc.).
0 and 255.
5. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the next router equipment.
0 and 255.
6. Press Add and confirm.
The new element is inserted into the table. The system records the new element into the currently used
Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing
Table).
To remove one or more elements from the Routing Table
2. Select the element of the Routing Table.
Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
Items automatically inserted by the controller (items with Local protocol) cannot be deleted.
3. Select the Remove tab.
The Remove Item tab opens.
4. Press Remove Selected Item(s) and confirm.
The system deletes the element into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into
the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
To set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway
2. Select the Default Gateway tab.
The Default Gateway tab opens.
3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway.
0 and 255.
The Interface box automatically points out the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway
equipment corresponds to.
The system inserts the new Default Gateway IP address into the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
The insertion of a new IP address used as Default Gateway can fail if the new IP address does not belong
to an IP network directly connected to the equipment interface.
To delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway
3. Press Remove and confirm.
The system deletes the Default Gateway IP address into the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info)
When all the equipment belong to the same IP network, it is not necessary to define the Routing Table
and the address of the gateway equipment because the network is able to manage its own inner traffic.
The setting of these parameters is necessary when the equipment belong to different networks, then, the
traffic has to be routed again from a network to the other one.
Routing Table
The function of the Routing Table is the one to check the routing of the supervisory messages exchanged
among the elements (PCs, equipment, etc.), that use the TCP/IP protocol, from one network to the other
one.
Routing Table (Running)
Each equipment at its initialisation (start-up operation) automatically sets the elements of the Routing Ta-
ble that identify the supervisory ports of the equipment (communication ports provided with the equipment
for the input/output of the supervisory signal).
These elements are set according to the IP addresses assigned to each port.
If the user changes the IP address of a supervisory port, the system does not dynamically change it into
the equipment Routing Table. It is necessary to execute a reset of the equipment, because the elements
of the Routing Table are set at the equipment start-up.
If it is necessary, the WEB LCT user can add to these elements (automatically set) some other ones.
The system records each new element (manually set) into the currently used Routing Table (Running Rout-
ing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table); the system
does not record the elements (automatically set) into the backup memory of the controller because they
are newly set at every equipment start-up.
The Running Routing Table is a static one. The system updates such a table, through the elements present
into the Stored Routing Table, at every equipment start-up.
Stored Routing Table
The equipment does not currently use the Stored Routing Table. This table becomes operative on the
equipment restart. In fact, in this case, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into
the Routing Table used by the equipment (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid only for the el-
ements whose router equipment (Hop) is associated to an active interface.
The setting of the Stored Routing Table id necessary, for instance, when the user wants to change an ad-
dress of the equipment supervisory ports. In such a case, it is not possible to change the currently used
Routing Table (Running Routing Table). The changes have to be inserted into the Stored Routing Table. At
the next equipment start-up, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the Routing
Table used by the equipment.
Default Gateway
The system forwards to the equipment with the Default Gateway function the data that have a receiver
unreachable through the routes present into the Routing Table.
STORED ROUTING TABLE
The Stored Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address
stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
To verify the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address present into the backup
memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table and Default Gateway) (pag.48).
To add elements to the Stored Routing Table (pag.49).
To remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table (pag.50).
To set or to change the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table
(pag.50).
To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table (pag.50).
For more information about the Routing Table and the Default Gateway go to pag.46.
To verify the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address present
into the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table
and Stored Default Gateway)
1. Select the Main Menu > Stored Routing Table command.
The Stored Routing Table contextual area opens, where the setting of the static Routing Table and the
Default Gateway address present in the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing
Table and Stored Default Gateway) are displayed (see Fig.14).
Fig.14 Stored Routing Table contextual area
Curr. Profile System
Fig.14 notes
(1) Wording:
Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.
Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.
Lct. Port for the connection to the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or
the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
Radio 1A. Communication port represented by the radio signal.
2Mb/s EOC. 2Mb EOC communication port.
The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI),
The current setting of the parameters relevant to each single port can be verified selecting the Main
Menu > Port Configuration (pag.38) command.
(2) Push-button:
Retrieve. It reads again the data from the backup memory and loads them into the equip-
ment memory.
Save. It saves the elements of the table into the backup memory of the equipment.
Refresh. It reads again the data from the memory of the equipment after a Retrieve com-
mand.
For instance, if the user wants updating the stored Routing Table displaying the elements
manually added by the user into the running Routing Table, he has to press Retrieve and
later the Refresh one.
To add an element into the Stored Routing Table
The Stored Routing Table contextual area opens (see Fig.14).
The Add New Route Item tab opens.
3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the destination element (equipment, network, etc.).
0 and 255.
4. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the network address definition of the destination element
(equipment, network, etc.).
0 and 255.
5. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the next router equipment.
0 and 255.
6. Into the Interface box, set the supervisory port that corresponds to the IP address of the router equip-
ment.
Select the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the wished option from the list (see Fig.14).
Select the wording None selected, when the system has automatically to insert the parameter according
to the IP address of the router.
The system inserts the new element into the table.
8. Press Save and confirm.
The system saves the new element into the backup memory of the equipment.
The system records the new element ONLY into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Rout-
ing Table). At the next equipment start-up, the system will insert this new element also in the current
routing table (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid only for the elements whose router equip-
ment (Hop) is associated to an active interface.
To remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table
2. Select the element of the Stored Routing Table.
Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
Items automatically inserted by the controller (items with Local protocol) cannot be deleted.
The system removes the element from the backup memory of the equipment.
The system deletes the element ONLY from the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing
Table). At the next equipment start-up, the system will delete such an element also into the current
Routing Table (Running Routing Table).
To set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Rout-
ing Table
3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway.
0 and 255.
The Interface box automatically points out the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway
equipment corresponds to.
The system saves the new IP address of Default Gateway into the backup memory of the equipment.
The system records the IP address of Default Gateway ONLY into the backup memory of the equip-
ment (Stored Routing Table). The equipment will display such an IP address only at the next restart
procedure of the equipment itself and the system will insert it also into the current Routing Table (Run-
ning Routing Table).
To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing
Table
3. Press Remove and confirm.
The system removes the IP address of Default Gateway from the backup memory of the equipment.
REMOTE ELEMENT TABLE
The Remote Element Table command manages the remote equipment list.
To verify the remote equipment list (pag.51).
To add (pag.52), to rename (pag.52) and to remove (pag.53) a station.
To add (pag.53) and to remove (pag.54) an equipment inside the list.
To reset the remote equipment list (pag.54)
For more information about the remote equipment list (Remote Element Table) go to pag.54.
To verify the remote equipment list
1. Select the Main Menu > Remote Element Table command.
The Remote Element Manager contextual area opens, where the remote equipment list is displayed
(see Fig.15).
Fig.15 Remote Element Manager contextual area
Fig.15 notes
(1) For each station, the name of the station is displayed after the suffix Station:
The name of the station is assigned by the user during the creation of the station itself.
The stations are displayed in the same order as they are inserted in the remote equipment list.
An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, cannot be stored in the remote
equipment list.
To expand a station and see the list of the associated equipment, it is sufficient to select the record
of the station.
Reading/Writing
(2) The name of the equipment in the remote equipment list is automatically assigned by the applica-
tion during the creation of the equipment itself: Equipment <progressive number>.
Within the station, the equipment are listed in increasing order with respect to the IP address.
(3) Wording:
Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
Remote Link. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application that consti-
tutes the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local
equipment (equipment which the user is connected to by WEB LCT).
Elem. Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the
NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).
Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application. This op-
tion can be used to insert into the remote equipment list some information as for instance
the coupling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one of an equipment inserted into
an OSI network.
To add a station to the list
It is possible to insert a maximum of 30 stations into a list.
The Remote Element Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.15).
2. Press Add (Station Menu).
The Enter new station name window opens.
3. Type, into the text box, the name to be assigned to the station (alphanumeric string with minimum 1
and maximum 11 characters).
The program does nor create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, the use of
a number or of a space as first character is not allowed.
4. Press Ok.
The application displays the new station into the Remote Element Manager contextual area, at the end
of the list relevant to the already existing stations.
An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, is not saved in the list.
To rename a station of the list
2. Select the station to be renamed.
3. Press Rename (Station Menu).
The Rename Station window opens.
4. Type, into the text box, the new name (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 11 char-
acters).
The program does nor create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, the use of
a number or of a space as first character is not allowed.
5. Press Ok.
The application displays the new name of the station into the Remote Element Manager contextual area.
To remove a station of the list
The deleting of the station causes also the removal of all the equipment coupled with such a station.
2. Select the station to be removed.
3. Press Remove (Station Menu).
The application removes the station from the Remote Element Manager contextual area.
To add an equipment to the list
It is possible to add to the list a maximum of 100 equipment.
An equipment cannot be created if at least one station has not been created before.
2. Select the station to which the equipment has to be coupled.
If the user does not select any station, the application will automatically couple the equipment with the
last selected station.
3. Press Add (Equipment Menu).
The Add New Element window opens.
4. Into the text box, type the IP address of the equipment.
The program does not create two equipment with the same IP Address in the same list (even if in dif-
ferent stations).
5. Only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network, set the NSAP (Gosip) address executing the fol-
lowing procedure:
a. Into the Sys.ID field (Gosip Address area), type the wished value.
b. To check or to change the setting of the default part of the address, press Set.
The Gosip Address area is expanded.
c. To change the parameter:
AFI, choose the arrow and select the desired value from the list.
d. Press Set.
6. Select the option relevant to the element type to be inserted:
Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
Remote Link. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application that constitutes
the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equip-
ment (equipment which the user is connected to by WEB LCT).
Elem. Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the
NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).
Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application. This option
can be used to insert into the remote equipment list some information as for instance the cou-
pling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one of an equipment inserted into an OSI
network.
7. Press OK.
In the Remote Element Table contextual area, under the selected station, a record named Equipment
<progressive number> is displayed with the characteristics of the new equipment.
To remove an equipment from the list
2. Select the equipment to be removed.
3. Press Remove (Equipment Menu).
The application removes the station from the Remote Element Manager contextual area.
To reset the remote equipment list
2. Press Clear List.
The application clears all the records (stations and equipment) present into the Remote Element Man-
ager contextual area.
Remote equipment list (more info)
Each equipment has a remote equipment list stored in its own controller.
For a better vision of the equipment during the setting of the list, it is possible to subdivide the equipment
into stations, in such a way that, at the selection of a station, the application will display only the detail of
the equipment associated with such a specific station. The station does not have any particular meaning;
it has been simply introduced to help the user during the localization of the equipment.
Into each remote equipment list, it is possible to create a maximum of 100 equipment and 30 station.
The remote equipment list has a specific function according to the management program in use.
WEB LCT application
When the user requires the opening from browser of the WEB LCT application of an equipment (local equip-
ment), at the opening, besides the WEB LCT page of this equipment, the system automatically opens even
the WEB LCT page of the equipment, of Remote Link type, present in the remote equipment list of the local
equipment.
If the remote equipment does not answer to the connection request, the connection command will be sent
cyclically until when:
The WEB LCT page of the local equipment is closed.
The equipment is deleted from the remote equipment list of the local equipment.
For a correct display of the equipment in the WEB LCT page, it is NECESSARY to insert in the remote
equipment list of the local equipment:
The local equipment with type Managed by SCT.
The remote equipment with type Remote Link.
SCT/LMT program
When the user requests the connection to a generic equipment present into the network (local equipment),
at the connection of such an equipment, the SCT/LMT program reads its remote equipment list and auto-
matically forwards the connection command to all the equipment present into the list.
In such a way, the application displays, into the Station List area of the SCT/LMT graphical interface, all
the stations that group the equipment and, into the Equipment List area (selecting the relevant station),
it displays the functional status of the local equipment (that results in connected/login status) and the func-
tional status of all the remote equipment present into the list. The equipment that have answered to the
connection request of the application will result in connected/monitor status.
The application will cyclically forward the connection command, to the equipment that have not answered
to the connection request, until to:
It is deactivated the connection with the local equipment.
The user disables the equipment.
The equipment is deleted from the remote equipment list of the local equipment.
More detailed information concerning the SCT/LMT program are reported into the relevant manuals.
PERFORMANCE MONITORING
The Performance Monitoring command manages the Performance Monitoring measures.
To verify the status of the PM measures (pag.61).
To activate a PM measure (pag.62).
To activate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously (pag.62).
To deactivate a PM measure (pag.62).
To deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously (pag.63).
To display the results of a measure and the status of the threshold exceeding alarms (pag.63).
To reset the values of the control parameters,
to execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms,
to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms
for the measure:
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> (pag.64)
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> (pag.69)
G828 Radio <radio branch> (pag.74)
G828 E1 Line Side (pag.78)
G828 E1 Radio Side (pag.82)
G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> (pag.84)
ACM Radio A (pag.89)
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.95)
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.98)
For more information about the:
PM measures available for the ALCplus2 IDU equipment go to pag.57
Quality parameters description go to pag.58
PM measures in general go to pag.101
Reading/Writing
Measures available for the ALCplus2 IDU equipment
The measures available for the ALCplu2 IDU equipment are the following.
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM- 1 number> (pag.64). This measure checks the quality of the received
signal at line side (STM-1 stream).
The check consists of measuring, by means of the B1 byte, the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS, OOFS qual-
ity parameters.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec.
he SEP parameter is implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM- 1 number> (pag.69). This measure checks the quality of the re-
ceived signal at line side (STM-1 stream).
The check consists of measuring, by means of the B2 and M1 bytes, the following quality parame-
ters:
Byte B2 -> BBE, ES, SES, UAS, SEP.
Byte M1 -> BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, SEP FE.
Byte B2 e M1 -> UASBIDI.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI parameters are implemented
according to G.829 ITU-T Rec.
The SEP, SEP FE parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
G828 Radio <radio branch> (pag.74). This measure checks the quality of the received signal at
radio side.
The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters.
The parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
G828 E1 Line Side (pag.78). This measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of
the IDU board E1 tributary (A or B) at line side.
The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters. The BBE, ES, SES,
UAS parameters are implemented according to G.826 ITU-T Rec.
The SEP parameter is implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
G828 E1 Radio Side (pag.82). This measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of
the IDU board E1 tributary (A or B) at radio side.
The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters. The BBE, ES, SES,
UAS parameters are implemented according to G.826 ITU-T Rec.
The SEP parameter is implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
G828 STM-1 <STM- 1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3- TUG2- TUG12> (pag.84). This measure checks
the quality of the received VC12 into the STM-1 stream.
The check consists of measuring the ES, SES, UAS, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI, SEP, SEP FE,
BBE, BBE FE quality parameters.
ACM Radio A (pag.89). This measure traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
The trend is traced using one counter for each ACM profile and two further counters (UpShift and
DownShift).
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.95). This measure checks the power of the signal at recep-
tion.
The check consists of measuring the RLTS, RLTM quality parameters specified by the Standard EN
301 129 of the ETSI.
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.98). This measure checks the power of the signal at trans-
mission.
The check consists of measuring the TLTS, TLTM quality parameters, specified by the Standard EN
301 129 of the ETSI.
Quality parameters description (PM measures)
G829 RstB1 STM-1... measure
The quality parameters description of the G829 RstB1 STM-1... measure (pag.64) is the following:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one er-
rored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds.
The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends
at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted
into the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured.
OOFS (Out of Frame Seconds). The second that do not belong to UAS but with the Out OF Frame
Alarm activated.
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1... measure
The quality parameters description of the G829 MstB2M1 STM-1... measure (pag.69) is the following:
BBE FE (Background Block Error Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected
at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES.
ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote
blocks.
SES FE (Severely Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of
errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated
an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm).
SEP FE (Severely Errored Period Far End). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES
FE comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES FE.
UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds.
The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends
at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted
UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) una-
vailability seconds.
G828 Radio..., G828 E1 Line Side and G828 E1 Radio Side measures
The quality parameters description of the G828 Radio... (pag.74), G828 E1 Line Side (pag.78) and G828
E1 Radio Side (pag.82) measure is the following:
G828 STM-1... - Vc12... measure
The quality parameters description of the G828 STM-1... - Vc12... measure (pag.84) is the following:
BBE FE (Background Block Error Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected
at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES.
ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote
blocks.
SES FE (Severely Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of
errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated
an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm).
SEP FE (Severely Errored Period Far End). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES
FE comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES FE.
UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds.
The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends
at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted
UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) una-
vailability seconds.
ACM Radio A measure
The quality parameters description of the ACM Radio A measure (pag.89) is the following:
4QAM Str. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM Str. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode *.
4QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM. The rule used to increase the counter chang-
es according to the active increase mode *.
8PSK. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 8PSK. The rule used to increase the counter changes
according to the active increase mode *.
16QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 16QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
DownShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has
changed assuming an ACM profile lower than the previous one.
UpShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has changed
assuming an ACM profile higher than the previous one.
* The counters relevant to the ACM profiles can be increased according to the following modes:
Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is equal to
the one currently active.
Not Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is higher
than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modu-
lation).
Example. Suppose the ACM profile 128 QAM has been defined as Upper Modulation and the current
modulation is 16 QAM. If the active modality is:
Active Mod, each second only the counter 16QAM is increased.
Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM are increased.
The mode used to increase the counters of the ACM profiles is common to all the counters and must be
selected by the user.
RxPwr Radio... measure
The quality parameters description of the RxPwr Radio... measure (pag.95) is the following:
TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the ob-
servation period (15 min or 24 hours).
Average Level. Average level of the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15
min or 24 hours).
Rlts (Received Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at reception (RL - Received Level) is lower than the pre-defined threshold
level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 5 threshold levels.
TxPwr Radio... measure
The quality parameters description of the TxPwr Radio... measure (pag.98) is the following:
TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
Average Level. Average level of the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period
(15 min or 24 hours)
Tlts (Transmitted Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at transmission (TL - Transmitted Level) is higher than the pre-defined
threshold level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 threshold levels.
To verify the status of the PM measures
1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command.
The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens, where the status of the PM measures is displayed
(see Fig.16).
The ALCplus2 IDU equipment support the following measures:
Fig.16 Performance Monitoring contextual area
Fig.16 notes
(1) The measures are subdivided in groups.
Selecting a group, the list of the measures associated to the group can be expanded.
The measures of only one group at a time can be displayed.
The group and the relevant measures available for the ALCplus2 IDU equipment are the following:
G828 group, measure:
G828 Radio..., checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
G828 E1 Line Side, checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board
E1 tributary (A or B) at line side.
G828 E1 Radio Side, checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU
board E1 tributary (A or B) at radio side.
RxPwr group, measure:
RxPwr Radio..., checks the power of the signal at reception.
TxPwr group, measure:
TxPwr Radio..., checks the power of the signal at transmission.
ACM group, measure:
ACM Radio A, traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
G829 RstB1 group, measure:
G829 RstB1 STM-1..., checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1
stream).
G829 MstB2M1 group, measure:
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1..., checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-
1 stream).
G828 Vc12 group, measure:
G828 STM-1... - Vc12..., checks the quality of the received VC12 into the STM-1
stream.
(2) Wording:
Stopped. The measure is not on progress.
Running. The measure is on progress.
To activate a PM measure
The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16).
2. Select the group that contains the measure.
Press Start at the side of the measure in Stopped status to be activated and confirm.
The measure is started-up and its status switches from Stopped to Running.
Press Show at the side of the measure in Stopped status to be activated.
The Performance... window opens.
Press Start and confirm.
The measure is started-up.
To activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously
2. Select the group.
3. Press Start Current and confirm.
The not active measures are started and their status passes from Stopped to Running.
To deactivate a PM measure
Press Stop at the side of the measure in Running status to be deactivated and confirm.
The measure is stopped and its status switches from Running to Stopped.
Press Show at the side of the measure in Running status to be deactivated.
The Performances window opens.
Press Stop and confirm.
The measure is stopped.
To deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously
2. Select the group.
3. Press Stop Current and confirm.
The active measures are stopped and their status passes from Running to Stopped.
To display the results of a measure and the status of the threshold exceeding
alarms
3. Press Show at the side of the wished measure.
The Performance <measure name> window opens, where the results of the measures and the status
of the alarms relevant to the exceeding of the threshold limits are displayed.
The commands present into window allows executing the following operations:
To reset the values of the control parameters.
To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms.
To activate/deactivate the measure.
To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the
alarms.
The description of the Performance... window, of the control parameters and of the procedures to execute
the above mentioned operations are contained in the paragraph relevant to each specific measure. In
detail:
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM- 1 number> measure
Measure available and meaningful only when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.43).
The G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM- 1 number> measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side
(STM-1 stream).
The check consists of measuring, by means of the B1 byte, the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS, OOFS quality
parameters (see pag.58).
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
In the Performance Monitoring contextual area (see Fig.16) the selection of the Show push-button, at the
side of the measure, opens the Performance G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window (see Fig.17).
With the commands present into the window, it is possible:
To reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (pag.66).
To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms (pag.66).
To activate/deactivate the measure (pag.66).
To change the type of the displayed control parameters (pag.66).
To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms
(pag.67).
Fig.17 Performance G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window
Fig.17 notes
(1) Command:
Refresh. It updates the data.
Clear Counters. It resets the values contained into the records (daily or primary).
Clear Alarms. It executes the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding.
Stop/Start. The commands are displayed one in alternative to the other: the first stops the
measure, the second one reactivates it.
Chart View. Command not available for the current version of WEB LCT.
Commons. It sets the intervention thresholds of the alarms relevant to the parameters.
Label:
Seconds. Into the table there are the arameters that use the seconds as measuring unit.
Blocks. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the blocks as measuring unit.
(2) Each column represents a daily or primary record. In detail, the column:
Curr. Day. Current daily record (24 hours).
Last Day. Preceding daily record.
Curr. 15m. Current primary record (15 minutes).
15m... 4h. 16 preceding primary records (each record is of 15 minutes).
The Type column, points out the parameters corresponding to the values present into each column.
What just said is valid from the second row of the table on, because the first row points out the
status of the records - see note (4).
(3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS, OOFS (see pag.58).
Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such
results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks.
(4) Wording:
Meaningless. The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not affected by
errors.
Meaningful. The record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters
have not exceeded their threshold value.
Incomplete. The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding obser-
vation period.
The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also
when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status.
The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily
records are acquired at 23.59 of each day.
Lost. The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because
the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have for-
warded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles.
Restarted. The record has been lost after a reset of the NE.
When the NE has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a certain
measure point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this status.
---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under exam-
ination, the measure was not activated.
(5) Each box represents an alarm. Box:
15M <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into
one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.
24H <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into
one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.
UAS. Unavailability alarm.
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Ma-
jor, Minor, Warning severity.
Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.
Grey. Alarm deactivated.
To reset the values of the records (daily and primary)
The Performance <measure name> window opens.
4. Select the Clear Counters command and confirm.
The values displayed into table are reset.
To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms
The operation affects all the actually active alarms with the exception of the UAS.
4. Select the Clear Alarms command and confirm.
All the active alarm status boxes are deactivated, except for the unavailability alarms.
To activate a measure
4. Select the Start command and confirm.
The measure is started-up.
To deactivate a measure
4. Select the Stop command and confirm.
The measure is stopped.
To change the type of the displayed control parameters (G828..., G829...)
3. Press Show at the side of the wished G828... or G829... measure.
4. Into the commands bar, select the arrow present on the side of the box and select from the list:
Seconds, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the seconds: ES, etc.
Blocks, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the blocks: BBE.
(G829 RstB1 STM-1)
2. Select the G829 RstB1 group.
3. Press Show at the side of the G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure.
The Performance G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window opens.
4. Select the Commons command.
The Commons window opens, where a list of options is present on the left side. The selection of each
single option displays, in the right part of the window, the relevant parameters:
General. Threshold levels of the UAS and SES parameters:
N Ses Set UAS (P). Threshold - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds with
SES - over which starts the UAS unavailability period.
To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 10 sec (default 10).
N Ses Reset UAS (Q). Threshold - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds with-
out SES - over which ends the UAS unavailability period.
N BBE Set Ses. Threshold - expressed by the percentage of the errored blocks - over
which it is declared a SES.
To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 100% (default 30%).
15M Es. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es alarm:
Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
15M Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15
minutes, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value
0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.
24H Es. Severity and threshold of the 24H Es alarm:
24H Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours,
when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
15M Ses. Severity and threshold of the 15M Ses alarm:
15M Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15
minutes, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H Ses. Severity and threshold of the 24H Ses alarm:
24H Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24
hours, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M Sep. Severity and threshold of the 15M Sep alarm:
15M Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15
minutes, when SEP has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H Sep. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep alarm:
24H Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24
hours, when SEP has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
UAS. Severity of the UAS alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
Press Refresh to restore the values set at the opening of the window.
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM- 1 number> measure
The G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM- 1 number> measure checks the quality of the received signal at line
side (STM-1 stream). The check consists of measuring, by means of the B2 and M1 bytes, the following
quality parameters (for the description see pag.58):
Byte B2 -> BBE, ES, SES, UAS, SEP.
Byte M1 -> BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, SEP FE.
Byte B2 e M1 -> UASBIDI.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI parameters are implemented according
to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP, SEP FE parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
side of the measure, opens the Performance G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window (see Fig.18).
(pag.71).
Fig.18 Performance G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window
Fig.18 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
Seconds. Into the table there are the parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit.
(3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, SEP FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI (see pag.58).
(4) Wording:
errors.
vation period.
(G829 MstB2M1 STM-1)
2. Select the G829 MstB2M1 group.
3. Press Show at the side of the G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure.
The Performance G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window opens.
15M E. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es alarm:
15M Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es FE alarm:
15M Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15
minutes, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24
hours, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Es FE alarm:
24H Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24
hours, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Ses FE alarm:
15M Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
15 minutes, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Ses FE alarm:
24H Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
24 hours, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Sep FE alarm:
15M Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
15 minutes, when SEP FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep FE alarm:
24H Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
24 hours, when SEP FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
UAS FE. Severity of the UAS FE alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
UAS Bidi. Severity of the UAS BIDI alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default
Major).
G828 Radio <radio branch> measure
The G828 Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in protected radio configuration.
The G828 Radio <radio branch> measure checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters (see pag.58).
side of the measure, opens the Performance G828 Radio <radio branch> window (see Fig.19).
(pag.76).
Fig.19 Performance G828 Radio <radio branch> window
Fig.19 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
(3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS (see pag.58).
(4) Wording:
errors.
vation period.
(G828 Radio)
2. Select the G828 group.
3. Press Show at the side of the wished G828 Radio <radio branch> measure.
The Performance G828 Radio <radio branch> window opens.
G828 E1 Line Side measure
In order to execute this measure, it is necessary to use a tributary framed according the G.704 Rec.
The G828 E1 Line Side measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1
tributary (A or B) at line side.
side of the measure, opens the Performance G828 E1 Line Side window (see Fig.20).
(pag.80).
To set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure (pag.81).
Fig.20 Performance G828 E1 Line Side window
Fig.20 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
What just said is valid starting from the second row of the table on, because the first row points out
the status of the records - see note (4).
(3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS (see pag.58)
(4) Wording:
errors.
vation period.
(6) The No 2Mb Used, wording indicates that no tributary is set for the measure.
(G828 E1...)
3. Press Show at the side of the wished G828 E1... measure.
The Performance G828 E1... window opens.
To set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure
The operation is not available when the system uses as supervisory port (EOC) an equipment tributary
(refer to pag.41). In such a case, the system automatically uses for the PM measures, the same tributary
used for the supervisory operations.
The change of the tributary for the G828 E1 Line Side measure automatically changes the value of the
tributary for the G828 E1 Radio Side measure and vice versa.
3. Press Show at the side of the wished G828 E1... measure.
The Performance G828 E1... window opens.
The Commons window opens.
5. Select the 2Mb Selection option
The 2Mb Selector parameter opens, which points out the 2Mbit/s used for the calculation oft he meas-
ure control parameters. In detail, the selected value:
Trib A, the tributary A is used for the measure.
Trib B, the tributary B is used for the measure.
No 2Mb Used, no tributary is set for the measure.
To change the parameter, select the wished value from the list (Trib A or Trib B).
If a value is not available, this means that the relevant tributary is used as output of the T12 syn-
chronism (see Fig.51).
G828 E1 Radio Side measure
In order to execute this measure, it is necessary to use a tributary framed according the G.704 Rec.
The G828 E1 Radio Side measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1
tributary (A or B) at radio side.
side of the measure, opens the Performance G828 E1 Radio Side window (seen Fig.21).
(pag.80).
To set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure (pag.81).
Fig.21 Performance G828 E1 Radio Side window
Fig.20 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
What just said is valid starting from the second row of the table on, because the first row points out
the status of the records - see note (4).
(3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS (see pag.58)
(4) Wording:
errors.
vation period.
(6) The No 2Mb Used, wording indicates that no tributary is set for the measure.
G828 STM-1 <STM- 1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3- TUG2- TUG12> measure
The G828 STM-1 <STM- 1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3- TUG2- TUG12> measure checks the quality of the
received VC12 into the STM-1 stream.
The check consists of measuring the ES, SES, UAS, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI, SEP, SEP FE, BBE,
BBE FE quality parameters (see pag.58).
side of the measure, opens the Performance G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12>
window (see Fig.22).
(pag.86).
Fig.22 Performance G828 STM-1 <STM- 1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3- TUG2- TUG12> window
Fig.22 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
(3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, SEP FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI (see pag.58).
(4) Wording:
errors.
vation period.
(G828 STM-1... - Vc12...)
2. Select the G828 Vc12 group.
3. Press Show at the side of the G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> measure.
The G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window opens.
15M Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es FE alarm:
15M Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15
minutes, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Es FE alarm:
24H Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24
hours, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Ses FE alarm:
15M Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
15 minutes, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Ses FE alarm:
24H Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
24 hours, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Sep FE alarm:
15M Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
15 minutes, when SEP FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep FE alarm:
24H Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
24 hours, when SEP FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
UAS FE. Severity of the UAS FE alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
UAS Bidi. Severity of the UAS BIDI alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default
Major).
ACM Radio A measure
Measure meaningful only when the adaptive modulation is active.
The ACM Radio A measure traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
The trend is traced using one counter for each ACM profile and two further counters: UpShift and DownShift
(see pag.58).
side of the measure, opens the Performance ACM Radio A window (see Fig.23).
To change the type of the displayed counters (pag.66).
To set the thresholds of the alarms (pag.80).
To modify the modality used to increase the counters (pag.94).
Fig.23 Performance ACM Radio A window
Fig.23 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
Seconds. The counters relevant to the ACM profiles are present in the table.
UpDownShift. The counters DownShift and UpShift are present in the table.
The Type column, points out the counters corresponding to the values present into each column.
(3) Wording:
errors.
vation period.
(4) One counter is foreseen for every ACM profile: 4QAM Str, 4QAM, 8PSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM,
128QAM, 256QAM (see pag.58).
For every counter, the column of the specific observation period points out (expressed in seconds)
the number of times the counter is increased.
The rule used to increased a counter changes according to the currently active modality (see note
6).
Besides one counter per modulation, two further counters are foreseen:
DownShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period, has changed
assuming a profile lower than the previous one.
UpShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period, has changed as-
suming a profile higher than the previous one.
The table does not display all the counters at the same time (see note 1).
15M <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the primary
observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.
24H <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the daily ob-
servation periods (24 hours) present into the window.
(6) If the active modality is:
Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is equal
to the one currently active.
Not Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is
higher than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Up-
per Modulation).
Example. Suppose the ACM profile 128 QAM has been defined as Upper Modulation and the current
modulation is 16 QAM. If the active modality is:
Active Mod, each second only the counter 16QAM is increased.
Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM are increased.
To change the type of the displayed counters
2. Select the ACM group.
3. Press Show at the side of the ACM Radio A measure.
The Performance ACM Radio A window opens.
4. Into the commands bar, select the arrow present on the side of the box and select from the list:
Seconds, to display the results of the counters: 4QAM Str, 4QAM, 8PSK, etc.
UpDownShift to display the results of the counters: DownShift and UpShift.
To set the thresholds of the alarms (ACM Radio A)
single option displays, in the right part of the window, the relevant counters:
15M 4QAMS. Severity and threshold of the 15M 4QAM Strong alarm:
15M 4QAMS Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
15 minutes, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - over which it is activated the
alarm.
15M 4QAM. Severity and threshold of the 15M 4QAM alarm:
15M 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15
minutes, when the counter 4QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M 8PSK. Severity and threshold of the 15M 8PSK alarm:
15M 8PSK Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15
minutes, when the counter 8PSK has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M 16QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
15 minutes, when the counter 16QAM has increased - over which it is activated the
alarm.
alarm.
alarm.
alarm.
alarm.
24H 4QAMS. Severity and threshold of the 24H 4QAMS alarm:
24H 4QAMS Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
24 hours, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H 4QAM. Severity and threshold of the 24H 4QAM alarm:
24H 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24
hours, when the counter 4QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H 8PSK. Severity and threshold of the 24H 8PSK alarm:
24H 8PSK Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24
hours, when the counter 8PSK has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
24H 16QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
24 hours, when the counter 16QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
24 hours, when the counter 64QAM has increased- over which it is activated the alarm.
To modify the modality used to increase the counters
4. Press Change.
The Policy window opens.
5. Select the option:
Active Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is equal to the currently active
one, are increased.
Not Available Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is higher than the cur-
rent one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation), are
increased.
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure
The RxPwr Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in protected radio configuration.
The RxPwr Radio measure checks the power of the signal at reception.
The check consists of measuring the RLTS, RLTM quality parameters specified by the Standard EN 301 129
of the ETSI (see pag.58).
side of the measure, opens the Performance RxPwr Radio <radio branch> window shown (see Fig.24).
(pag.97).
Fig.24 Performance RxPwr Radio <radio branch> window
Fig.24 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
Rlts. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit.
TM. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the dBm as measuring unit.
What just said is valid starting from the second row of the table on, because the first row points
out the status of the records - see note (4).
(3) Parameter: TMMax, TMMin, Average Level, Rlts (see pag.58)
results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or dbm.
(4) Wording:
errors.
vation period.
(6) Each box points out the power threshold level actually set. This parameter can be configured by the
user.
To change the type of the displayed control parameters
2. Select the RxPwr group.
3. Press Show at the side of the RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure.
The Performance RxPwr Radio <radio branch> window opens.
4. Into the commands bar, select the arrow present on the side of the text box and select from the list:
Rlts, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the seconds: Rlts1, etc.
TM, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the dBm: TMMax, TMMin,
Average Level.
2. Select the RxPwr group.
3. Press Show at the side of the RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure.
The Performance RxPwr Radio <radio branch> window opens.
single option displays the relevant parameters in the right part of the window:
15M Rlts. Threshold and severity of the 15M Rlts... alarms:
Rlts 1, Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4, Rlts 5 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as
number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the received power is lower than
the RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels - over which the system activates the
relevant alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number comprised between 1 and 900
(default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of
the alarm.
Severity. Alarms severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
24H Rlts. Threshold and severity of the 24H Rlts... alarms:
Rlts 1, Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4, Rlts 5 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as
number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the received power is lower than
the RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels - over which the system activates the
relevant alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number comprised between 1 and
86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accord-
ingly of the alarm.
Rlt. Threshold levels of the received power:
Rlt 1 <current value> dBm, Rlt 2 <current value> dBm, Rlt 3 <current value> dBm, Rlt
4 <current value> dBm, Rlt 5 <current value> dBm. Respectively the first, the second,
the third, the fourth and the fifth threshold level of the received power.
To change a threshold, move the cursor over a value comprised between -100dBm and -
20dBm. Default: Rlt 1: -40dBm, Rlt 2: -50dBm, Rlt 3: -60dBm, Rlt 4: -70dBm, Rlt 5: -
55dBm.
To restore the default of a parameter press the relevant Default push-button and confirm.
In equipment in protected configuration the variations of the thresholds executed on a branch
are not automatically reported even on the other branches.
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure
The TxPwr Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in protected radio configuration.
The TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure checks the power of the signal at transmission.
The check consists of measuring the TLTS, TLTM quality parameters, specified by the Standard EN 301 129
of the ETSI (see pag.58).
side of the measure, opens the Performance TxPwr Radio <radio branch> window (see Fig.25).
(pag.100).
Fig.25 Performance TxPwr Radio <radio branch> window
Fig.25 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
Tlts. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit.
TM. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the dBm as measuring unit.
status of the record - see note (4).
(3) Parameter: TMMax, TMMin, Average Level, Tlts (see pag.58).
results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or dBm.
(4) Wording:
errors.
vation period.
(6) Each box points out the power threshold level actually set. This parameter can be configured by the user.
To change the type of the displayed control parameters
2. Select the TxPwr group.
3. Press Show at the side of the TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure.
The Performance TxPwr Radio <radio branch> window opens.
4. Into the commands bar, select the arrow present on the side of the text box and select from the list:
Tlts, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the seconds: Tlts1, etc.
TM, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the dBm: TMMax, TMMin.
2. Select the TxPwr group.
3. Press Show at the side of the TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure.
The Performance TxPwr Radio <radio branch> window opens.
single option displays the relevant parameters in the right part of the window:
15M Tlts. Threshold and severity of the 15M Tlts... alarms:
Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as number of
seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the transmitted power is higher than the
TLT1, TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant
alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number comprised between 1 and 900
(default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of
the alarm.
24H Tlts. Threshold and severity of the 24H Tlts... alarms:
Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as number of
seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1,
TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number comprised between 1 and
86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accord-
ingly of the alarm.
Tlt. Threshold levels of the transmitted power:
Tlt 1 <current value> dBm, Tlt 2 <current value> dBm, Tlt 3 <current value> dBm, Tlt
4 <current value> dBm. Respectively the first, the second, the third and the fourth
threshold level of the transmitted power.
To change a threshold move the cursor over a value comprised between -25dBm and
30dBm. Default: Tlt 1: 13dBm, Tlt 2: 15dBm, Tlt 3: 17dBm, Tlt 4: 19dBm.
To restore the default of a parameter press the relevant Default push-button and confirm.
In equipment in protected configuration the variations of the thresholds executed on a
branch are not automatically reported even on the other branches.
PM measures (more info)
A PM measure consists of recording, during a pre-defined time range (observation period), the values of
specific parameters.
Some threshold limits have been assigned to such control parameters (the setting of the thresholds can
be changed).
The exceeding of the threshold limit points out a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This con-
dition generates an alarm.
The alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding are treated by the equipment and by the application as
normal alarms. The only exception is that the alarm is not automatically reset at the return into the thresh-
old limit but the user has to execute the reset of this kind of alarms.
The control parameters under examination change according to the equipment type and to the measure
type supported by that type of equipment. Usually, all the executed measures refer to ITU-T Recommen-
dations (for instance G.828, G.826, etc.).
The activation (and the deactivation) of the PM measures can be executed only after a command forwarded
by the user.
When it has been activated a PM measure, the main controller of the equipment starts the storing of the
values relevant to the control parameters. The results of the measures are sub-divided into records. Each
record contains the values recorded into a specific time range (observation period).
If at the end of the observation period, the measure has not yet been deactivated the system starts another
observation period and so on until when the operator stops the measure.
The equipment group the results of the PM measures into observation period of 15 minutes (primary
records) and of 24 hours (daily records).
The observation periods can not be synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated but such
records refer, for the primary records, to the quarter of an hour (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the
daily records, to the time 00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated).
For instance, if a measure starts at 11.40, the first primary record will have as observation period the time
11.40...11.45 (corresponding to the time range 11.30...11.45), while the first daily record will have as ob-
servation period 11.40...00.00.
When the user requires the display of the results of the PM measures, the daily and primary records rele-
vant to the running PM measures are displayed in the WEB LCT page of the equipment.
For each type of measure, the equipment keeps stored the current records and also the last 16 primary
records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily one (corresponding to the preceding day).
The preceding records are overwritten.
When the operator stops a measure, the system stores the uncompleted current record.
If the operator activates and deactivates the measure more times during the same observation period, the
system will store the record that contains the results of the last executed measure.
For instance if the measure has been activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it has been newly
activated at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.00...9.15 will contain the results of the
measures relevant to the period 9.09...9.15, while the ones relevant to the period 9.02...9.07 will not be
stored.
If an equipment has some PM measures on progress and it is re-started up or turned off, when it will suc-
cessively restarted or turned on the measures activated before the turning off will be automatically re-
started.
The records (primary and daily), relevant to the period when measure has been stopped, will result empty
and when it has been reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily one, they will overwrite the pre-
ceding records.
REPORTS & LOGGERS MAINTENANCE
* The Read Only, Read and Write and Station Operator user CANNOT delete the signals and the list of op-
erations.
The Reports & Loggers Maintenance command saves to file the equipment configuration, the status/
alarm signals and the operations executed by the users.
To save the equipment configuration, the alarm/status signals and the operations executed by
the users to file (pag.102)
To delete the signals stored into the equipment controller (pag.105).
To delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller (pag.105).
To save the equipment configuration, the alarm/status signals and the op-
erations executed by the users to file
In order to execute this operation, the display of menu bar in the browser must be active.
1. Select the Main Menu > Reports & Loggers Maintenance command.
The Report Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.26).
2. Activate, in the Report Options area, the information you wish to save to file:
Inventory report. Whole equipment configuration: WEB LCT version, properties, list of units, sta-
tus/version of the firmware, addresses, routing table, default gateway, remote equipment list,
user inputs, user outputs, operating parameters, etc.
Fault report. List of status/alarm signals currently active on the equipment (current alarms) and
signals stored in the equipment controller (alarm history).
Command Log. List of the operations, executed by the WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX users,
stored in the equipment controller.
It is possible to select one or more options. Depending on the activated options, a file will be created
containing the relevant data.
3. Press Generate Report.
In sequence, are displayed:
The WEB Report page, where the information, which will be saved to file depending on the ac-
tivated options, are pointed out.
Fig.27 shows an example of content of the WEB page.
A window displaying the save mode of the file according to the browser currently in use.
4. Follow the instructions in the window to save the file.
The format, used to save the data to file, is the same displayed in the Report WEB page.
Reading/Writing
Monitor
Read Only*, Read and Write*, Station Operator*, System
Fig.26 Report Manager contextual area
Fig.26 notes
(1) The option:
Inventory report, allows saving the whole equipment configuration to file: WEB LCT version,
properties, list of units, status/version of the firmware, addresses, routing table, default
gateway, remote equipment list, user inputs, user outputs, operating parameters, etc.
Fault report, allows saving to file the list of status/alarm signals currently active on the
equipment (current alarms) and signals stored in the equipment controller (alarm history).
Command Log, allows saving to file the list of the operations, executed by the WEB LCT, SCT/
LMT or NMS5UX users, stored in the equipment controller.
One or more options can be selected. Depending on the activated options, a file containing the rel-
evant data will be saved.
Fig.27 Report (WEB page)
Fig.27 notes
(1) The whole equipment parameters are subdivided in groups. The format of the parameters present
in each group is self-explicative and changes according to the type of represented data.
(2) To each operation, it is devoted a record that points out the following information:
Date/Time. Date and time when it has been executed the operation.
Source address. IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which it has been exe-
cuted the operation.
User. Name of the user who has executed the operation.
Object. Object to which the operation refers.
Instance. Name of the equipment instance to which the operation refers.
Value Set. Set value.
The presence of the symbol "" points out that the information is not available because it is a not
significant one for the type of operation to which it refers.
(3) To each signal, it is devoted a record that points out the following information:
Severity. This field points out if the record refers to a status or alarm signal or if the signal
has been detected or it has been reset. If the situation concerns an alarm, it is pointed out
also its severity level.
Wording Description
Disable Alarm signal reset
Status Status signal
Warning Alarm detected with Warning severity
Date/Time. Detection or reset date and time of the signal.
Description. Alphanumeric string that specify the type of the signal. If:
The wording CLEARED is absent, the record refers to a detected alarm.
The wording CLEARED is present, the record refers to a cleared alarm.
To delete the signals stored into the equipment controller
2. Press Delete all alarm logger events and confirm.
A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.
To delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller
2. Press Delete all command logger items and confirm.
A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.
Minor Alarm detected with Minor severity
Major Alarm detected with Major severity
Critical Alarm detected with Critical severity
Wording Description
SNTP & WAKE UP CONFIGURATION
The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration command manages the automatic acquisition of the reference date/
time of the equipment from a network element (Server NTP functionality) and the Wake Up trap (Wake Up
functionality).
To verify the SNTP functionality status (pag.106)
To set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality (pag.107)
To disable the SNTP functionality (pag.107)
To verify the Wake Up functionality status (pag.108)
To set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality (pag.108)
To disable the Wake Up functionality (pag.109)
Server NTP functionality go to pag.109
Wake Up functionality go to pag.110
To verify the SNTP functionality
1. Select the Main Menu > SNTP & Wake Up Configuration command.
The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area opens with the SNTP tab active.
The tab displays the activation status of SNTP functionality and the current setting of the relevant ex-
ecution parameters (see Fig.28).
Fig.28 SNTP tab (SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area)
Fig.28 notes
(1) In detail, the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment is:
Active, when a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) is present in the Main Server IP Address
and/or Reverse Server IP Address box.
Reading/Writing
Inactive, when the value 0.0.0.0 (IP address reset) is present in the boxes Main Server IP
Address and Reverse Server IP Address.
(2) The activation of the NTP Server Lost Alarm points out that none of the set network elements is
reachable, as consequence the reference date/time of the equipment is not aligned.
The colour of the box points out the status of the alarm:
Green. The alarm is not active.
Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has, respectively, severity Critical,
Major, Minor or Warning.
To set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality
The execution parameters (Main Server IP Address, Reserve Server IP Address, etc.) can be modified
even when the SNTP functionality is already active.
The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area opens with the SNTP tab active (see Fig.28).
2. Set the IP address of the main element present in the network, from which the equipment automatically
gets the reference date/time, in the Main Server IP Address box.
It is possible type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised
between 0 and 255.
Typing a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) involves the activation of the automatic acquisition of the
reference date/time.
3. Set the IP address of the secondary element present in the network, from which the equipment auto-
matically gets the reference date/time, in the Reserve Server IP Address box.
between 0 and 255.
4. Set the time interval between a request of refresh of the reference date/time and the next one in the
Polling Interval box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 16777215 seconds.
5. Set the time interval (t) the equipment must wait for, before re-attempting the transmission of a re-
quest to the main or secondary element in the Polling Timeout box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 30 seconds.
6. Set the number of times that the equipment must re-attempt the transmission of a request to the main
or secondary element in the Polling Retries box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 10.
To disable the SNTP functionality
The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area opens with the SNTP tab active (see Fig.28).
2. Press Reset next to the Main Server IP Address box to reset the value (0.0.0.0).
3. Press Reset next to the Reverse Server IP Address box to reset the value (0.0.0.0).
To verify the Wake Up functionality status
The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area opens.
2. Select the Wake Up tab.
The tab displays the sending status of the Wake Up trap and the current setting of the relevant sending
parameters (see Fig.29).
Fig.29 Wake Up tab (SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area)
Fig.29 notes
(1) The sending of the Wake Up trap is:
Active, when the Enable option is selected and a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) is set
as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).
Inactive, when the Disable option is selected and the value 0.0.0.0 is set as IP address of
the server (option NMS IP Address).
(2) With server we mean the machine where the supervision system NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX or a differ-
ent management system, able to manage the reception of the Wake Up trap, is installed.
(3) The setting of the value 0 points out that the trap is sent until when the user manually disables it
or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
(4) The user can insert the physical location (for example the name of the site) of the equipment in this
field. This information is communicated to the remote manager together with the characteristics of
the equipment.
The supervision system NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX does not use this information.
To set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality
The execution parameters (NMS IP Address, Timeout, etc.) cannot be modified when the Wake Up func-
tionality is already active. To modify them, it is necessary to deactivate the Wake Up functionality (see
pag.109) and them modify them.
2. Select the Wake Up tab (see Fig.29).
3. Set the IP address of the server, which the Wake Up trap must be sent to, in the NMS IP Address box.
between 0 and 255.
4. Only if the equipment and the server are inserted into an OSI network, set the NSAP address (Gosip
Address area).
To change the parameter:
System ID, type the wished value in the relevant boxes.
AFI, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list.
5. Set the time interval, for which the Wake Up trap is sent at the end of which it is automatically disabled,
in the Timeout box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 0 and 1440 minutes.
The setting of the value 0 points out that the trap is sent until when the user manually disables it or
the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
6. Set the physical location (for example, the name of the site) of the equipment in the NE Location box.
The setting of the parameter is optional.
7. Select the Enable option.
To disable the Wake Up functionality
2. Select the Wake Up tab (see Fig.29).
3. Select the option Disable or press Reset to reset the NMS IP Address value (value 0.0.0.0).
Server NTP functionality (more info)
The ALCplus2 IDU equipment, via SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) protocol, can update its date/time
using an element within the network as reference (Server NTP functionality).
Via WEB LCT (or SCT/LMT) application, it is possible to define a maximum of two elements, one main (set
in the Main Server IP Address box - see Fig.28) and one secondary (set in the Reserve Server IP Address
box) from which the equipment automatically gets the reference date/time each n seconds (set in the Poll-
ing Interval box). Entering a valid value for the main and/or secondary element causes the activation of
the functionality.
If the main element does not answer to the request of updating of the equipment reference date/time, this
request is sent for n times (set in the Polling Retries box) each t seconds (set in the Polling Timeout box).
At the end of this requests, if the main element does not answer, the equipment requires the updating of
the date/time to the secondary element.
If the secondary element does not answer to the request of updating of the equipment reference date/
time, this request is sent for n times each t seconds. At the end of this request, if the secondary element
does not answer the equipment, the system activates the SNTP servers lost Alarm and requires the update
of the date/time of the main element and so on.
If no network element set can be reached, the reference date/time of the equipment is not updated. This
condition is signalled by the activation of NTP Server Lost Alarm (see Fig.28).
To deactivate the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time, it is necessary to reset the IP address
of the main and secondary elements.
Wake Up functionality (more info)
The Wake Up functionality allows the user enabling the spontaneous forward, from the equipment to a re-
mote server, of a SNMP trap for the notification of the equipment commissioning (Wake Up trap).
This functionality has been implemented as help to the Auto Discovery modality available in the supervision
systems NMS5UX-B and NMS5LX.
The Auto Discovery mode has the purpose to point out new equipment in the network, not managed by
the supervision system yet. More information about the Auto Discovery modality is reported in the relevant
documentation.
This chapter shows only the management of the Wake Up trap by the equipment. In detail, the implemen-
tation of the Wake Up functionality is the following.
Via WEB LCT (or SCT/LMT) application, it is possible:
To define the IP address and the NSAP address (meaningful only if equipment and server are
inserted within an OSI network) of the server where the supervision system, which the trap
must be sent to (option NMS IP Address - see Fig.29) is installed
To define the time interval for which the trap must be sent, after which the sending of the trap
is automatically disabled (option Timeout).
If the value 0 is set for the Timeout option, the Wake Up trap will be sent until when the user
manually disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
To activate and deactivate the sending of the trap.
To activate the Wake Up functionality, it is necessary to set a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0)
as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address) and select the option Enable.
To deactivate the functionality, it is necessary to select the option Disable or reset the option
NMS IP Address (value 0.0.0.0) pressing Reset (available even when the functionality is active).
When the Wake Up functionality is activated, the equipment starts sending the Wake Up trap every minute
for the time interval defined by the user (option Timeout). For example, if the value 60 has been set as
timeout, the trap is sent each 60 minutes. At the end of 60 minutes, the sending of the trap is automatically
disabled.
If, in the period when the sending of the trap is enabled, the supervision system intercepts the Wake Up
notification records the presence of the new equipment in its database and disables the sending of the
Wake Up trap by the equipment (trap switch-off).
SD MEMORY MANAGEMENT
The SD Memory Management command manages the SD memory card (Secure Digital Memory Card)
for the backup/restore of the equipment software and configuration.
To verify the status and the configuration of the SD memory (pag.111).
To execute the automatic equipment restart from SD memory in case of replacement of IDU unit
(pag.113).
To execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory (pag.114)
To execute the management and maintenance of the SD memory (pag.115)
For more information about the use of the SD memory card in the equipment, go to pag.117.
To verify the status and the configuration of the SD memory
1. Select the Main Menu > SD Memory Management command.
The contextual area SD Management is displayed, showing the status and the configuration of the SD
memory present in the equipment (see Fig.30).
Fig.30 SD Management contextual area
Reading/Writing
Fig.30 notes
(1) Option:
Status. SD memory status:
Type. Type of data present in SD memory:
Boot SD. The SD memory contains the equipment configuration parameters and the
equipment software.
Sw download SD. The SD memory contains only the equipment software.
Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present or memory data structure not
recognized/compatible with the equipment, etc.).
Automatic data restore from SD. Enabling of automatic update of the configuration data from
SD memory:
Enabled. The automatic update of the data from SD memory is enabled.
Disabled. The automatic update of the data from SD memory is not enabled.
Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present, etc.).
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Boot SD.
Automatic SW download from SD. Enabling of automatic update of the equipment software
from SD memory:
Enabled. The automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory is ena-
bled.
Disabled. The automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory is not
enabled.
Not running Sw delete. Enabling of the automatic deletion of the equipment software
present in the standby memory bench (status Loaded - see Fig.31) after an automatic sw
update from SD memory:
Enabled. The automatic deletion of the equipment software is enabled.
Disabled. The automatic deletion of the equipment software is not enabled.
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Sw Dwl SD.
EC serial number. Serial number of the controller which has generated the version of the
data and equipment software present in SD memory.
The empty field points out that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.).
EC system version. File name and version of the equipment software currently used by the
controller which has generated the version of Boot SD present in the SD memory.
SW system version. File name and version of the equipment sw present in the SD memory.
(2) Commands available to the user for the management of SD memory.
Tab.1 lists the commands.
For every command, the use, depending on the data present in the SD memory, and the mean times
for the execution of the operation are pointed out.
SD memory
status
Presence of SD
in the equipment
Compatibility (SD data
structure - equipment)
Compatibility
SD data - equipment type
Loaded Yes Yes Yes
Eq Type Mismatch Yes Yes No
Not formatted Yes No No
Not Present No - -
To execute the automatic equipment restart from SD memory in case of re-
placement of IDU unit
In case of replacement of the IDU unit of an equipment, it is possible to use the SD memory, where the
equipment configuration and software (Boot SD) have been previously saved, to restart the new controller
based on the data present in SD memory.
This operation is very important because it avoids the equipment re-configuration necessary after a change
of the IDU unit.
Here below the whole procedure is described, which must be applied so that the automatic equipment re-
start from SD memory is successful.
1. Save the equipment configuration and software to the SD memory:
a. Insert the SD memory in the equipment.
b. Open the WEB LCT page relevant to the equipment.
c. Select the Main Menu > SD Memory Management command.
The SD Management contextual area (see Fig.30).
d. Select the Create Boot SD command (Actions area).
e. Press Execute and confirm.
The operation takes several minutes during which, in the SD memory, the following operations
are executed in this order:
Deletion of all the files present in the SD memory
Creation of the file structure of type Boot SD
Copy of all the files relevant to the version of a running equipment sw (status Running).
Copy of the backup files (configuration parameters).
At the end, press Refresh.
If the operation has been successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Loaded, while the
parameter Type assumes the value Boot SD.
f. In the area Actions, select the command:
Enable automatic restore (all), to enable the automatic equipment restart from SD
memory: at the restart, both the configuration data and the equipment software will be
pasted from the SD memory to the new controller.
Enable automatic restore (Data only), to enable the automatic equipment restart
from SD memory: at the restart, only the configuration data will be pasted from the SD
memory to the new controller.
g. Press Execute and confirm.
If the operation has been successful and, in the previous step, the selected command was:
Enable automatic restore (all), the parameters Automatic data restore from SD and Au-
tomatic SW download from SD assume the value Enabled.
Enable automatic restore (Data only), the parameter Automatic data restore from SD as-
sumes the value Enabled.
At this point, if the SD memory is not removed from the equipment, the controller activates the auto-
matic synchronisation of the data: this means that every configuration change is automatically saved
even to the SD memory.
If the equipment software is updated, this is not automatically saved into the SD memory. Moreo-
ver, the procedure for the automatic restart is aborted (the parameters Enable automatic restore (all)
and/or Enable automatic restore (Data only) assume the value Disabled). In this case, it is suggested
to execute again this procedure in order to enable again the SD memory to the automatic restart.
2. When the equipment becomes faulted and a replacement of the IDU unit is necessary, remove the SD
memory from the faulted equipment and insert the new IDU unit.
3. Install and switch the new IDU unit on.
Before copying the equipment and sw configuration into the new controller, the following checks are
executed:
The status of the equipment controller must be Replaced Controller.
The data structure of the SD memory must be of type Boot SD.
The value of EC serial number (present in the descriptor file of the SD memory) must be equal
to that registered in the equipment backpanel.
In the descriptor file of the SD memory, the automatic restart from SD memory must be active
(parameter Automatic SW download from SD and/or Automatic data restore from SD - value
Enabled).
In case of automatic restart enabled only for the configuration data (selection of the Enable au-
tomatic restore (Data only) command - see step 1f), the configuration data stored in the SD
memory must be referred to a equipment sw version older than or equal to that currently active
in the controller.
If the above mentioned checks were successful:
a. The backup configuration files are copied from the SD memory to the controller.
b. The controller sw is updated overwriting the inactive memory bench (status Loaded). This op-
eration is executed only if:
The Enable automatic restore (all) command has been selected at step 1f
The running version of the equipment software (Running) is different from that present
in the SD memory.
c. The Serial Number of the controller present in the descriptor file of the SD memory is updated.
d. The Serial Number of the controller of the equipment backpanel is updated.
e. The controller with change of the memory bench in use (bench switch) is forced to restart if even
the sw update (selection of the Enable automatic restore (all) command - see step 1f) has been
required.
f. The controller restarts with the updated sw (if required) and applying the configuration data read
from the SD memory.
If at least one of the above mentioned checks was not successful, the automatic restart is not executed
and the controller stays in status Replaced Controller waiting for an intervention of the user.
To execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD mem-
ory
If the equipment software must be updated on different equipment, the SD memory can be used to
execute the operation automatically without the use of the management software (WEB LCT or SCT/LMT).
Here below the whole procedure, which must be applied in order that the automatic update of the equip-
ment sw from SD memory is successful, is described.
1. Save the equipment software master to the SD memory:
a. Insert the SD memory into the equipment where the new sw version is present.
b. Open the WEB LCT page relevant to the equipment
c. Select the Main Menu > SD Memory Management command.
The SD Management contextual area opens (see Fig.30).
d. Select the Create Sw DWL SD command (Actions area).
e. Press Execute and confirm.
The operation takes several minutes during which, in the SD memory, the following operations
are executed in this order:
Deletion of all the files present in the SD memory
Creation of the file structure of type Sw Dwl SD
Copy of all the files relevant to the version of a running equipment sw (status Running).
Once ended, press Refresh.
If the operation was successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Loaded, while the pa-
rameter Type assumes the value Sw download SD.
f. Select the Enable automatic restore (all) command (area Actions) in order to enable the au-
tomatic update of the equipment sw from SD memory on the equipment restart.
g. Press Execute and confirm.
If the operation was successful, the parameter Automatic SW download from SD assumes the
value Enabled.
h. Select the Enable Not running Sw delete command (area Actions) if you wish that, once
the update and the change of the memory bench of the controller are ended, the sw present in
the standby bench (bench where the old sw is present), is automatically deleted.
i. Press Execute and confirm.
If the operation was successful, the parameter Not running Sw delete assumes the value En-
abled.
2. Remove the SD card from the equipment and insert it into another equipment whose software you wish
to update.
3. Switch the IDU unit on.
Before copying the equipment sw into the new controller, the following checks are executed:
The data structure of the SD memory must be of type Sw Dwl SD.
The automatic update from SD memory must be active in the descriptor file of the SD memory
(parameter Enable automatic restore (all)).
The sw version stored in the SD memory must be different from both the versions present in
the memory benches of the controller.
If the above mentioned checks were successful:
a. The controller sw is updated overwriting the inactive memory bench (status Loaded)
b. The restart of the controller with change of the memory bench in use is forced (bench switch)
and, then, if set (see step 1h), the sw present in the standby bench is deleted.
c. The controller restarts with the updated software.
If at least one of the above mentioned checks was not successful, the operation is not executed.
To execute the management and maintenance of the SD memory
As help for the management of SD memory, by means of the SD Management window (see Fig.30), the
following can be executed.
To delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD memory (pag.115)
To disable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory (data + sw) (pag.116)
To disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench after an au-
tomatic sw update from SD memory (pag.116)
To force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD memory to
the controller (pag.116)
To copy the equipment sw from the SD memory to the controller (Sw Dwl SD) (pag.116)
To delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD memory
This operation deletes ALL the files of the structure Boot SD or Sw Dwl SD. The deletion of a single file
os not foreseen.
2. Select the Delete SD files command (Actions area).
3. Press Execute and confirm.
4. Once ended, press Refresh.
If the operation was successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Not formatted.
To disable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory
2. Select the Disable automatic restore command (Actions area).
Once ended, if the operation was successful, the parameters Automatic data restore from SD and Au-
tomatic SW download from SD assume the value Disabled.
To disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench
after an automatic sw update from SD memory
Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Sw Dwl SD are present.
2. Select the Disable Not running Sw delete command (Actions area).
Once ended, if the operation was successful, the parameter Not running Sw delete assumes the value
Disabled.
To force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD
memory to the controller
Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Boot SD are present.
2. Select the Force automatic restore command (Actions area).
To copy the equipment sw from the SD memory to the controller (Sw Dwl SD)
Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Sw Dwl SD are present.
The contextual area SD Management is displayed (see Fig.30).
2. Select the Copy Sw from SD command (area Actions).
SD memory card (more info)
ALCplus2 IDU equipment is provided with a SD memory card reader, which allows storing the equipment
data on SD (Secure Digital) memory cards.
Storing the equipment data into SD memory
The following equipment data can be saved and managed into SD memory:
Equipment configuration parameters and equipment software.
Saving these data generates a data structure named Boot SD into the SD memory.
Equipment software.
Saving these data generates a data structure named Sw Dwl SD into the SD memory.
Both the data structures cannot be saved at the same time in the same SD memory. The creation of
the structure Boot SD automatically deletes the data structure Sw Dwl SD and vice versa.
What just said is valid only for the information with data structure recognized by ALCplus2 equipment and
relevant management programs (WEB LCT or SCT/LMT). Any other type of data stored in SD memory (user
file) is not deleted or damaged by the commands described in this chapter.
When the user saves the configuration parameters and/or the equipment software on SD memory, the fol-
lowing file data structure is automatically created:
Root
Descriptor.txt.
Descriptor file of text type, where the characteristics of the data present in the SD memory
are present: type of equipment the data refer to, type of data in SD memory (Boot SD or Sw
Dwl SD), etc.
This information is used by the management software to execute the compatibility checks
between the data of the SD memory and the equipment where the SD memory is inserted.
Backup
Backup file of the equipment configuration parameters
Software
Files of equipment software (equipment Sw/Fw + WEB LCT)
If SD memory is of type Sw Dwl SD, the directory Backup will be empty.
Use of the SD memory for the equipment management
The SD memory can be used to make the following operations easy and fast.
Automatic equipment restart from SD memory in case of replacement of IDU unit
This operation allows saving the whole equipment configuration, sw/fw included, on the SD memory and
keeping it constantly updated.
In fact, after the creation of the data structure of type Boot SD in the SD memory, the controller, after any
configuration change, updates the data present in the in the SD memory, keeping them constantly updat-
ed.
When the equipment is faulted, it is sufficient to extract the SD card from the faulted IDU unit and insert
it into the new IDU unit.
When the IDU unit is switched on and if some compatibility checks are passed, the data and the sw present
in the SD memory are copied into the controller returning the equipment configuration to the condition
before the fault.
The complete procedure to execute this operation is described at pag.113.
Automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory
This operation allows saving, on the SD memory, the new equipment sw/fw which will result to be the mas-
ter sw to use for the updating of other equipment.
At this point, it is sufficient to extract the SD card from the IDU unit and to insert into a different IDU unit.
When the IDU unit is switched on and if some compatibility checks are passed, the sw present in the SD
memory is copied into the controller.
The complete procedure to execute this operation is described at pag.114.
Commands for the management/maintenance of SD memory
The commands available to the user for the management/maintenance of the SD memory are listed in
Tab.1.
The table points out, for every command, the use depending on the type of data structure present in the
SD memory and the mean execution times of the operations.
Tab.1 Commands for the management of SD memory
* Mean execution time of the operation.
Command SD memory
without data struc-
ture
SD memory with data structure
Boot SD
SD memory with data structure
Sw Dwl SD
Time*
Delete SD files It deletes all the files present in SD memory 1/2 min.
Create BOOT SD It creates the structure and copies the files of the equipment configuration parameters and equipment
sw (Boot SD) from the controller to the SD memory
5 min.
Create Sw DWL SD It creates the structure and copies the files of the equipment sw (Sw Dwl SD) from the controller to
the SD memory
5 min.
Enable automatic
restore (all)
- It enables the automatic equipment
restart from SD memory: when the
equipment restarts, both the configu-
ration data and the equipment sw will
be copied from the SD memory.
It enables the automatic equipment
equipment restarts, the equipment sw
will be copied from the SD memory to
the controller.
1/2 sec.
Enable automatic
restore (Data only)
- It enables the automatic equipment
equipment restarts, only the configu-
ration data will be copied from the SD
memory to the new controller
- 1/2 sec.
Disable automatic
restore
- It disables the automatic restart of the
equipment from SD memory
It disables the automatic update of
the equipment sw from SD memory
1/2 sec.
Enable
Not running
Sw delete
- - It enables the automatic deletion of
the equipment sw present in the
standby memory bench (status Load-
ed - see Fig.31) after an automatic
update of the sw from SD memory
1/2 sec.
Disable
Not running
Sw delete
- - It disables the automatic deletion of
the equipment sw present in the
standby memory bench after an auto-
matic update of the sw from SD mem-
ory
1/2 sec.
Force automatic
restore
- It forces the restore, from SD memory
to controller, of the configuration data
and of the equipment sw
- 5 min.
Copy Sw from SD - - It copies the equipment sw from the
SD memory to the controller
5 min.
SOFTWARE INFO & MAINTENANCE
* The IP/OSI stack switch card is NOT available to the user Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write and Station
Operation.
The Software info & Maintenance command manages the equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software
present in the equipment and the communication stack used by the equipment.
To verify the firmware version of the equipment (pag.119).
To update the firmware of the equipment (pag.120).
To switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the main controller (pag.121).
To verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment (pag.121).
To update the WEB LCT application (pag.122).
To verify the communication stack in use (pag.122)
To modify the communication stack in use (pag.123)
To execute the equipment software reset (pag.123)
For more information about the firmware updating go to pag.124.
To verify the firmware version of the equipment
1. Select the Main Menu > Software info & Maintenance command.
The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens with the Equip. Firmware tab active.
The tab displays the version of the equipment firmware (see Fig.31).
Fig.31 Equip. Firmware tab (Software info & Maintenance contextual area)
Reading/Writing
Monitor*, Read Only*, Read and Write*
Station Operator*, System
Fig.31 notes
(1) Wording:
Running. It is on progress the firmware relevant to the subject memory bench.
Loaded. The firmware is present into the bench but actually it is not on progress (standby).
Not Loaded. The firmware is not present into the memory bench.
Downloading. It is on progress the updating of the firmware relevant to the memory bench.
Interrupted/Aborting. The update of the firmware has been interrupted.
Aborting. The update operation has been interrupted.
(2) Column:
Unit. Name of the tab or of the equipment part where there is the controller (code) or the
programmable device (FPGA file).
Software. Firmware name. Usually the name points out the component type. Wording:
FW_boot. Boot code. This part of code can not be updated in fact it is not provided
with a version of the memory benches.
FW_appl, Application code.
Conf_... or Fpga... Configuration file of the programmable devices.
Actual Rel. Version of the code or of the FPGA file present into the controller.
For the codes (FW), the system points out the version and also the relevant identification
code composed by the letter E or N followed by a number (each number identifies a different
code type).
Rel Bench 1/Rel Bench 2. Firmware version present into the memory bench 1 and 2 of the
main controller.
To update the firmware of the equipment
The application automatically updates the firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not present
(wording Loaded or Not Loaded - see Fig.31).
It is not possible to execute such an operation when the updating of the firmware is already on progress
(wording Downloading).
Then, it is necessary to point out that the firmware update procedure could change the equipment func-
tions.
1. If not already active, run the WEB LCT Console program or the SCT/LMT program, necessary to manage
the operation of FTP for the file transfer.
The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens with the Equip. Firmware tab active (see
Fig.31).
3. Select the Download SW Setup tab.
The Sw Download tab opens.
4. Set the path where there is the file into the Download file path box.
It is possible to type the path and the filename or to select the Browse local system (the window of the
O.S. opens for the selection of the file) and select the file.
The file you wish to use for the operation must be on the local PC (PC where the browser used for
the display of WEB LCT is running).
5. Set the download type to be executed. Select the option:
Forced, if the refresh procedure of the firmware relevant to the main controller of the equipment
is on progress.
Only different or not present/peripheral, if the refresh procedure of the firmware relevant to pe-
ripheral units (FPGA file and/or application code) is on progress.
6. Activate the Bench switch? box, if at the end of the download, the system has automatically to execute
a switching of the memory bench in such a way to use the bench with the firmware that has been up-
dated.
7. Press Start and confirm.
Before executing the updating, the system executes a compatibility check between the file to be for-
warded to the equipment and the one present on the terminal.
The check consists of comparing the technology type of the equipment.
If the parameters are incompatible, the application does not executes the firmware update: the wording
Interrupted is displayed in the Bench Status box of the branch whose firmware you are updating.
If the parameters are compatible, the operation is started and the Bench Status box of the branch
whose firmware you are updating dynamically updates the progress of the operation, which requires
some minutes:
Starting. The operation has been started.
Downloading. The operation is running.
The Abort push-button, present in the Bench Status box during the firmware update, can be
used to stop the operation. Its selection requires the confirmation.
During the updating, the system deletes the firmware present into the bench memory and it
updates the firmware of the equipment one component at a time.
If the operation is stopped, into the memory bench there will be only the already updated com-
ponents. In this case, the new version can result unusable because it is not an integral one (the
bench will be in Not Loaded status).
In this case, the main controller keeps the minimum functions necessary to allow a new updating
of the firmware.
Completed (refresh in 20 sec). The update operation is ended and the window will automatically
refresh in 20 seconds.
The refresh of the window can be forced, before the expiry of 20 seconds, pressing Refresh.
After the update, the Software Version box (see Fig.31) points out the new firmware version.
To switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the main con-
troller
It is not possible to switch the memory bench when the updating of the firmware is on progress (word-
ing Downloading - see Fig.31) and when the firmware of the equipment is not present into a bench (word-
ing Not Loaded).
The switching between the memory benches DOES NOT stop the traffic.
The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens with the Equip. Firmware tab active (see
Fig.31).
2. Select the Bench Switch tab.
The Bench Switch tab opens.
3. Press Bench switch and confirm.
The equipment is restarted; on the reconnection, the bench in Running status is forced to Loaded status
and vice versa.
To verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment
The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens.
2. Bring at front the Web LCT tab.
The tab displays the version of the WEB LCT application present in the equipment (see Fig.32).
Fig.32 Web LCT tab (Software info & Maintenance contextual area)
Fig.32 notes
(1) The wording Web LCT ALC Plus 2 points out the WEB LCT application for the control and the man-
agement of ALCplus2 IDU equipment.
To update the WEB LCT application
2. Bring at front the Web LCT tab (see Fig.32).
3. Press Browse.
The window of the O.S. for the selection of the file opens.
4. Select the file (with .tar extension) you wish to use for the update.
The Status box points out the version of WEB LCT present in the file.
5. Press Upload and the confirm.
Before starting the update, the compatibility between the WEB LCT which must be sent to the equip-
ment and the one present in the terminal is checked.
The check consists in comparing the type of equipment.
If the parameters are not compatible, the application does not execute the update of WEB LCT (the
Status box displays the message Error: Probable cause wrong...).
If the parameters are compatible, the operation is started and the Status, Total Bytes and Bytes Loaded
boxes dynamically point out the progress of the operation which requires some minutes.
At the end of the operation, a message informs about the result of the operation.
6. Close and re-open the WEB LCT page relevant to the equipment, which the update has been executed
for, to avoid misalignment between the displayed data and the new WEB LCT.
To verify the communication stack in use
2. Bring at front the IP/OSI stack switch tab.
The tab displays the communication stack in use (see Fig.33).
Fig.33 IP/OSI stack switch tab (Software info & Maintenance contextual area)
Fig.33 notes
(1) Wording:
IP. Communication stack Full IP
OSI. Communication stack IP Over OSI
To modify the communication stack in use
2. Bring at front the IP/OSI stack switch tab (see Fig.33).
3. Into the SYSTEM password required box, type the access code of System user.
4. Select the option relevant to the new communication stack: IP or OSI.
At the end of the operation, the message Operation Done is displayed.
2. Bring at front the IP/OSI stack switch tab (see Fig.33).
Update of the equipment firmware (more info)
The firmware of the equipment is the assembly of all the firmware necessary for the management of the
entire equipment (firmware of the main controller firmware of the peripheral units).
The firmware of the equipment is present into the main controller that is provided with two memory bench-
es (bench) the first one on service and the other one in waiting status.
Each bench can contain one firmware version (also different from the other one) of the equipment.
It is possible to update the sw/fw of the equipment, relevant to a memory bench, at a time. The WEB LCT
automatically updates the firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not present (wording Loaded
or Not Loaded - see Fig.31).
BACKUP/RESTORE CONFIGURATION
The Backup/Restore Configuration command manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equip-
ment configuration.
To save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup) (pag.125).
To transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration restore) (pag.125).
To retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last op-
eration of configuration restore (configuration revert) (pag.126).
For more information about the backup/restore of the equipment configuration, go to pag.126.
To save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup)
1. If not already active, start the WEB LCT Console program or the SCT/LMT program, necessary to man-
age the operation of FTP for the file transfer.
2. Select the Main Menu > Backup/Restore Configuration command.
The Configuration Backup/Restore contextual area opens (see Fig.34).
3. Type, in the Backup file name box, the name of the file and the path where you wish to save the file.
It is possible to set a name already existing for the file in the chosen path. In this case, the data
present in the file will be overwritten.
4. Press Backup.
The Operation status box displays the progress of the operation as messages.
During the operation, the Abort push-button is available. Pressing it and confirming, the operation is
interrupted.
The display of the message Completed in the Operation status box points out that the operation has
been executed with success.
To transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration re-
store)
3. Set, in the Restore file name box, the name of the file you wish to use to restore the configuration.
It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or select the Browse local system option (the
O.S. window for the selection of the file opens) and select the file.
4. Press Restore and confirm.
interrupted.
Reading/Writing
To retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program
before the last operation of configuration restore (configuration revert)
3. Press Revert and confirm.
interrupted.
Fig.34 Configuration Backup/Restore contextual area
Fig.34 notes
(1) Format of date, time: month/day/year, hour:minutes:seconds.
The wording Unavailable points out that the file is not available.
Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (more info)
The WEB LCT program allows save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup - pag.125).
The saved file is in binary format and can be saved on PC or external support according to the user needs.
Then, in any moment, the user can restore the equipment configuration saved to file transferring the data
of the file to the same equipment (configuration restore - pag.125).
Before restoring the configuration, the equipment saves its own current configuration and keeps it available
until the successive restore operation.
In any moment, the user can retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program
before the last operation of configuration restore (configuration revert - pag.126).
In this way, two backup versions will be always available for an equipment: one executed by the user and
the other automatically executed by the program before the last restore operation.
UNIT LIST
The Unit List command displays the characteristics of the equipment units (real configuration).
To verify the characteristics of the equipment units (real configuration)
1. Select the Main Menu > Unit List command.
The Unit Table contextual area opens, where the characteristics of the equipment units are displayed
(see Fig.35).
Fig.35 Unit Table contextual area
Fig.35 notes
(1) Parameter:
Real Type. Unit type really present into the equipment.
The wording Unequipped points out that the unit is not physically present into the equip-
ment.
Expected Type. Foreseen unit type.
The wording Unequipped points out that the unit is not foreseen.
HW Version. Unit version.
Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
Par Part Num. Part Number of the group that contains the unit.
Usually the group represents the equipment part that can be replaced.
Not all the unit are into a group. In this case the field will result empty and the part that can
be replaced will correspond to the unit itself.
Serial Number. Series Number of the group that contains the unit.
If the unit is not contained into a group (Par Part Num field empty), the Series Number refers
to the unit.
Reading/Writing
(2) Each box identifies an alarm. In detail:
Fail. The units is affected by a serious malfunctioning.
Mis. The unit is not present into the equipment (Unequipped wording - Real Type parameter)
also if it is foreseen (unit name - Expected Type parameter).
Not Resp. The unit does not answer to the WEB LCT interrogations.
HW Mism. The real unit (Real Type parameter) is different from the foreseen one (Expected
Type parameter).
SW Mism. The firmware version present into the controller of the peripheral unit (Actual Rel.
column) is different from the one of the memory bench in Running status (Rel Bench 1 or
Rel Bench 2 column) (see Fig.31).
The colour of the boxes represents the status of the alarm and the severity coupled with the alarm
itself:
Green. Alarm deactivated.
Red. Alarm activated coupled with the Critical severity level.
Orange. Alarm activated coupled with the Major severity level.
Yellow. Alarm activated coupled with the Minor severity level.
Light blue. Alarm activated coupled with the Warning severity level.
(3) For each alarm inside the box, the total number of active alarms of the specific type in the equip-
ment units is pointed out.
ACTIVE MANUAL OPERATION
The Active Manual Operation command manages the manual operations.
To verify active the manual operations (pag.129).
To verify/modify the manual operation timeout (pag.130).
To verify the active manual operations
1. Select the Main Menu > Active Manual Operation command.
The Active Manual Operation contextual area opens, where the manual operations actually activated
into the equipment are displayed (see Fig.36).
Fig.36 Active Manual Operations contextual area
Fig.36 notes
(1) The information present into the contextual area are not dynamically updated. Press Refresh to
update the information.
(2) The value 0 points out that the timeout has not been activated, this means that the activation of a
manual operation remains active until when the user deactivates it.
The activation of a manual forcing (for instance a loop) affects the traffic.
Reading/Writing
To verify/modify the manual operation timeout
The timeout setting is common for all the manual forcing operations of the equipment.
1. Select the Main Menu > Active Manual Operation command.
The Active Manual Operation contextual area opens (see Fig.36).
2. Use the scrolling arrows to set a timeout comprised between 1 and 172800 seconds (48 hours).
The setting of the value 0 corresponds to the disabling of the timeout (it means that the activation
operations of the manual forcing will not be automatically disabled but the user will have to execute
such operations).
ALARM SEVERITY CONFIGURATION
The Alarm Severity Configuration command manages the alarm transmission and their severity level.
To verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms (pag.131).
To enable/disable an alarm (pag.132).
To enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm (pag.132).
To change the severity level of an alarm (pag.133).
For more information about the enabling/forwarding/severity of an alarm go to pag.133.
To verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms
1. Select the Main Menu > Alarm Severity Configuration command.
The Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area opens, where the severity level, the alarm enabling
status, the alarm forwarding status and a possible management system external to the equipment (for
example, SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX) are displayed (see Fig.37).
Fig.37 Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area
Reading/Writing
Fig.37 notes
(1) To display the alarm list select the symbol. To hide the alarm list select the symbol.
The number of alarms present in the group is displayed next to the name of the group (between
brackets). The groups and the alarms change according to the equipment configuration.
(2) Wording:
Trap Enable. The forwarding of the trap is enabled.
Trap Disable. The forwarding of the trap is not enabled.
(3) In detail:
X Disabled. Memorization of the alarm disabled.
<Coloured box> Critical, Major, etc. Memorization of the alarm enabled. The severity level
is pointed out by the colour of the box and by the name of the level.
The wording Unavailable in this SW ver. points out that the involved alarm is not supported by
the current firmware version present into the equipment controller.
To enable/disable an alarm
The Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area opens (see Fig.37).
2. Select the alarm.
3. Select the relevant Edit wording.
The Configuration window opens.
4. Into the Severity area, select the following option:
Disable, to disable the alarm.
Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical to enable the alarm. Select the option relevant to the
severity level to be assigned to the alarm
5. Press Ok.
The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area.
To enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm
It is possible to change the forwarding status of the trap only if it has been enabled the alarm (pag.132).
4. Into the Trap area, select the following option:
Disable, to disable the forwarding of the alarm trap to a possible management system external
to the equipment (for example SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).
Enable, to enable the forwarding of the alarm trap to the management system.
5. Press Ok.
To change the severity level of an alarm
4. In the Severity area, select the option relevant to the severity you wish to associate to the alarm: Sta-
tus, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical.
If the alarm was disabled (Disable option selected), the selection of a different option, besides mod-
ifying the alarm severity level, automatically enables it.
5. Press Ok.
Enabling/forwarding/severity of an alarm (more info)
The enabling/disabling of the alarm and of the forwarding of the trap is independent for each alarm and
local to the equipment which the operation is executed for. This means that the setting must be executed
for each single alarm of each single equipment.
Enabling/disabling the alarms
The term alarm means the fault signal generated by an error or by a wrong operation of the equipment or
of any element that compose it.
The equipment alarms can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according to the needs.
Disabling an alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm itself, this is not registered in the equipment
controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the alarm
had never occurred.
On the contrary, enabling an alarm (default condition) means that, on the detection of the alarm itself, this
is registered in the equipment controller and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is enabled (see next
item), it is communicated to the management system, which displays it in the current alarms and the his-
tory alarms.
Enabling/disabling the forwarding of the alarm traps
The trap is a message (in this case of detection or clearing of an alarm) spontaneously sent by the equip-
ment to a possible external management system, for example SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/
NMS5LX.
The forwarding of the trap of each alarm can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according to his own
needs.
Disabling a trap means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not registered in the equipment controller
and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program.
On the contrary, enabling a trap (default condition) means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is reg-
istered in the equipment controller and communicated to the management system, which displays it in the
current alarms and the history alarms.
Alarm severity
Each alarm acknowledged and managed by the management program has an associated severity level
which determinates the importance of the alarm.
This severity is not fixed, but can be changed by the user as he likes.
VIEW LOGGED USER
The View Logged User command manages the users connected to the equipment.
To verify the users connected to the equipment (pag.134).
To force the logout of a user (pag.135).
To verify the users connected to the equipment
1. Select the Main Menu > View Logged User command.
The View Logged User contextual area opens, where the list of the users connected to the equipment
when the command is selected is displayed (see Fig.38).
Fig.38 View Logged User contextual area
Fig.38 notes
(1) The wording NMS5UX points out the user of the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system
or a remote user (different from WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be
connected to the equipment (Permanent Login).
The other ones identify the WEB LCT or SCT/LMT users.
(2) With the wording machine, it is intended the PC (for the WEB LCT and SCT/LMT users) or the server,
the workstation (for the NMS5UX users and remote users) on which the application used by the user
is actually running.
Reading/Writing
Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write, Station Operator
System
To force the logout of a user
Logging out oneself is not possible.
If the logout of a NMS5UX user is forced, the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system automati-
cally executes the restore of the user login.
1. Select the Main Menu > View Logged User command.
The View Logged User contextual area opens (see Fig.38).
2. Select the wished user.
3. Press Force Logout and confirm.
Into the View Logged User contextual area, the system removes the line relevant to the selected user.
If the Force Logout push-button is not available, this means that the record relevant to ones user
has been selected.
USER MANAGER
The User Manager command manages the list of the equipment users.
To verify the user list (pag.136).
To add a user to the list (pag.137).
To change a user into the list (pag.137).
To delete a user from the list (pag.138).
To change the password and timeout of the System user (System Password) (pag.138)
To change the network password and network timeout (Network Password) (pag.138)
To change the password and timeout of the NMS5UX user (CEM Password) (pag.139)
To verify/modify the IP address of remote machines that contain a remote user (different from
WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment
(pag.139).
For more information about the user list go to pag.140.
To verify the user list
1. Select the Main Menu > User Manager command.
The User Manager contextual area opens, where the user list currently stored in the equipment is dis-
played (see Fig.39).
Fig.39 User Manager contextual area
Fig.39 notes
(1) The user with:
Read Only profile, can check the parameters (reading operation) but it can not forward com-
mands or execute changing (writing operation) to the equipment configuration.
Curr. Profile System
Read and Write profile, can check the parameters (reading operation) and execute only
maintenance operations (MAN OP).
Station Operator, can as check the parameters (reading operation) as send commands or
execute changes (writing operation *) to the equipment configuration.
* Except for the following operations: modifying the Remote Element Table, the user list,
aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the login and the logout of an user and all
those operations available only to the System user (or NMS5UX).
The System and NMS5UX users are not pointed out into the User Manager contextual area.
(2) Wording:
No Timeout. The option is disabled, this means that the user is not automatically disconnect-
ed after a defined time range.
<number> Sec. The option is enabled, this means that the user (if no operation is executed
in the WEB LCT page) will be disconnected after the specified time range.
To add a user to the list
Into each list, it is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 users for each profile (up to a maximum of
12 users).
The User Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.39).
2. Select the Add command.
The Add User window opens.
3. Into the User box, type the user name (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to
8).
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present into the same list. Then, when
the user name has been assigned, it can not be changed later.
4. Into the Password box, type the access code of the (alphanumeric string with a number of characters
from 1 up to 8).
5. Into the Confirm Password box, type newly the access code of the user.
6. Into the Timeout box, set the option:
No timeout, if the user has not to be automatically disconnected after a defined time range.
Timeout, if the user (if no operation is executed in the WEB LCT page) must be disconnected
after the specified time range set into the Sec box.
To modify the timeout, use the scrolling arrows of the Sec. box to set a value between 1 and
43200 sec. (12h).
7. Into the Profile box, set the profile to be assigned to the user: Read only, Read and write or Station
operator.
It is not possible to create a user with System profile.
8. Press OK.
The new user is inserted into the User Manager contextual area.
To modify a user into the list
2. Select the record relevant to the user.
3. Select the Modify command.
The Modify User window opens.
4. Execute the changing.
The setting modes of the parameters are the same ones above pointed out into the par. To add a user
to the list (pag.137).
It is necessary to set again all the user parameters (password, timeout, profile) with the exception
of the user name that can not be changed.
5. Press OK.
To delete a user from the list
2. Select the record relevant to the user.
3. Select the Remove command.
To change the password and the timeout of the System user (System Pass-
word)
2. Select the System command.
The Change System Password window opens.
3. Into the Enter new password box, type the new access code of System user (alphanumeric string with
a number of characters from 1 up to 8).
4. Into the Confirm new password box, type newly the access code.
5. Into the Timeout box, select the option:
No timeout, if the System user has not to be automatically disconnected after a defined time
range.
Timeout, if the System user (if no operation is executed in the WEB LCT page), has to be dis-
connected after the time range set into the Sec box.
43200 sec. (12h).
To change the network password and timeout (Network Password)
If you wish to modify only the timeout, it is necessary to input the current network password in the
Enter new password and Confirm new password fields.
2. Select the Network command.
The Change Network Password window opens.
3. Into the Enter new password box, type the new network password (alphanumeric string with a number
of characters from 1 up to 8).
4. Into the Confirm new password box, type newly the new network password.
No timeout, if the remote equipment (if it is in Monitor status) has not to be automatically dis-
connected after a defined time range.
Timeout, if you wish that the remote equipment, if in Monitor status, if no operation is executed,
is disconnected after the period set in the Sec. box
43200 sec. (12h).
To change the password and timeout of the NMS5UX user (CEM password)
The changing of the CEM password has to be executed only if it is changed the default password used
by the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system.
If you wish to modify only the timeout, it is necessary to type the current CEM password into the Enter
new password and Confirm new password fields.
2. Select the CEM command.
The Change CEM Password window opens.
3. Into the Enter new password box, type the new CEM password (alphanumeric string with a number of
characters from 1 up to 8)
4. Into the Confirm new password box, type newly the CEM password.
No timeout, if the NMS5UX user has not to be automatically disconnected after a defined time
range.
Timeout, if the NMS5UX user, (if the application does not execute any operation), has to be dis-
connected after the time range set into the Sec box.
43200 sec. (12h).
To verify/modify the IP address of remote machines that contain a remote
user (different from WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the pos-
sibility to be connected to the equipment of remote users
The remote user has the same characteristics of the NMS5UX user with the only exception that he does
not need for a login password.
It is possible to set a maximum of 2 remote users.
2. Select the PermaLogin command.
The Permanent Login window opens.
3. Into the Manager IP Address 1 box, set the IP address of the machine relevant the first remote user.
between 0 and 255.
4. Into the Manager IP Address 2 box, set the IP address of the machine relevant the second remote user.
between 0 and 255.
5. Pressing the Reset push-button next to the relevant Manager IP Address box, the value is set to zero
(0.0.0.0).
6. Activate the option Trap Version 2, under the relevant Manager IP Address box, to set the trap man-
agement of version 2 (SNMP).
If the option is not activated, the version 1 (SNMP) of the traps is used.
User list (more info)
The users list is a list of users that can be connected and ask for the login to the equipment.
If a user is not present into the users list memorized into the controller on an equipment, such an user will
not be able to connect and/or to execute the login of that equipment.
With the exception of the System and NMS5UX users, all the other users of the users list relevant to an
equipment have to be set by the WEB LCT application (see pag.137), the SCT/LMT program or NMS5UX/
NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system.
Each equipment, that can be managed by the WEB LCT application or by the SCT/LMT program, is equipped
with two pre-defined users:
SYSTEM. User of the WEB LCT application or SCT/LMT program with the following features:
The System user is single one for every equipment and he can not be deleted.
Only this user has the possibility to create, modify and delete users in the user list.
The user with System profile can as to check the parameters (reading operation) as to forward
commands or to execute changing (writing operation) to the equipment configuration.
NMS5UX. User of the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system, with the following features:
The NMS5UX user can not be deleted.
This user has the possibility to create, modify and delete users in the user list of the equipment
by means of the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX graphic interface. More information about the
NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system is reported in the relevant documentation.
The user with System profile can as to check the parameters (reading operation) as to forward
commands or to execute changing (writing operation) to the equipment configuration.
User name System (unchangeable parameter).
Timeout No Timeout (changeable parameter).
Profile System (unchangeable parameter)
Password Siaemicr (default) (changeable parameter - see pag.138)
User name NMS5UX (unchangeable parameter).
Timeout No Timeout (changeable parameter).
Profile System (unchangeable parameter)
Password Pre-define (changeable parameter - see pag.139)
FEATURES MANAGEMENT
The Features Management command manages the functionalities (modulation, synchronisation, OSPF
protocol, etc.) enabled for the equipment.
To verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment (pag.141).
To enable the new functionalities (pag.142).
To verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment
1. Select the Main Menu > Features Management command.
The Equipment Feature Management contextual area opens, where the functionalities enabled on de-
mand is displayed (seeFig.40).
Fig.40 Equipment Feature Management contextual area
Fig.40 notes
(1) Functionalities:
Maximum equipment modulation:
Upgrade up to 8PSK
Upgrade up to 16QAM
Upgrade up to 32QAM
Upgrade up to 64QAM
Upgrade up to 128QAM
Upgrade up to 256QAM
Channel spacing:
Upgrade up to 14M
Reading/Writing
Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write, Station Operator
System
Upgrade up to 28M
Upgrade up to 56M
Adaptive modulation: ACM functionality
Synchronisation: Sync eth support (ALCplus2 only)
OSPF protocol: OSPF functionality
Fade Margin (calculation of the link margin): Built-in Fade Margin Facility
(2) Wording:
Enabled. The functionality is enabled.
Disabled. The functionality is not enabled.
To enable the new functionalities
In order to enable one or more functionalities, IT IS NECESSARY to require the enabling certificate,
represented by a file (with .sfc extension), to the company that provides the equipment.
For each equipment you wish to enable one or more functionalities, a specific enabling certificate is re-
quired, because there is an univocal link between each single certificate and each specific equipment.
1. Select the Main Menu > Features Management command.
The Equipment Feature Management contextual area opens (see Fig.40).
2. Press Browse.
The window of the O.S. for the selection of the file opens.
3. Select the enabling certificate (file with .sfc extension).
4. Press Open.
The selected file is indicated in the Status - Ready to send:... box.
5. Press Send Certificate File.
A message indicates the end and the result of the operation:
Operation Done. The operation has been executed with success.
Invalid operation for this equipment. The selected certificate and equipment are not compati-
ble (wrong serial number or wrong MIB version, etc.).
RMON
The RMON command manages the statistic counters of the Ethernet ports of the equipment. The managed
counters are described in RFC 2819 History Control Group.
To display the enabling/disabling status of the collection of the statistic counters of the equip-
ment Ethernet ports (pag.143)
To activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port (pag.144)
To deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port (pag.144)
To display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port (pag.144)
For more information about the implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by
WEB LCT go to pag.146.
To display the enabling/disabling status of the collection of the statistic
counters of the equipment Ethernet ports
1. Select the Main Menu > RMON command.
The RMON area is displayed showing the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the count of the
statistics (see Fig.41).
Fig.41 Remote Monitoring contextual area
Fig.41 notes
(1) Wording:
Stopped. The count is not on progress.
Running. The count is on progress.
Curr. Profile Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System
To activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port
The RMON contextual area opens (see Fig.41).
2. Press Open at the side of the port in Stopped status to be activated.
The Remote Monitoring <Ethernet port> window opens (see Fig.42).
3. Press Start and confirm.
The count is started-up.
To deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port
The deactivation of the count involves the loss of the collected data.
2. Press Open at the side of the port in Running status to be deactivated.
The Remote Monitoring <Ethernet port> window opens (see Fig.42).
3. Press Stop and confirm.
The count is stopped.
To display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port (RMON)
Operation meaningful only for Ethernet ports for which the count of the RMON statistics is active. To
active the count see pag.144.
2. Press Open at the side of the wished port in Running status.
The Remote Monitoring <Ethernet port> window is displayed, showing the evolution in time (history)
of the statistic counters from the start of the count (see Fig.42).
Fig.42 Remote Monitoring <Ethernet port> window
Fig.42 notes
(1) Command:
count, the second one reactivates it.
Freeze/Unfreeze. The commands are displayed one as an alternative to the other: the first
one interrupts the dynamic display of the values in the window (freezes the window), the
second one reactivates it.
When the window is opened, the dynamic display of the values is active by default.
Counter View. It manages the display of the counters in the window.
When the command is selected, the Select Counters window is opened where every counter
has a box on its side. If the box is:
Active ( ). The counter is present in the Remote Monitoring... window
Inactive ( ). The counter is not present in the Remote Monitoring... window
To activate (or deactivate) the display of a counter, activate (or deactivate) the relevant box
and press Ok.
(2) For the description of the counter go to pag.147.
For the Octets counter between brackets, the number of bytes within a second (KB/s) is pointed out.
(3) This parameter points out the seconds missing to the end of the current sampling interval, at the
end of which the new row is displayed.
(4) The statistic counters of the considered Ethernet port are freezed by the equipment each minute.
For each port, the equipment can store a maximum of 120 samples (corresponding to 2 hours).
When the maximum value is reached, the new data will overwrite the oldest ones.
(5) At the end of a sampling interval, for each counter, the pointed out value corresponds to the value
registered during the measuring interval.
Implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by WEB
LCT
RMON Standard
RMON (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count,
monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.
These services are defined in terms of MIB (Management Information Base) group described in the docu-
ment RFC2819 - Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base, which must be read for any
further detail.
Outline on the operation of RMON standard
The RMON standard is based on two components: an agent (RMON probe) and a client (remote manage-
ment station).
The agent saves the data within its own RMON tables present on the network devices (equipment, routers,
etc.). The RMON probes can see only the traffic flowing through themselves and therefore are located on
each (internal/external) port of the Ethernet switch of the device to monitor.
The remote management station communicates with the RMON agent to obtain and correlate the RMON
data. Generally, the station is equipped with an interface (graphic or textual) which allows the display and
the analysis of the collected RMON data.
Implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by WEB LCT
With reference to what depicted in the previous paragraph, the RMON functionality acts as client which,
through the commands present in the WEB LCT page, allows the analysis of the data collected by the
probes present on each (internal/external) port of the Ethernet switch of the equipment in compliance with
the RMON standard (currently, the ALCplus2 IDU equipment by the WEB LCT implement the RMON MIB
group: History).
The probes collect the statistic data, which are stored in the RMON table of the equipment.
The history of the statistics of every equipment stores, each 60 seconds (sampling range), the value of the
counters of each active Ethernet port. The equipment stores these data into a rotation buffer where, when
full, the new information overwrites the old ones (value set to 120 samples which allow storing 2 hours in
the equipment).
In order to store in the equipment and display the statistics history of a port, it is necessary to activate the
port (see pag.144). This port will remain active until when an user (WEB LCT or SCT/LMT) does not deac-
tivate it (see pag.144).
At the activation of the port, the equipment starts storing the data relevant to the statistics and makes
them available to the user, in form of table, subdivided by single Ethernet port (see pag.144).
During the count, the display of the data in the WEB LCT window can be interrupted. This operation does
not interrupt the count, but freezes only the data present in the window. In fact, when the data update is
re-activated, the window displays the values of all the sampling ranges (up to a maximum of 120), even
those stored in the equipment while the window was freezed.
Ethernet counters (RMON)
The description of the counters is the same reported for the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output
from an Ethernet port (LAN Statistics - see pag.274).
The only difference is the name of the counter which, in some cases, change from the RMON counters with
respect to the LAN Statistics counters.
Tab.2 reports the correspondence of the names for the Ethernet RMON counters.
The counter Utilization is meaningful only as RMON counter and has the following description: the best
estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval, in
hundredths of a percent.
Tab.2 Ethernet counters denomination (RMON)
Ethernet counters denomination
RMON - History
Ethernet counters denomination
LAN Statistics
Drop Events Dropped Frames
Octects Total Bytes Received
Pkts Total Frames Received
Broadcasts Pkts Broadcast Frames Received
Multicasts Pkts Multicast Frames Received
CRC Align Errors CRC Align Errors
Undersize Pkts Undersize Frames
Oversize Pkts Oversize Frames
Fragments Fragments
Jabbers Jabbers
Collisions Collisions
Utilization -
EQUIPMENT MENU
In the Equipment Menu of the WEB LCT page, the following commands are present:
Main Menu (pag.149). It displays the Main Menu commands into the contextual area of the
WEB LCT page.
Equipment (pag.150). It manages the equipment configuration.
Synchronisation (pag.167). It manages the synchronism sources.
Base Band (pag.182). It manages the base band parameters.
Radio (pag.265). It manages the radio parameters.
Maintenance (pag.273). It manages the loops, PRBS, switching modality, Fade Margin, etc.
Switch (pag.291). It manages the switch of the protected STM-1 stream.
User Input (pag.299). It manages the local and remote user input.
User Output (pag.305). It manages the user output.
For equipment in protected configuration the commands relevant to the management of the redundant
parts of the modem and of the radio section are subdivided according to the branches managed by the
equipment.
For example, in case of equipment in protected configuration, two commands will be available for the radio
parameters: Radio Branch 1A and Radio Branch 2A. The first one refers to branch 1, the second one to
branch 2.
For each command, in the relative description, it is pointed out the user profile necessary to be able to use
it. In detail, the wording:
Monitor. Equipment in connected/monitor status.
Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator or System. Equipment in connected/login status
and that the user, who has requested the login, has respectively profile Read only, Read and
write, Station operator or System.
Moreover, if the commands allows executing some settings or changes, for each user profile the type of
operation that can be executed is pointed out. The option Reading points out that it is possible to check
the parameters, the option Writing that it is possible to set or to change them.
MAIN MENU
The Main Menu command displays the commands of the Main Menu (pag.35) into the contextual area of
the WEB LCT page.
EQUIPMENT
At the choice of Equipment option, the program displays the following commands:
Configurator (pag.151). It manages the equipment configuration.
Mod. Cap/Link ID (pag.156). It manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity,
adaptive modulation and link identification number.
General Preset (pag.164). It manages the modem ad radio parameters.
Configurator
The Configurator command manages the equipment configuration.
In detail, it is possible to verify/modify:
The radio configuration (Radio A) (pag.151)
The management of STM-1 stream (STM-1 MST Mode) (pag.153)
The management of synchronisation (Sync Enable) (pag.153)
The management of nodal configuration (Nodal Configuration) (pag.153)
The equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (AlcPlus2...) (Node Id) (pag.154)
The number of equipment of the nodal configuration (AlcPlus2...) (Number of Nodes) (pag.154)
The equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (ALplus) (Nodal ID) (pag.154)
The number of equipment of the nodal configuration (ALplus) (Nodal Type) (pag.154)
The protection of the nodal configuration (ALplus) (Nodal Protection) (pag.155)
To verify/modify the radio configuration
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Configurator command.
The Configurator contextual area opens.
The Radio A parameter points out the equipment radio configuration (see Fig.43).
2. To change the parameter select the option:
1+0. Unprotected configuration.
1+1 Hot Standby. Protected configuration of isofrequency type.
1+1 Freq. Div. Protected configuration of heterofrequency type.
Fig.43 Configurator contextual area
Reading/Writing
Fig.43 notes
(1) This area displays a schematic representation of the units equipped in the equipment. This repre-
sentation dynamically changes depending on the user settings.
(2) Option:
Radio A. Radio configuration:
1+0. Unprotected configuration.
1+1 Hot Standby. Protected configuration of isofrequential type.
1+1 Freq. Div. Protected configuration of hetero-frequential type.
STM-1 MST Mode. Management of the STM-1 stream:
None. The management of STM-1 stream is not active.
1+0. The management of the STM-1 stream in MST mode is active.
1+1 MSP. The management of the STM-1 stream in MST mode is active and the pro-
tection of STM-1 stream (MSP mode) is active.
1+1 MSP No ALS. The management of the STM-1 stream in MST mode is active and
the protection of STM-1 stream (MSP mode) is active. For the STM-1 streams with
optical interface, the Automatic Shutdown function is permanently disabled.
The option is available and meaningful only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment provided with
expansion IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1.
Sync Enable. Management of synchronisation:
Disable. Synchronisation disable.
Enable. Synchronisation enable.
Nodal Configuration. Management of nodal configuration:
No Nodal. The equipment does not belong to any nodal configuration.
AlcPlus2 (not protected). The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration. The nodal
bus is not protected.
AlcPlus2 (protected). The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration. The nodal bus
is not protected.
AlPlus. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration composed by equipment of
series ALS with AL IDU plus.
The option is available and meaningful only for ALCplus 2 equipment provided with ex-
pansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1.
Only if, for the Nodal Configuration option, the value:
AlcPlus2 (not protected) or AlcPlus2 (Protected) is set, the following options are available:
Number of Nodes. Number of equipment present in the nodal configuration
(ALCplus2).
Node Id. Number identifying the equipment in the nodal configuration (ALCplus2).
AlPlus is set, the following options are available:
Nodal ID. Name identifying the equipment in the nodal configuration (ALplus):
Node A. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration as node A.
Node B. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration as node B.
Node C. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration as node C.
Nodal Type. Number of equipment present in the nodal configuration (ALplus):
2 Element. Nodal configuration with two equipment.
3 Element. Nodal configuration with three equipment.
Nodal Protection. Management of nodal protection (ALplus):
No Protected. The nodal bus are in unprotected configuration.
Protected. The nodal bus are in protected configuration.
To verify/modify the management of STM-1 stream
Operation available only for equipment provided with expansion IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or Idu-
Board Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1.
The STM-1 MST Mode parameter points out the management of the STM-1 stream (see Fig.43).
2. To change the parameter, select the option:
None. The management of STM-1 stream is not active.
1+0. The management of STM-1 stream is active in MST mode.
1+1 MSP. The management of STM-1 stream is active and the protection of STM-1 stream (MSP
mode) is active.
1+1 MSP No ALS. The management of STM-1 stream is active and the protection of STM-1
stream (MSP mode) is active. For STM-1 streams with optical interface, the Automatic Shutdown
function is permanently disabled.
To verify/modify the management of synchronisation
The Sync Enable parameter points out the management of synchronisation (see Fig.43).
Disable. Synchronisation disable.
Enable. Synchronisation enable.
To verify/modify the management of nodal configuration
Operation available only for equipment provided with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1.
The Nodal Configuration parameter points out the management of nodal configuration (see Fig.43).
No Nodal. The equipment does not belong to any nodal configuration.
AlcPlus2 (not protected). The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration. The nodal bus is not
protected.
AlcPlus2 (protected). The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration. The nodal bus is protected.
AlPlus. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration composed by equipment of series ALS
with AL IDU plus.
To verify/modify the equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (AlcPlus2...)
Operation available and meaningful only if, for the Nodal Configuration option, the value AlcPlus2 (not
protected) or AlcPlus2 (protected) is set.
The Node Id parameter points out the number identifying the equipment in the nodal configuration (see
Fig.43).
2. To change the parameter set in the box a number comprised between 1 and 8.
To verify/modify the number of equipment of the nodal configuration (AlcPlus2...)
Operation available and meaningful only if, for the Nodal Configuration option, the value AlcPlus2 (not
protected) or AlcPlus2 (protected) is set.
The Number of Nodes parameter points out the number of equipment of the nodal configuration (see
Fig.43).
2. To change the parameter set in the box a number comprised between 1 and 8.
To verify/modify the equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (ALplus)
Operation available and meaningful only if, for the Nodal Configuration option, the value AlPlus is set.
The Nodal ID parameter points out the name identifying the equipment in the nodal configuration (see
Fig.43).
Node A. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration as node A.
Node B. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration as node B.
Node C. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration as node C.
To verify/modify the number of equipment of the nodal configuration (ALplus)
The Nodal Type parameter points out the number of equipment of the nodal configuration (see Fig.43).
2 Element. Nodal configuration with two equipment.
3 Element. Nodal configuration with three equipment.
To verify/modify the protection of the nodal configuration (ALplus)
The Nodal Protection parameter points out the protection of the nodal configuration (see Fig.43).
No Protected. The nodal parts are in unprotected configuration.
Protected. The nodal parts are in protected configuration.
Mod. Cap/Link ID
The Mod. Cap/Link ID command manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive
modulation and link identification number
To verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters
of the adaptive modulation (pag.156).
To display the table summarizing the radio transport (pag.158).
To modify the reference band/modulation (Bandwidth & Modulation) (pag.159).
To modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation (ACM Engine) (pag.159).
To modify the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation.
These parameters change depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation itself.
In detail, if the adaptive modulation is:
Active, it is possible:
To modify the power profile of RF transmitter (Tx Power Constant Peak Mode)
(pag.159).
To modify the lower and upper thresholds of the modulation (Upper Modulation/Lower
Modulation) (pag.160).
To modify the number of E1 streams permanently allocated (high priority streams)
(Permanent TDM Traffic) (pag.160).
To modify the number of E1 streams assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams)
(Extra TDM Cap.) (pag.160).
Inactive, it is possible:
(Permanent TDM Traffic) (pag.160).
To modify the number of E1 streams assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams)
(Extra TDM Cap.) (pag.160).
To verify/modify the link identification number (pag.160)
To verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.) (pag.161)
The operation:
To verify/modify the number of E1 streams permanently allocated (high priority streams) (Per-
manent TDM Traffic) is NOT available for the ALCplus2 IDU equipment of IduBoard or IduBoard
Exp. 16E1 type.
To verify/modify the priority of the E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.) is NOT available for the ALCplus2
IDU equipment of IduBoard type.
For more information about the adaptive modulation go to pag.162.
To verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration
parameters of the adaptive modulation
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Mod.Cap/Link ID command.
The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens with the Modulation & Capacity tab active.
The tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters
of the adaptive modulation (see Fig.44).
When the window is opened, the values present in the tab refer to the currently selected reference
band/modulation.
If the currently selected reference band/modulation is modified, some parameters are disabled.
In order to display the parameters relevant to the new selected band, it is necessary to confirm (push-
button Apply) the new reference band/modulation.
Reading/Writing
Fig.44 Modulation & Capacity tab (Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area)
Fig.44 notes
(1) ACM Engine. Operating status of the adaptive modulation. Option:
Enable. The adaptive modulation is enabled.
Disable. The adaptive modulation is disabled.
(2) Tx Power Constant Peak Mode. Power profile of the RF transmitter. Option:
Enable. Power increasing when the modulation decreases.
Disable. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.
This parameter is available and meaningful only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
The profile is used only if a modulation corresponding to the minimum modulation has been selected
as reference.
(3) Bandwidth & Modulation. Channelling - Modulation.
For each one of the radio channelling, the modulation and the consequent capacity can be config-
ured.
(4) Tx Power Mode. Current status of the power profile of the RF transmitter. Value:
Average. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.
Peak. Power increasing when the modulation changes
(5) Upper Modulation, Lower Modulation. Respectively upper and lower thresholds of the Tx modula-
tion.
This parameter is available and meaningful only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
(6) Permanent TDM Traffic. Number of E1 streams assigned permanently (high priority streams). These
streams cannot be never discarded by the adaptive modulation.
The maximum number of E1 streams which can be assigned permanently is pointed out next to the
box.
This parameter is available and meaningful only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp.
2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion.
(7) ACM Table. This table shows, for each ACM level, the number of E1 streams which can be used.
Depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation, one or more profile will be available.
In detail, if the adaptive modulation is:
Disabled. The table contains only the ACM profile relevant to the reference modulation
(Bandwidth & Modulation).
Enabled. The table contains all the ACM profiles. Among these, the profile included between
the minimum and the maximum modulation are available.
(8) Use the scrolling bar to display the detail of all the ACM profiles.
Selecting the arrow , it is possible to expand the list in such a way to display all the ACM profiles
at the same time. To return to the standard display, select the arrow .
(9) ACM profile. 8 profiles ACM are available from 4AQM to 256QAM. An additional profile on 4QAM with
low rate FEC (4QAM Strong) is present too.
(10) Max TDM Cap. Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 streams which can be assigned to
the TDM traffic for every ACM profile.
(11) Extra TDM Cap. Number of (low priority) E1 streams assigned to each ACM profile. These streams
will be discarded by adaptive modulation according to the order configured by the user (see Fig.47).
(12) Pressing this push-button displays the table summarizing the radio transport and its subdivision be-
tween Ethernet and E1, in relation to the current band/modulation (see Fig.45).
To display the table summarizing the radio transport
2. Press View Current Config.
The table summarizing the radio transport and its subdivision between Ethernet and E1, in relation to
the current reference band/modulation is displayed (see Fig.45).
Fig.45 Table summarizing the radio transport
Fig.45 notes
(1) Equipment identifier.
The field is not present if no identifier is assigned to the equipment.
(2) Column:
Active Modulation. ACM profile.
Global Capacity. Global capacity associated to the ACM profile.
The value is given by: Ethernet Capacity + TDM High Priority + TDM Low Priority + Mainte-
nance Channel.
Ethernet Capacity. Capacity used by the Ethernet tributaries.
TDM Capacity - High Priority. Capacity used by the high priority E1 tributaries (static).
The value is given by: Permanent TDM Traffic + Local Remote Telemetry Link.
For the ALCplus2 IDU equipment of IduBoard or IduBoard Exp. 16E1 type the Permanent
TDM Traffic value is 0.
TDM Capacity - Low Priority. Capacity used by the low priority E1 tributaries (dynamic) (Ex-
tra TDM Traffic).
Tx Power. Power in output to the transmitter.
To modify the reference band/modulation
The Bandwidth & Modulation parameter points out the current reference band/modulation (see Fig.44).
For each one of the radio channelling, the modulation and the consequent capacity can be configured.
2. To modify the parameter, select the wished value.
If the message Operation Fail! Wrong value assigned is displayed, the selected band/modulation is not
enabled for the equipment.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. To verify the enabled features, select the Fea-
tures Management (pag.141) command.
To modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation
The ACM Engine parameter points out the operating status of the adaptive modulation (see Fig.44).
2. To modify the parameter, select the option:
Disable. Adaptive modulation disabled.
Enable. Adaptive modulation enabled.
If the option Enable is not available, the use of the adaptive modulation is not enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. To verify the enabled features, select the Fea-
tures Management (pag.141) command .
To modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled)
Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
The profile is used only if a modulation equal to the minimum modulation has been selected as reference.
The Tx Power Constant Peak Mode parameter points out the power profile of the RF transmitter (see
Fig.44).
2. To modify the parameter, select the value:
Enable. Power increasing when the modulation decreases.
Disable. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.
To modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM ena-
bled)
Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
The Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation parameters respectively points out the upper threshold
and the lower threshold of the modulation (see Fig.44).
2. To modify the parameters Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation, select the value relevant to the
wished modulation.
Operation available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard
Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion.
The Permanent TDM Traffic parameter points out the number of E1 streams permanently allocated
(high priority streams) (see Fig.44).
2. To modify the parameter, select the wished value.
To modify the number of E1 streams assigned to an ACM profile (low priority
streams)
The Extra TDM Cap parameter points out the number of E1 streams which must be kept active for the
specific ACM profile (see Fig.44).
2. To modify the parameter, use the scrolling arrows to set the wished value.
To verify/modify the link identification number
The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens.
2. Bring in front of page the Local Link ID tab.
The Local Link ID parameter points out the link identification number (see Fig.46).
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the new number (value between 1 and 255).
The setting of the 0 value corresponds to the non-selection of the identification number.
The setting so executed does NOT automatically modify also the identification number of the remote
equipment.
Fig.46 Local Link ID tab (Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area)
Fig.46 notes
(1) The current value is displayed into the Value field. The lack of selection of said identification (val-
ue=0) is shown by the wording Not Used.
To verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.)
The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens.
2. Bring in front of page the Extra TDM Priority tab.
The tab displays the priority of the E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.)
Fig.47 shows an example.
3. In order to modify the sequence, execute one of the following actions:
Move a single E1 upwards by one place (higher priority)
Select the tributary and press Up.
Move a single E1 downwards by one place (lower priority).
Select the tributary and press Down.
Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the following way: A, B, 1, 2, 3, ... n *.
Press A B 1-16 (IduBoard Exp. 16E1 equipment) or A B 1-19 (IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or
IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 equipment).
Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the following way: 1, 2, 3, ... n*, A, B.
Press 1-16 A B (IduBoard Exp. 16E1 equipment) or 1-19 A B (IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or
IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 equipment).
* n = 16 (IduBoard Exp. 16E1 equipment) or 19 (IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp.
Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 equipment).
Fig.47 Extra TDM Priority tab (Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area)
Fig.47 notes
(1) Wording:
A. Tributary A (first E1 tributary of base board).
B. Tributary B (second E1 tributary of base board).
1...n. E1 radio.
n = 16 (equipment with IduBoard Exp. 16E1 expansion) or 19 (equipment with IduBoard
Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion).
When an E1 stream is grey, this means that this stream is available but is not included within
the maximum number of Extra TDM E1 streams carried by the configured radio frame.
For example, in the figure the maximum number of Extra TDM streams configured for the radio
transport is 8. Then, the first 8 E1s from top to bottom in the list will be displayed black, the remnant
ones grey.
The order, as displayed in the window, goes from highest priority (first position in the list) to lowest
one (last position in the list).
This means that the E1 at the bottom of the list will be the first stream to be discarded by the adap-
tive modulation, the penultimate E1 in the list will be the second to be discarded and so on until
reaching the E1 at the top of the list which will be the last stream to be discarded by the adaptive
modulation.
Adaptive modulation (more info)
Ethernet transport
ALCplus2 IDU equipment assigns all the capacity not assigned to the TDM transport to the Ethernet inter-
face. Then, in absence of TDM traffic, the Ethernet capacity coincides with the total available capacity.
TDM transport
(ALCplus2 IDU equipment of I duBoard or I duBoard Exp. 16E1 type)
The TDM traffic is assigned to every ACM profile selecting the number of E1 streams which must be trans-
ported.
The rules to respect for the setting of TDM traffic are the following:
a. For each ACM profile, the value Extra TDM Cap must be lower than or equal to Max TDM Cap -
Permanent TDM Traffic and cannot be never greater than 2 (ALCplus2 IDU equipment of Idu-
Board type) or 18 (ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 16E1 expansion).
b. When the user sets a value Extra TDM Cap for an ACM profile, WEB LCT automatically checks
and possibly modifies the values Extra TDM Cap of the higher modulation ACM profiles, in such
a way they result higher than or, at most, equal to the value Extra TDM Cap set by the user.
Key:
Max TDM Cap. Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 streams which can be assigned
to the TDM traffic for each ACM profile.
Extra TDM Cap. Number of (low priority) E1 streams assigned to each ACM profile.
TDM transport
(ALCplus2 IDU equipment with I duBoard Exp. 2xSTM- 1 32E1 or I duBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM- 1
16E1 expansion)
The TDM band can be subdivided in two parts: one not subjected to ACM, destined to the privileged traffic
(high priority) and not shareable with the Ethernet band (Permanent TDM Traffic), and one subjected to
ACM and destined to the lower priority traffic, possibly shareable with the Ethernet traffic (Extra TDM Cap).
The rules to respect for the setting of TDM traffic are the following:
a. The number of high priority E1 traffic channels must be lower than or equal to value displayed
next to the Permanent TDM Traffic box.
b. The value of Permanent TDM Traffic fixes the minimum allowed modulation as it blocks all the
modulations for which Max TDM Cap is lower than Permanent TDM Traffic (WEB LCT highlights
the minimum allowed modulation as consequence of the value Permanent TDM Traffic set disa-
bling all the not allowed modulations).
c. For each ACM profile, the value Extra TDM Cap must be lower than or equal to Max TDM Cap -
Permanent TDM Traffic and cannot be never greater than 21.
d. When the user sets a value Extra TDM Cap for an ACM profile, WEB LCT automatically checks
and possibly modifies the values Extra TDM Cap of the higher modulation ACM profiles, in such
a way they result higher than or, at most, equal to the value Extra TDM Cap set by the user.
e. A change of Permanent TDM Traffic can cause a violation of rule c. In this case, WEB LCT only
highlights which are the out-of-range values of Max TDM Cap (the wordings of the row of the
ACM profile become red) and the restore of the correct values is at users charge.
Key:
Max TDM Cap. Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 streams which can be assigned
to the TDM traffic for each ACM profile.
Extra TDM Cap. Number of (low priority) E1 streams assigned to each ACM profile.
Permanent TDM Traffic. Number of E1 streams permanently assigned (high priority streams).
Priority of dynamic E1 Radio streams (Extra TDM Cap)
The user, via WEB LCT, can define the priority of dynamic Radio E1s (Extra TDM Cap) (see Fig.47).
This priority determines the modality used to discard the dynamic Radio E1s when the ACM profile changes.
Reference modulation and power profile of the transmitter
The choice of the reference modulation and of the power profile depends on the license type owned by the
network operator.
The reference modulation determines the emission spectrum to be in compliance with the current laws.
The power profile increasing when the modulation decreases can be enabled according to the standard
ETSI EN 302 217-2-2: the power as function of the modulation can be only lower then or equal to the power
of the reference modulation.
More information is reported in the equipment manual ALCplus2 IDU.
General Preset
The General Preset command manages the modem and radio parameters.
Threshold level of the signal at reception (pag.164)
Enabling of the switch in transmission (pag.164)
T and N parameters (Tx Switch Control) (pag.165)
Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote... alarm (Tx Switch Control) (pag.166)
Radio branch label (pag.166)
To verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > General Preset command.
The General Preset contextual area opens with the General tab active.
The Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm parameter points out the threshold level
of the signal at reception (see Fig.48). Under this threshold level, it is activated the relevant alarm.
2. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the wished level.
Fig.48 General tab (General Preset contextual area)
To verify/modify the enabling of the switch in transmission
Operation available only for the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration. For the 1+1 etherofre-
quential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1 and 2) transmit at the
same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception.
The General Preset contextual area opens.
2. Bring in front of page the Tx Sw on Remote Alarms tab.
Reading/Writing
In the Tx Switch Control area the enabling of the switch in transmission is displayed (see Fig.49).
Enable. The switch in transmission as consequence of alarms (BER Alarm, Demodulator Fail
Alarm) in reception of the remote equipment is enabled.
Disable. The switch in transmission as consequence of alarms (BER Alarm, Demodulator Fail
Alarm) in reception of the remote equipment is not enabled.
Fig.49 Tx Sw on Remote Alarms tab (General Preset contextual area)
Fig.49 notes
(1) Enabling status of the switch in transmission as consequences of alarms (BER Alarm, Demodu-
lator Fail Alarm) on the signal received from the equipment located at the other side of the link (re-
mote equipment). If active, the option:
Enable, the switch is enabled.
Disable, the switch is not enabled.
(2) When the switch in transmission is active (see previous note), this switch is executed when the
number of alarmed seconds is > N within a time interval T. The box:
Check Period, points out the time interval T.
Alarm Threshold, points out the number of alarmed seconds N.
With number of alarmed seconds we mean the seconds when an alarm condition takes place con-
temporarily on both the Rx of the remote equipment.
(3) The Transmitter Switch on Remote... notifies the switch in transmission as consequence of alarms
on the signal received from the remote equipment.
To verify/modify the T and N parameters (Tx Switch Control)
2. Bring in front of page the Tx Sw on Remote Alarms tab (see Fig.49).
The box:
Check Period points out the time interval T (expressed in seconds) when the number of alarmed
seconds must be > N so that the switch in transmission takes place.
Alarm Threshold points out the number of alarmed seconds N.
3. To modify the parameters, type the new values in the relevant boxes (Check Period box: value between
1 and 300; Alarm Threshold: value between 1 and 60).
When the enabling status of the switch in transmission is active (Tx Switch Control), this switch is ex-
ecuted when the number of alarmed seconds is > N within a time interval T.
With number of alarmed seconds we mean the seconds when an alarm condition takes place contempo-
rarily on both the Rx of the remote equipment.
To reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote... alarm (Tx Switch Control)
2. Bring in front of page the Tx Sw on Remote Alarms tab (see Fig.49).
3. Press Alarm Reset.
To verify/modify the radio branch label
2. Bring in front of page the Radio Branch Label tab.
The Radio Branch Label parameter points out the label that identifies the radio branch (see Fig.50).
3. To change the parameter, type the new label (alphanumeric string with maximum 30 characters).
Fig.50 Radio Branch Label tab (General Preset contextual area)
SYNCHRONISATION
* Read and Write user profile can set only the parameters relevant to the maintenance (MAN. OP).
This command is available only if the synchronisation management is enabled (see Fig.43)
The Synchronisation command manages the synchronism sources.
To verify the status of the synchronism sources (pag.167)
To manage the synchronism sources in input:
To enable/disable the use of a synchronism source in input (pag.169)
To verify/modify the use priority of a synchronism source in input (pag.171)
To force the use of a synchronism source in input (pag.171)
To set a synchronism source in input as preferential (pag.172)
To set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for T2/T3 2 (pag.172)
To set the source type used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0) (pag.172)
To verify the alarms status of synchronism source in input (pag.173)
To manage the equipment inner synchronism (T0):
To force the status of the T0 synchronisation (pag.173)
To verify the alarms status of T0 synchronism (pag.173)
To manage the output of synchronism (T12) on tributary A/B and define the interface (output/
input) of tributary A/B (pag.174)
To re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation (pag.175)
For more information about the management of synchronisation go to pag.176.
To verify the status of the synchronism sources
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Synchronisation command.
The Synchronisation contextual area opens with the SETS tab active.
The tab displays the status of the synchronism sources (see Fig.51).
Reading/Writing
Monitor, Read Only
Read and Write*, Station Operator, System
Fig.51 SETS tab (Synchronisation contextual area)
Fig.51 notes
(1) Each synchronization source in input is represented by a rectangle whose characteristics are illus-
trated here below.
a. Wording:
TE LAN-3. Source extracted from LAN 3.
TE LAN-4. Source extracted from LAN 4.
T2/T3 1. Source extracted from the tributary A.
T2/T3 2. Source extracted from tributary B or from one of the E1 tributaries of the ex-
pansion.
RADIO (T0). Source extracted from the Radio.
STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0). Source extracted from the STM-1 tributary or from the Nodal Bus
2.
NODAL 1 (T0). Source extracted from the Nodal Bus 1.
STM-1. Source extracted from the STM-1 tributary.
Internal Source. Source extracted from an its own internal reference (12,8 MHz STRA-
TUM 3).
The detail of the signal/configuration relevant to every single s source and the availability of the
source depending on the type/configuration of the equipment is pointed out in Tab.3.
In the boxes representing the synchronism sources in input for which the user can change the
parameters, the mouse cursor assumes the shape of an hand.
The Internal Source synchronism source has not configuration parameters.
b. Wording:
P: D. The synchronism source is not enabled.
P: <19>. The synchronism source is enabled and has a priority level pointed out by the
number (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).
c. Wording:
Trib. A. E1 tributary of the base board (tributary A).
Trib. B. E1 tributary of the base board (tributary B).
Trib. <number>. E1 tributary of the expansion.
STM-1. Tributary STM-1.
Nodal 2. Second Nodal Bus.
Not all the synchronism sources are provided with this information.
d. Colour box:
White. The source in input has not been manually forced by the operator for the gener-
ation of the T0 synchronism.
Light blue. The source has been manually forced (Manual Operation).
e. Colour box:
White. There are not active alarms.
Red. At least one source alarm has been activated.
(2) T0: equipment inner synchronism.
a. Wording:
(Locked). The input source, set for the creation of the T0 synchronism, is physically
present, the relevant signal is valid and it is used by the equipment for the creation of
the inner synchronism.
(Hold Over). All the possible sources in input are degraded. In this case the equipment
keeps the estimated frequency of the last used external source.
(Free Running). The T0 synchronism is created by equipment inner reference (Internal
Source), because the other input synchronism sources are not physically present, their
signal is degraded or they are disabled.
b. Colour box:
White. The user has not forced the status of the T0 synchronism.
Light blue. The user has forced the status of the T0 synchronism (Manual Operation).
c. Colour box:
White. There are not active alarms.
Red. At least one T0 alarm has been activated.
To enable/disable the use of a synchronism source in input
The Synchronisation contextual area opens with the SETS tab active (see Fig.51).
2. Select the input synchronism source.
The Configuration: <source name> window opens.
The Timing Sink Priority area points out the usage status of the synchronism source (see Fig.52).
3. To enable the use of the source:
a. Activate the Enabled control box.
The cursor label changes from Priority: Input to Priority: <number>.
b. Move the cursor on a number comprised between 1 and 9 according to the desired priority level
to be assigned to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).
To disable the use of the source:
a. Deactivate the Enabled control box.
The cursor label changes from Priority: <number> to Priority: Input.
Fig.52 Configuration <input synchronism source> window
Fig.52 notes
(1) The colour of each box displays the status of the alarm:
Grey. The alarm is not active.
(2) Option:
Forced Switch Off. The source is not forced for the generation of the internal synchronism.
Forced Switch On. The source is forced for the generation of the internal synchronism.
(3) Option:
Preferential Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled
synchronism sources.
Preferential On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled syn-
chronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used
for the generation of the internal synchronism.
(4) The box Enabled points out the use status of the source. In detail, if the box is
Active. The source is enabled to use.
Inactive. The source is not enabled to use.
The parameter Priority: <19> points out the priority level of the source: 1 maximum priority, 9
minimum priority. The word Priority: Input points out that the source is not enabled.
(5) If the selected synchronism source in input is:
T2/T3 1. The Source E1 area contains the Type parameter which points out the interface of
tributary A:
T2 (2Mb/s). 2Mbit/s interface.
T3 (2MHz). 2MHz interface.
T2/T3 2. The Source E1 area contains the Unit parameter which points out the tributary used
as synchronism source:
Trib. B. Tributary B.
If this value is active, the area Source E1 contains the parameter Type which points
out the interface of tributary B:
T2 (2Mb/s). 2Mbit/s interface.
T3 (2MHz). 2MHz interface.
Trib. 1-16/Trib. 1-32. One of the E1 tributaries of the expansion.
If this value is active, the area Source E1 contains the parameter PPI which points out
the number of the tributary (2Mb/s interface) selected as synchronism source.
The Trib. 1-16 value is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard
Exp. 16E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion.
The Trib. 1-32 value is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp.
2xSTM-1 32E1 expansion.
STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0). The Source area contains a box pointing out the type of source used
as synchronism:
STM-1. STM-1 stream.
Value available only if the management of STM-1 stream is active.
Nodal 2. Second nodal bus.
Value available only if the management of the nodal management is active.
The synchronism sources TE LAN-3, TE LAN-4, RADIO (T0), STM-1 and NODAL 1 (T0) are not pro-
vided with the Source area.
To verify/modify the use priority of a synchronism source in input
Operation available and meaningful only when the use of the synchronism source is active (see Fig.51).
The Timing Sink Priority area points out the priority level of the source (see Fig.52).
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the number representing the wished priority.
The user can set a number between 1 and 9, where 1 represents the highest priority and 9 the lowest
one.
To force the use of a synchronism source in input
Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
Operation meaningful only when the use of the synchronism source is active (see Fig.51).
The Manual Operation parameter points out the forcing status of the source (see Fig.52).
Forced Switch Off, not to force the use of the source for the generation of the internal synchro-
nism.
Forced Switch On, to force the use of the source for the generation of the internal synchronism.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the forcing a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing
and displaying the current setting of timeout.
5. Press Yes to continue the operation.
The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.
To set a synchronism source in input as preferential
Operation meaningful only when the use of the synchronism source is active (see Fig.51).
The Manual Switch parameter points out if the source is used as preferential (see Fig.52).
Preferential Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled syn-
chronism sources.
Preferential On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled syn-
chronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used for
the generation of the internal synchronism.
To set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for T2/T3 2
2. Select the input synchronism source T2/T3 2.
The Configuration: T2/T3 2 window opens.
The Source E1 area points out the tributary used as synchronism source (see Fig.52).
3. To change the parameter, in the box Unit select the value:
Trib. B. Tributary B.
When this value is selected, the Type box is displayed which points out the interface used by the
tributary B.
Trib. 1-16/Trib. 1-32. One of the E1 tributaries of the expansion.
When this value is selected, the cursor PPI <number of the selected PPI> is displayed. Move the
cursor over the wished number of tributary.
The Trib. 1-16 value is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 16E1
or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion.
The Trib. 1-32 value is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1
32E1 expansion.
To set the source type used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0)
Operation available only for equipment provided with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 and
if the management of the STM-1 stream and/or the management of the nodal configuration is active (see
Fig.43).
2. Select the input synchronism source STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0).
The Configuration: STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0) window opens.
The Source area points out the source type used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0) (see Fig.52).
STM-1. STM-1 stream (value available only if the management of the STM-1 stream is active).
Nodal 2. Second nodal bus (value available only if the management of the nodal configuration
is active).
To verify the alarms status of synchronism source in input
The Alarms area points out the status of the alarms relevant to the source (see Fig.52).
To force the status of the T0 synchronisation
2. Select the T0 synchronism source.
The Configuration Parameters window opens.
The Status Control area points out the status of the T0 synchronism:
Free Running. The T0 synchronism is generated by the equipment internal reference (Internal
Source).
Hold Over. The Hold Over status is forced.
Locked. The locking of the synchronism to an external source is enabled.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the forcing (selection of the Free Running or Hold Over option) a message is
displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout.
The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.
To verify the alarms status of T0 synchronism
2. Select the T0 synchronism source.
The Configuration Parameters window opens.
The Alarm Report area points out the alarms status of the T0 synchronism.
The colour of each box displays the status of the specific alarm:
Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has, respectively, severity Critical, Ma-
jor, Minor or Warning.
To manage the output of synchronism (T12) on tributary A/B and set the in-
terface (output/input) of tributary A/B
The setting of the tributary (A or B) as output of synchronism T12 compromises the use of
the tributary (A or B) as traffic tributary.
The Synchronisation contextual area opens (see Fig.51).
2. Bring in front of page the E1 Source Type tab.
The Trib. A and Trib. B boxes respectively point out the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A and
B (see Fig.53).
3. In order to modify the parameters select, in the box relevant to the wished tributary, the option:
NORMAL TRAFFIC. The tributary (A or B) is used for the transport of the traffic only or for the
contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic if properly set (see pag.180).
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for
the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input.
T2 (2Mb/s). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2Mbit/s.
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for
the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input.
T3 (2MHz). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2MHz.
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2MHz as interface for the
tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input.
Fig.53 E1 Source Type tab (Synchronisation contextual area)
Fig.53 notes
(1) Parameters:
NORMAL TRAFFIC. The tributary (A or B) is used for the transport of the traffic only or for
the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic if properly set (see pag.180).
The interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input is 2Mbit/s.
T2 (2Mb/s). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2Mbit/
s.
The interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input is 2Mbit/s.
T3 (2MHz). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2MHz.
The interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input is 2MHz.
Setting the value T2 ( 2Mb/ s) or T3 ( 2MHz) compromises the use of the tributary (A or B)
as traffic tributary.
To re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and syn-
chronisation
Here below only the operation of re-timing of the E1s of an equipment is described. For the correct
configuration of the functionality for a radio link go to pag.180.
The Synchronisation contextual area opens (see Fig.51).
2. Bring in front of page the E1 Retiming tab.
Every Tributary... box points out the activation status of the E1 re-timing function relevant to the spe-
cific tributary (see Fig.53).
3. To modify a parameter select, in the E1 Retiming area relevant to the wished tributary, the option:
Disabled. The E1 re-timing function is inactive.
Enabled. The E1 re-timing function is active.
Fig.54 E1 Retiming tab (Synchronisation contextual area)
Fig.53 notes
(1) Value:
Tributary A. First E1 tributary of base board.
Tributary B. Second E1 tributary of base board.
Tributary <number>. E1 tributary of expansion.
(2) Read-only value.
(3) Value:
Disabled. The E1 re-timing function is inactive.
Enabled. The E1 re-timing function is active.
For more information about the E1 re-timing function and the modality to use the parameter for
the implementation of the function in a radio link go to pag.180.
(4) The Sync Alarm, when the E1 re-timing function is active, points out whether the operation failed
(alarm activated) or it was successful (alarm deactivated).
The colour of the box represents the Sync Alarm status and severity:
Management of synchronisation (more info)
ALCplus2 IDU equipment can be configured to operate with synchronisation enabled or disabled.
When the synchronisation is disable, the synchronisation is not managed: the clocks are generated by the
local internal reference.
When the synchronisation is enabled, the synchronism source in input, enabled and with the highest pri-
ority, is used to synchronise the local IDU (if a forcing or a preferential is not active).
It is possible to generate the synchronisation in output using the tributaries A and/or B.
The user can enable or disable the management of synchronisation as he wishes (see pag.153).
Here below the following topics are described:
Synchronism sources in input (pag.176)
Internal synchronism T0 (pag.179)
Synchronism in output T12 (pag.179)
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation (pag.180)
Synchronism sources in input
The equipment has more synchronism sources in input.
The number/type of synchronism sources in input depends on the type/expansion of equipment (see
Tab.3).
Enabling of the synchronism sources in input
A synchronism source, in order to be used, must be enabled by the user (see pag.169).
Configuration of the synchronism sources in input
For some synchronism sources, the type of source can be set (see Tab.3).
Priority of the synchronism source in input
A priority level can be associated to every synchronism source in input (see pag.171).
The source with the highest priority level, and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize the equipment
(if a forcing or a preferential source is not active).
The priority level of the synchronism source is pointed out by a number between 1 and 9, where 1 points
out the highest priority and 9 the lowest one.
Generally the equipment takes the synchronism from the source with the highest priority level: if this
source is missing or is degraded, the synchronism is taken from the source with priority level immediately
lower.
When the source with highest priority level returns to be valid, the equipment will automatically start to
use it to take the synchronism. If all the synchronism sources (set by the user) become unavailable, the
equipment automatically takes the synchronism from its own internal reference.
The degradation of the signal is caused by the presence of, at least, one of the following conditions:
The source is not physically present.
The difference between the source frequency and the internal reference source (STRATUM 3) is
greater than 9,2 ppm.
Forcing of a synchronism source in input
This function allows the user forcing a synchronism source in input as source from which the T0 synchro-
nism is taken (see pag.171).
This forcing is made without considering the status and the priority of the source.
This function must not be used for the normal operation of the synchronism. It is a maintenance operation
and remains active until the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operations expires (if set).
Function of synchronism source in preferential input
This function foresees the choice of a source to use as preferential among those enabled (see pag.172).
When the function of preferential source is not active, the internal synchronism is taken from the enabled
source with highest priority.
When the function of preferential source is activated for a source, this source will be used (in absence of
alarms causing its degradation or forced sources) to take the internal synchronism independently from its
priority level.
This condition is maintained until when the user disables the function of preferential source or the source
signal becomes degraded.
Tab.3 Synchronism sources in input
*
*
* The type of interface depends on the setting made by the user for the management of the synchronism
in output T12 (see Fig.53).
ALCplus2 IDU
equipment
Synchronism sources in input
Name Type Configuration
IduBoard
TE LAN-3 LAN Eth
LAN-3.
Source available only if the LAN is configured with electrical interface
TE LAN-4 LAN Eth
LAN-4.
T2/T3 1 E1 Tributary A with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) *
T2/T3 2 E1 Tributary B with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) *
RADIO (T0) Radio Synchronism from the remote terminal
IduBoard Exp.
16E1
TE LAN-3 LAN Eth
LAN-3.
TE LAN-4 LAN Eth
LAN-4.
T2/T3 2 E1
Source configurable as:
Tributary B with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) *
Tributary E1 of expansion (116) with interface T2 (2Mb/s)
IduBoard Exp
2xSTM-1 32E1
TE LAN-3 LAN Eth
LAN-3.
TE LAN-4 LAN Eth
LAN-4
T2/T3 2 E1
Tributary E1 of expansion (132) with interface T2 (2Mb/s)
STM-1 STM-1
STM-1.
Source available only if the management of STM-1 stream is enabled
IduBoard Exp.
Nod. 2xSTM-1
16E1
TE LAN-3 LAN Eth
LAN-3.
TE LAN-4 LAN Eth
LAN-4.
T2/T3 2 E1
Tributary E1 of the expansion (116) with interface T2 (2Mb/s)
STM-1/
NODAL 2
(T0)
STM-1
or
Nodal
Bus
STM-1.
Source available only if the management of STM-1 stream is active
Nodal bus 2
Value available only if the management of nodal configuration is active
NODAL 1
(T0)
Nodal
Bus
Nodal bus 1.
Value available only if the management of nodal configuration is active
Internal synchronism T0
The synchronism source in input, which the internal synchronism T0 is extracted from, is determined by
the controller SETS of the equipment according to specific criteria:
Forcing of the source
Status of the source (enabled/disabled)
Preferential source
Source priority
Status of the signal (valid/degraded)
The internal synchronism T0 can assume one of the following statuses:
Locked, the input source, set for the creation of the T0 synchronism, is physically present, the
relevant signal is valid and used by the equipment for the creation of the synchronism.
Hold-over, all the possible sources in input are degraded. In this case the equipment keeps the
estimated frequency of the last used external source.
Free-running, the T0 synchronism is generated by equipment internal reference (Internal
Source), because the other synchronism sources in input are not physically present, their signal
is degraded or they are disabled.
The user can force the status of the internal synchronism T0 (see pag.173).
The forcing of the status Hold Over or Free Running is not the normal operation of the synchronism T0.
These forcings are maintenance operations and remain active until when the user does not disable them
or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set).
Synchronism in output T12
The user can set that the synchronism in output is provided to tributaries A and/or B (see pag.174). In
this case the use of the tributary (A and/or B) as traffic tributary is compromised.
Moreover the use of the tributary A and/or B as output of synchronism T12 determinates the type of the
interface of the tributary (A and/or B) used as synchronism source in input (see Tab.4).
Tab.4 Synchronism in output (T12)
* For the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic see pag.180).
Value set as output of
synchronism T12
(parameter Trib. A - Fig.53)
Output of Synchronism
T12 on tributary A
Interface of tributary A
(output/input)
Use of tributary A
as traffic tributary
NORMAL TRAFFIC Yes * 2Mbit/s Yes
T2 (2Mb/s) Yes 2Mbit/s No
T3 (2MHz) Yes 2MHz No
Value set as output of
synchronism T12
(parameter Trib. B - Fig.53)
Output of Synchronism
T12 on tributary B
Interface of tributary B
(output/input)
Use of tributary B
as traffic tributary
NORMAL TRAFFIC Yes * 2Mbit/s Yes
T2 (2Mb/s) Yes 2Mbit/s No
T3 (2MHz) Yes 2MHz No
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisa-
tion
The function called Re-timing of E1s allows re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic
and synchronisation, to increase the requirements of jitter and wander even in case of operation with adap-
tive modulation (ACM).
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the base board (tributary A and B)
The tributaries of the base board can be set for the transport only of the traffic or as output of T12 syn-
chronism.
If the user wishes to use the tributary A or B for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation,
in any condition of operation of the radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations
described in the following example.
Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary A used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchro-
nisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.55).
Fig.55 Example of re-timing of tributary A (synchronisation)
Operations to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of WEB LCT:
a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (Sync Enable - Fig.43).
b. Activate the use of the tributary A (see Fig.78)
c. Set the source T2/T3 1 (tributary A) as synchronism source in input (see Fig.51 and Fig.52).
d. Set the value NORMAL TRAFFIC as output of synchronism T12 for the parameter Trib. A (see
Fig.53).
Operations to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of WEB LCT:
b. Activate the use of the tributary A (see Fig.78)
c. Set the source RADIO (T0) as synchronism source in input (see Fig.51 and Fig.52).
d. Activate the re-timing of tributary A (Tributary A - value Enabled - Fig.54).
e. Set the value NORMAL TRAFFIC as output of synchronism T12 for the parameter Trib. A (see
Fig.53).
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the expansion (tributary 1...n)
Generally the tributaries of the expansion transport traffic.
If the user wants to use their frequency for synchronisation purposes in any condition of operation of the
radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations described in the following exam-
ple.
Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary 1 used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchro-
nisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.56).
Fig.56 Example of re-timing of tributary 1 (synchronisation)
Settings to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of WEB LCT:
b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see Fig.78)
c. Set the tributary 1 as source T2/T3 2 (see Fig.52).
d. Set the source T2/T3 2 as synchronism source in input (see Fig.51 and Fig.52).
Settings to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of WEB LCT:
b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see Fig.78)
c. Set the source RADIO (T0) as synchronism source in input (see Fig.51 e Fig.52).
d. Activate the re-timing of tributary 1 (Tributary 1 - value Enabled - Fig.54).
In case you want to use this function (contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation) on more
E1 tributaries, all the tributaries must be synchronous, moreover the re-timing must be activated for all
the tributaries and not only for the tributary used as synchronous source in input.
BASE BAND
At the choice of Base Band option, the program displays the following commands:
Ethernet Switch (pag.183). It manages the general configuration of the Ethernet interface.
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4 (pag.191). It manages the Ethernet external ports.
Port A (pag.211). It manages the Ethernet internal port.
Spanning Tree (pag.220). It manages the spanning tree in the network.
TDM Tributaries (pag.227). It manages the TDM tributaries.
Cross Connection (pag.251). It manages the cross-connection matrix.
The Cross Connection command is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp.
2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion.
Ethernet Switch
The Ethernet Switch command manages the general configuration of the Ethernet interface.
General settings of the Ethernet switch
To verify/modify the aging time of the MAC addresses stored in the specific table (pag.183).
To verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet (pag.185).
To verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field (pag.185)
To verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
(pag.185).
To verify/assign the output queue to a packet, in input to any Ethernet port, according to its Tag
802.1p (pag.185).
To verify/modify the time interval (Hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding modality is
activated and deactivated (pag.186).
Parameters of PTOS/DSCP field (level 3)
To verify/modify which queue a packet must be assigned to, in input from the Ethernet ports,
depending on its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3) (pag.186).
Virtual LAN
To verify the existing virtual Lans (pag.187).
To create a virtual Lan (pag.189).
To modify the configuration of a virtual Lan (pag.189).
To delete a virtual Lan (pag.190).
To verify/modify the aging time of the MAC addresses stored in the specific table
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Ethernet Switch command.
The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens with the General tab active.
The MAC Addr. Aging Time parameter points out the validity period of the MAC addresses, dynamically
acquired and stored in the specific table (see Fig.57).
2. To change the parameter, set the wished value.
Reading/Writing
Fig.57 General tab (Ethernet Switch contextual area)
Fig.57 notes
(1) Option:
1522. Maximum size for standard Ethernet (IEEE Tagged Frames).
2048. Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 2048.
10240 (Jumbo). Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 10240 (Jumbo).
(2) The option:
8421 WRR, indicates that a part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties,
then a part of the queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with fur-
ther lower priority (2 messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message)
and so on restarting from the queue with highest priority.
Strict Priority, indicates that the queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending
of all the messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.
Strict 3, indicates that the high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the
messages). The other queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
Strict 3 and 2, indicates that the high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied.
The other queues (1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
(3) The check sign indicates which output queue (Queue) the packet in input is associated to, whose
value of priority Tag (802.1p) corresponds to the value 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7.
The 802.1p Priority Management table is COMMON to all the Ethernet port of the equipment.
(4) Each Ethernet port of the equipment has four output queue, which the packets in input from other
ports are sent to. Wording:
Queue 0. Queue with 0 priority (lowest priority).
Queue 1. Queue with 1 priority.
Queue 2. Queue with 2 priority.
Queue 3. Queue with 3 priority (highest priority).
(5) A packet in input from any Ethernet port of the equipment, having a valid value of priority Tag
802.1p, is automatically assigned to one of the four queues of the output port, according to what
reported in the 802.1p Priority Management table.
For example, with reference to the figures, the packets in input with Tag 802.1p equal to 0, 1, 2 or
3 will be assigned to the queue with lower priority (Queue 0), while the packets with Tag 802.1p
equal to 4, 5, 6 or 7, to the output queue with highest priority (Queue 3).
What just said is valid only if the analysis of the priority at level 3 (field PTOS/DSCP) is not active
and prioritary.
The equipment allows analysing the priority at level 2, according the standard 802.1p (values
07), or at level 3, through the analysis of the PTOS/DSCP field present in the header of the IP
packets (values 063). The priority standard can be modified by the user and can be different for
each Ethernet port.
To verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet
The Max Packet Size parameter points out the maximum size of the accepted packet (see Fig.57).
1522. Maximum size for standard Ethernet (IEEE Tagged Frames).
2048. Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 2048.
10240 (Jumbo). Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 10240 (Jumbo).
To verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field
The QinQ ETH Type parameter points out the Eth Type value in the S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ field (see Fig.57).
2. To change the parameter, type the new value.
To verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
The Egress Priority Policy parameter points out the emptying algorithm of the output queues (see Fig.57).
Strict Priority, the queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all the messag-
es) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.
8421 WRR, a part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a part of the
queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower priority (2
messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on restarting from
the queue with highest priority.
Strict 3, the high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The other
queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
Strict 3 and 2, the high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The other queues
(1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
To verify/assign the output queue to a packet, in input to any Ethernet port, accord-
ing to its Tag 802.1p
The 802.1p Priority Management table points out the current setting output queues - Tag 802.1p (see
Fig.57).
2. To change the parameter, select the box (the check sign is displayed) corresponding to the wished com-
bination output queue - Tag 802.1p.
For the same value of Tag 802.1p, it is possible to select only one queue at a time.
To verify/modify the time interval (Hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding
modality is activated and deactivated
The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens.
2. Bring in front of page the LLF tab.
The LLF Hysteresis parameter points out the setting of the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding mo-
dality (see Fig.58).
3. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value.
Fig.58 LLF tab (Ethernet Switch contextual area)
To verify/modify which queue a packet must be assigned to, in input from the Ether-
net ports, depending on its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3)
The setting of the parameter is common to all the Ethernet ports of the equipment.
2. Bring in front of page the PTOS/DSCP Config tab.
In the Queue Pri column, for each PTOS/DSCP value, the relevant output queue is displayed (see
Fig.59).
3. To modify the output queue, which a value is associated to, select, in the Filter area, the option relevant
to the IP format which the DSCP field refers to:
IP v4 DSCP. The DSCP field is meaningful for traffic incoming in the switch in the IPv4 format.
IPv6 DSCP. The DSCP field is meaningful for traffic incoming in the switch in the IPv6 format.
4. Select the output queue which the value is associated to:
Queue 0, to assign the value to the output queue with 0 priority (high priority).
Queue 1, to assign the value to the output queue with 1 priority.
Queue 2, to assign the value to the output queue with 2 priority.
Queue 3, to assign the value to the output queue with 3 priority (low priority).
5. Repeat the previous step for the output queue of all the wished value.
Fig.59 PTOS/DSCP Config. tab (Ethernet Switch contextual area)
Fig.59 notes
(1) For each value of the column:
Value. It is displayed the value expressed in binary digits.
Precedence, Delay, Throug., Reliab., DSCP. For the description of the wording present in
these columns refer to RFC 2474, 2597 and 2598 (Request For Comments).
Queue Pri. The queue which the packet in input to the specific port, whose PTOS/DSCP has
the value displayed in the row, is assigned to is displayed:
Queue 0. Output queue with 0 priority (low priority).
Queue 1. Output queue with 1 priority.
Queue 2. Output queue with 2 priority.
The single asterisk (*) near the wording indicates that the value has been modified but it is not yet
transmitted to the equipment (pressing Apply).
The output queue, which a value is associated to, can be modified by the user.
(2) If set the option:
View All. The list displays all the values.
View Queue 0. The list displays only the values associated to the 0 output queue (low prior-
ity), (Queue Pri column, Queue 0 wording).
View Queue 1. The list displays only the values associated to the 1 output queue (Queue Pri
column, Queue 1 wording).
View Queue 2. The list displays only the values associated to the 2 output queue (Queue Pri
column, Queue 2 wording).
View Queue 3. The list displays only the values associated to the 3 output queue (high pri-
ority), (Queue Pri column, Queue 3 wording).
To modify the displaying of the list, select the wished values.
(3) If selected the option:
VP v4 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the switch in the IPv4
format.
IP v6 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the switch in the IPv6 for-
mat.
To verify the existing virtual LANs
2. Bring in front of page the Virtual Lan Config. tab.
The existing virtual LANs are displayed in the Virtual Lan Config. tab (see Fig.60).
Fig.60 Virtual Lan Config. tab (Ethernet Switch contextual area)
Fig.60 notes
(1) For each virtual Lan, the columns indicate:
VLan ID, identifier assigned to the virtual Lan by the user during its creation.
The wording Used, indicates that the ID of the virtual Lan is used also as default Vlan ID by
one of the internal/external ports (see Default Vlan ID area).
Label, name assigned to the virtual Lan by the user during its creation or modification.
Lan1, enabling of the external port 1 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of
the virtual LAN:
----, the port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan.
Untag, the port allows the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed
to the packets in output from the port.
Tagged, the port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automati-
cally added the Tag composed by the information:
Of priority; the value is defined in the box Priority of the origin port of the
packet itself.
Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the
origin port of the packet.
The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan
ID of the input port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is
not satisfied, the Vlan Table is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.
Unmodif, the port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed nor
added to the packets in output from the port.
the virtual LAN. For the description of the wordings, refer to the previous note (Lan1).
PortA, enabling of the internal port to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual LAN. For the description of the wordings, refer to the previous note (Lan1).
(2) The default identifier of the internal (Port A) and external (Lan...) ports.
To create a virtual Lan
The Virtual Lan Config. tab opens (see Fig.60).
The Virtual Lan Properties tab opens.
4. Type, into the VLan ID box, the identifier (within 1 and 4095) you wish to assign to the virtual LAN.
The parameter cannot be modified later.
5. Type, into the Label box, the name (alphanumeric string up to 20 characters) you wish to assign to the
virtual LAN.
When the box is selected, Vlan <identifier> is suggested as name of the virtual Lan. This name can be
changed as you wish.
6. In the box relevant to each external port (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3 and Lan 4) and internal port (Port A),
select the option:
Disable, not to enable the port for the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan.
Untagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. The tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets in
output from the port.
Tagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag com-
posed by the information:
Of priority; the value is defined in the box Priority of the origin port of the packet itself.
Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the origin port
of the packet.
The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID of the
input port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not satisfied, the Vlan
Table is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.
Unmodified, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed nor added to the
packets in output from the port.
The Virtual Lan Config. tab displays the row relevant to the new virtual Lan.
To modify the configuration of a virtual Lan
3. Select the virtual Lan you wish to modify.
4. Select the Modify tab.
The Virtual Lan Properties tab opens.
The VLan identifier cannot be changed.
5. Type the possible new name (alphanumeric string at most of 20 characters) you wish to assign to the
virtual LAN in the Label box.
6. In the box relevant to each external port (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3 and Lan 4) and internal port (Port A),
select the option:
Disable, not to enable the port for the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan.
Untagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. The tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets in
output from the port.
Tagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag com-
posed by the information:
Of priority; the value is defined in the box Priority of the origin port of the packet itself.
Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the origin port
of the packet.
The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID of the
input port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not satisfied, the Vlan
Table is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.
Unmodified, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed nor added to the
In the Virtual Lan Config. tab the changes to the row relevant to the specific virtual Lan are made.
To delete a virtual Lan
3. Select the virtual Lan you wish to delete.
The multiple selection can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
The virtual Lan is removed from the list.
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4
The LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4 commands manage the Ethernet external port.
On the choice of one of the commands, the LAN <number relevant to the selected Lan> contextual area
opens, where it is possible to manage the specific external port. In detail:
Status and communication parameters
To verify/modify the enabling status of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.192).
To verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the external port (Lan1, Lan2 and
Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface) (pag.194).
To verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inac-
tive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the external port (Lan1, Lan2,
Lan3, Lan4) (pag.195).
To verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3,
Lan4) (pag.195)
To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific
table (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.196)
To restart the auto negotiation procedure for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
(pag.196).
Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4
electrical interface) (pag.196)
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of line synchronism
(Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface) (pag.196)
Interface type (electrical, optical)
The following operation is available only for ports LAN 3 and LAN 4.
To verify/modify the interface type of the external port (Lan3, Lan 4) (pag.197)
Virtual Lan parameters
To verify/modify the default Vid value of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.197).
To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the external port
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.199).
To verify/modify the behaviour of the external port towards the packets in output (Lan1, Lan2,
To force the value of Vid of the external port to the default value (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
(pag.200).
To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the external port (Lan1,
Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.200).
Priority parameters
To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the external
port to the output queue (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.201).
To verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the external
port which, in output, the Tag is added to (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.202).
To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3,
Lan4) (pag.202)
Reading/Writing
Monitor, Read Only
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) parameters
To verify the status of the external port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol (Lan1, Lan2,
To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
(pag.204).
To verify/modify the priority of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.204).
To verify/modify the connection cost of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.204).
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) parameters
To verify the status of the external port in relation to the ethernet line protection (Lan1, Lan2,
To enable/disable the ethernet line protection for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
(pag.205).
To verify/modify the priority of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.204).
To verify/modify the connection cost of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.204).
LLF parameters
To verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the external port
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.206).
Loop
To activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
(pag.207)
Laser parameters
The following operations are available only for ports LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical inter-
faces.
To verify the current status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.208)
To verify the type of laser module (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.209)
To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.209)
To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.209)
To enable manually the laser transmission (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.210)
To execute the test laser functioning status (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.210)
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) go to pag.225.
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) go to pag.225.
To verify/modify the enabling status of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command.
The LAN <port number> contextual area opens with the Interface tab active (LAN 1/LAN 2). For LAN
3 and LAN 4, it is necessary to bring this tab in foreground.
The Rate Control parameter points out the enabling status of the port (see Fig.61).
Disable. The external port is not enabled to the use.
Full Rate. The external port is enabled to the use of the maximum bit rate relevant to the port.
...Kb/...Mb. The external port is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.
Fig.61 Interface tab (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3, Lan 4) (LAN... contextual area)
Fig.61 notes
(1) Operating modality of the line synchronism:
Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.
Slave. The line synchronism is generated starting from the clock retrieved from the line
(Loop Time).
Parameter available and meaningful only for the ports with electrical interface for which the au-
tonegotiation is active (box Speed/Duplex - value Auto).
(2) Activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism:
Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is
automatic.
Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is
forced. In this case, the role defined in the box Master/Slave Role is used.
Parameter available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the auton-
egotiation is active (box Speed/Duplex value Auto).
(3) Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines:
MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card mo-
dality).
MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
Parameter available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the use of
external port is enabled (box Rate Control value Full Rate or ...Kb/...Mb).
(4) Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table):
Enable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is enabled.
Disable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is disabled.
(5) Enabling status of the port:
Disable. The external port is not enabled to the use.
Full Rate. The external port is enabled to the use of the max bit rate relevant to the port.
...Kb/...Mb. The external port is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.
(6) Activation status of the flow control of the port:
Enable. The flow control is forced active.
Disable. The flow control is forced inactive.
Auto. The flow control is automatic (automatically activated or deactivated by the auto ne-
gotiation procedure).
The option Auto is available only if the auto negotiation is active for the port (Speed/Du-
plex box - option Auto).
(7) Activation status of the autonegotiation and, if the autonegotiation is deactivated, operating modal-
ities and transmission speed of the port.
For LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with electrical interface, the following values are
available:
Full-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and
the data transmission speed through the external port is 10Mbit/s.
Half-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and
Half-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the external port is 100Mbit/s.
Auto. The auto negotiation is enabled.
For LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with optical interface, the following values are available:
Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and
the data transmission speed through the external port is 1GMbit/s.
(8) Connection parameters of the port. Box:
Speed. Data transmission speed.
Duplex. Transmission modality.
(9) Current status of the line synchronism.
Parameter available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the auton-
egotiation is active (box Speed/Duplex value Auto).
(10) Status of the alarms relevant to the port.
The colour of each box displays the status of the alarm:
To verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the external port
(Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface)
Operation available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the use of the ex-
ternal port is enabled (see pag.192).
3 and LAN 4, it is necessary to bring it in foreground.
The Cable crossover parameter points out the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines (see Fig.61).
MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).
MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
To verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negoti-
ation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the ex-
ternal port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
The Speed/Duplex parameter points out the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto
negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the external port
(see Fig.61).
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
For LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with electrical interface, the following values are avail-
able:
Full-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the external port is 10Mbit/s.
Half-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the
Half-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and
Auto. The auto negotiation is enabled.
For LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with optical interface, the following values are available:
Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the external port is 1GMbit/s.
To verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the external port (Lan1,
Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
The Flow Control Full Dplx/Back Pressure Half Dplx parameter points out the activation status of the
flow control of the external port (see Fig.61).
Enable. The flow control is forced active.
Disable. The flow control is forced inactive.
Auto. The flow control is automatic (automatically activated or deactivated by the auto negoti-
ation procedure).
The option Auto is available only if the auto negotiation is active for the port (Speed/Duplex
box - option Auto).
In Full-Duplex modality, the flow control is regulated according to the 802.3x normative.
In Half-Duplex modality, the flow control is regulated according to the Back Pressure technique.
To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in
the specific table (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
The MAC-based routing functionality in the Ethernet switch is available only if enabled this function.
The MAC Learning parameter points out the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Ad-
dress in the specific table (MAC Table) (see Fig.61).
To restart the auto negotiation procedure for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3,
Lan4)
3 and LAN 4, it is necessary to bring it in foreground. Fig.61 shows an example.
2. Press Restart Auto Neg. and confirm.
The push-button is available only if the auto negotiation is enabled (Speed/Duplex and/or Flow Con-
trol... box - option Auto).
To verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) (Lan1, Lan2
and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface)
Operation available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation
is active (see pag.195).
The Master/Slave Role parameter points out the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) of
the external port (see Fig.61).
Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.
Slave. The line synchronism is generated with the clock retrieved from the line (Loop Time).
To verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of
the line synchronism (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface)
Operation available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation
is active (see pag.195).
The M/S Autoneg. parameter points out the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles
of the line synchronism of the external port (see Fig.61).
Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is au-
tomatic.
Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is
forced. In this case, the role defined in the box Master/Slave Role is used.
To verify/modify the interface type of the external port (Lan3, Lan 4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 3 or LAN 4 command.
The LAN <port number> contextual area opens with the Interface Type tab active.
The Interface Type parameter points out the interface type of the external port (see Fig.62).
Electrical. The external port is configured with electrical interface.
Optical. The external port is configured with optical interface.
Fig.62 Interface Type tab (Lan3, Lan4) (LAN... contextual area)
Fig.62 notes
(1) Option:
Electrical. The external port is configured with electrical interface.
Optical. The external port is configured with optical interface.
To verify/modify the default Vid value of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
The LAN <port number> contextual area opens.
2. Bring in front of page the VLan(802.1Q) tab.
The Default Vid parameter points out the default Vid value of the port (see Fig.63).
The default Vid of a port is used as Vid in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port in subject
without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the switch.
3. To change the parameter, type a numeric value in the box (maximum 4095).
Fig.63 VLan(802.1Q) tab (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (LAN... contextual area)
Fig.63 notes
(1) Option:
Disable 802-1Q. The external port does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input.
They will be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.
Fallback. The external port uses both the following modalities:
If the Tag 802.1Q is present in the list of VLAN, the packet is sent to the other ports
enabled in the list for the same Tag.
If the Tag 802.1Q is not present in the list of VLAN or if no Tag is present, the packet
will be sent to the port listed in the Port Based VLAN area.
Secure. The external port discards the packets which have not, in their Tag, a known VLAN
identifier, that is present in the list of VLAN; furthermore it discards the packets if the port
does not belong to the VLAN itself.
(2) Option:
Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added nor removed to the
Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority infor-
mation and VLAN identifier).
Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port:
the identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.
Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged. If the packet is al-
ready tagged, a second Tag is added. If the packet is not tagged, the Tag is added. The add-
ed Tag is composed by:
The Vlan identifier set in the Default Vid box of the port from which the message en-
tered in the equipment.
The default priority of the port, which the packet is entered from, if the priority 802.1p
is disabled on this port. Otherwise by the native priority of the incoming packet if the
option 802.1p is enabled on this port.
When the Add Double Tag value is active, besides the insertion of a Tag (Provider Tag)
on the packets in output from the considered port, the Provider Tag is always removed on
the packets in input to the same port.
The Provider Tag added by the Double Tag function has an identifier (Ethernet Type) which
can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
(3) Check box:
Active ( ). The forcing is enabled.
Inactive. The forcing is disabled.
(4) For each single Ethernet port, if the set option is:
Disable, the packets, in input from the external port which the window refers to, are not en-
abled to transit through the specific internal or external port.
Enable, the packets, in input from the external port which the window refers to, are enabled
to transit through the specific internal or external port
The LAN box relevant to the external port, which the window refers to, is not displayed.
To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the exter-
nal port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
The Ingress Filtering Check parameter points out, if active, the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages
in input from the port (see Fig.63).
Disable 802-1Q. The external port does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input.
Fallback. The external port uses both the following modalities:
If the Tag 802.1Q is present in the list of VLAN, the packet is sent to the other ports en-
abled in the list for the same Tag.
If the Tag 802.1Q is not present in the list of VLAN or if no Tag is present, the packet will
be sent to the port listed in the Port Based VLAN area.
Secure. The external port discards the packets which have not, in their Tag, a known VLAN
identifier, that is present in the list of VLAN; furthermore it discards the packets if the port does
not belong to the VLAN itself.
For each configuration (selection of the option Disable 802-1Q, Fallback and Secure) the table
of Port Based VLAN must be ALWAYS configured even if the traffic management is executed only
on Tag base (see pag.200).
If you wish to obtain a bidirectional traffic routed according the Vlan table, the control of the Tag
802.1Q (Fallback or Secure) must be activated on all the ports.
To verify/modify the behaviour of the external port towards the packets in output
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
The Frame Egress Mode parameter points out the behaviour of the external port towards the packets
in output (see Fig.63).
Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority information
and VLAN identifier).
Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port: the
identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.
Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged. If the packet is already
tagged, a second Tag is added. If the packet is not tagged, the Tag is added. The added Tag is
composed by:
The Vlan identifier set in the Default Vid box of the port from which the message entered
in the equipment.
is disabled on this port. Otherwise by the native priority of the incoming packet if the op-
tion 802.1p is enabled on this port.
When the Add Double Tag value is active, besides the insertion of a Tag (Provider Tag) on
the packets in output from the considered port, the Provider Tag is always removed on the pack-
ets in input to the same port.
The Provider Tag added by the Double Tag function has an identifier (Ethernet Type) which can
be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
To force the value of Vid of the external port to the default value (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3,
Lan4)
The Force Default VID parameter points out if the forcing of the Vid value of the external port to the
default value is active (see Fig.63).
3. To change the parameter:
Activate the Force Default VID ( ) check-box to enable the forcing.
Deactivate the check-box to disable the forcing.
To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the external
port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
The enabling status of the ports through which can transit the message in input from the external port,
which the window refers to, is displayed in the Port Based VLAN area (see Fig.63).
The LAN box relevant to the external port, which the window refers to, is not displayed.
3. To change the parameters, set the option:
Disable, not to enable the packets in input from the external port, which the window refers to,
to transit through the specific internal or external port.
Enable, to enable the packets in input from the external port, which the window refers to, to
transit through the specific internal or external port.
To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the
external port to the output queue (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
2. Bring in front of page the Priority Selection tab.
The Priority parameter points out the priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the
external port, to the output (see Fig.64).
Disable, to disable the priority management.
802.1P, to analyse the value of 802.1p priority (level 2) for the choice of the output queue.
IpTOS, to analyse the value of TOS (Type Of Service) (level 3).
802.1P-IpTOS, to analyse the value of 802.1p and, if not evaluate, the value of TOS for the
choice of the output queue.
IpTOS-802.1P, to analyse the value of TOS and, if not evaluate, the value of 802.1p priority for
the choice of the output queue.
Fig.64 Priority Selection tab (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (LAN... contextual area)
Fig.64 notes
(1) Option:
Disable. The priority is disabled.
802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the output queue.
IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3).
802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value
of TOS for the choice of the output queue.
IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p pri-
ority for the choice of the output queue.
(2) Option:
0. Lowest priority
7. Highest priority.
(3) The priority 802.1p present in a packet in input to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch
with a different priority value.
The remapping of a priority is pointed out in the table by a check sign.
For example, as shown in the figure, a packet in input with priority 3 is remapped in output from
the switch with priority 5.
The table is available and meaningful only if the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p (pa-
rameter Priority set to the value 802.1P, 802.1P-IpTOS or IpTOS-802.1P) is active.
the external port which, in output, the Tag is added to (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
The Default Priority parameter points out the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input
from the external port which, in output, the Tag is added to (see Fig.64).
3. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (Lan1,
Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
Operation available and meaningful only if the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p (parameter
Priority set to the value 802.1P, 802.1P-IpTOS or IpTOS-802.1P - see Fig.64) is active.
If the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p is active, the mapping of the priority in the Tag VLan
is pointed out in the tab (see Fig.64).
3. In order to modify a value, select in the table the box (the check sign is displayed) corresponding to
the wished combination values of Tag 802.1p in input to the port - value of Tag 802.1p in output from
the Switch.
To verify the status of the external port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
2. Bring in front of page the STP/ELP tab.
In the tab are displayed the external port parameters relevant to the Spanning Tree protocol (see Fig.65).
Fig.65 STP/... tab (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3, Lan 4) (LAN... contextual area)
Fig.65 notes
(1) Parameter:
Role. Role assigned by the Spanning Tree protocol to each port of a bridge/switch. The role
defines the behaviour of the port according to the status of the bridge in the network:
Disable. Port disabled.
Root. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the bridge selected as root.
Each bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is at
steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status.
Alternate. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards
the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate
port is in port-blocking status.
Designated. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used to
propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated
port is in port-forwarding status.
Backup. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same
bridge is connected. The Backup port is in port-blocking status.
Status. Status of the port:
Version. Version of the Spanning Tree protocol:
rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol
characterized by a greater speed (lower convergence time).
stp-802-1d. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.
(2) Value:
Disable. Spanning Tree protocol disabled.
Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).
Enable-Protection1 - Enable-Protection2. Spanning Tree protocol disabled. The ethernet line
protection (see Fig.66) is enabled.
(3) Value:
0. Highest priority
15. Lowest priority
Port
status
Receive
traffic
Forward
traffic
Update the
Address Table Unit
Receive/proc-
ess BPDU
Re-transmit
BPDU
port-disable No No No No No
port-blocking No No No Yes No
port-learning Yes No Yes Yes Yes
port-forwarding Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the external port (Lan1, Lan2,
Lan3, Lan4)
The STP/ELP parameter points out the enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the selected
port (see Fig.65).
3. To change the parameter, select the value:
Disable. Spanning Tree protocol disabled
Enable-Protection1 - Enable-Protection2. Spanning Tree protocol disabled. The ethernet line
protection (see Fig.66) is enabled.
To verify/modify the priority of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (SPT/ELP)
The Priority parameter points out the priority of the external port (see Fig.65/Fig.66).
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value (0: highest priority, 15: lowest priority).
To verify/modify the connection cost of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
(STP/ELP)
The Path Cost parameter points out the cost of the network part directly connected to the external port.
(see Fig.65/Fig.66). This cost determines, priority being equal among two or more redundant connec-
tions, the preference of a port with respect to the others.
This cost must be inversely proportional to the bit rate of the port
3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.
It is suggested to set a value belonging to the Recommended Range according to what pointed out in
the Standard IEEE 802.1w.
To verify the status of the external port in relation to the ethernet line protection
In the tab are displayed the external port parameters (see Fig.66).
Fig.66 .../ELP tab (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3, Lan 4) (LAN... contextual area)
Fig.66 notes
(1) Parameter:
Role. Role assigned by the ethernet line protection to each port. The role defines the behav-
iour of the port:
Alternate. Port in stand-by status, as it offers an alternative path with higher cost as
opposed to the Designated port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.
Designated. Port active. Each Designated port is in port-forwarding status.
Version. Parameter not meaningful in this condition.
(2) Value:
Disable. Ethernet line protection disabled.
Enable-Bridge1 - Enable-Bridge2. Ethernet line protection disabled. Spanning Tree protocol
enabled (see Fig.65).
Enable-Protection1. The ethernet line protection (proprietary) is enabled between the con-
sidered external port and the other external port(s) whose parameter value is Enable-
Protection1.
Enable-Protection2. The ethernet line protection (proprietary) is enabled between the con-
sidered external port and the other external port(s) whose parameter value is Enable-
Protection2.
(3) Value:
15. Lowest priority.
To enable/disable the ethernet line protection for the external port (Lan1, Lan2,
Lan3, Lan4)
Port
status
Receive
traffic
Forward
traffic
Update the
Address Table Unit
Receive/pro-
cess BPDU
Re-transmit
BPDU
The STP/ELP parameter points out the enabling status of ethernet line protection for the selected port
(see Fig.66).
Enable-Bridge1 - Enable-Bridge2. Ethernet line protection disabled. Spanning Tree protocol en-
abled (see Fig.65).
Enable-Protection1. The ethernet line protection (proprietary) is enabled between the consid-
ered external port and the other external port(s) whose parameter value is Enable-Protection1.
Enable-Protection2. The ethernet line protection (proprietary) is enabled between the consid-
ered external port and the other external port(s) whose parameter value is Enable-Protection2.
To verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the ex-
ternal port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
2. Bring in front of page the LLF tab.
The LLF parameter points out the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality (see Fig.67).
Disable. The LLF modality is disabled.
Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms.
Only if the Local option is selected, it is possible to activate one or more of the following options:
Rem. LAN-1. The port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote LAN 1 port
associated to it.
associated to it.
associated to it.
associated to it.
Fig.67 LLF tab (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3, Lan 4) (LAN... contextual area)
Fig.67 notes
(1) Option:
Disable. The LLF modality is disabled.
Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms.
Only if the Local option is active, the activation of the check-box:
Rem. LAN-1, points out that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the re-
mote LAN 1 port associated to it.
To activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3,
Lan4)
2. Bring in front of page the Line Loop tab.
The tab displays the status of the loop on line side of the port (see Fig.68).
3. To change the parameter, select the loop.
The loop assumes the state complementary to the previous one (if activated, it becomes deactivated
and vice versa).
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the loop a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and
displaying the current setting of timeout.
The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the loop is inactive, independently from the previous setting.
Fig.68 Line Loop tab (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3, Lan 4) (LAN... contextual area)
To verify the current status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)
2. Bring in front of page the Laser Control tab.
In the Trasmitter Control area the status of the laser is pointed out (see Fig.69).
Fig.69 Laser Control tab (Lan3, Lan 4 - optical interface) (LAN... contextual area)
Fig.69 notes
(1) Wording:
Status On. The laser is on transmission.
Status Off. The laser is not on transmission.
(2) Value:
optical-100baseFX. Laser module of type 100 Base FX (Fiber).
optical-1000baseSX. Laser module of type 1000 Base SX (Short WaveLength).
optical-1000baseLX. Laser module of type 1000 Base LX (Long WaveLength).
Unknown. The laser module is not among those listed above (possible anomaly of the laser
module).
For more information relevant to laser module refer to IEEE standard 802.3.
(3) If active, the option:
On. The laser is enabled for transmission.
Off. The laser is not enabled for transmission.
Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real
presence of the optical signal.
Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when
the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not
transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x
seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if
the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present,
after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
Manual. The laser transmission is manually enabled by the operator.
(5) Auto Restart Time. Time (expressed by means of seconds) waited by the equipment controller be-
fore trying again the laser turning-on (when the transmission mode of the laser is Auto).
(6) Test Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which the equipment controller turns on the laser
during the testing operation.
To verify the type of laser module (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)
The Module Type parameter points out the type of laser module (see Fig.69).
To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)
In the Transmitter Control area the enabling status of the laser is pointed out (see Fig.69).
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are disabling the laser (selection of the Off option), a message is displayed warning that
you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of the timeout.
The laser disabling activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and switched off, the
laser is enabled to transmit independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)
In the Automatic Shutdown area the transmission mode of the laser is pointed out (see Fig.69).
Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real pres-
ence of the optical signal.
Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the
signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x sec-
onds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal
at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present, after x
seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
To modify the Auto Restart Time interval set into the relevant box a value comprised between
60 and 300 sec. (default 120 sec.). Select the Apply and confirm.
Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of laser functioning status).
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are setting Disable, Manual or Test as transmission modality for the laser, a message is
displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of the timeout.
The selection of a modality different from Auto activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the user turns off the
equipment and then turns it on again, without taking into any account the preceding setting, the trans-
mission mode of the laser is Auto.
To enable manually the laser transmission (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)
2. Bring in front of page the Laser Control tab (see Fig.69).
3. Into the Automatic Shutdown box, select the Manual option.
4. Press Apply.
A message is displayed, warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of
timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
The setting of the Manual modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
The laser transmits for 2 seconds and then stops itself.
To execute the test laser functioning status (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)
3. Set, into the Test Time box, the number of seconds during which the user wants to turn on the laser.
To modify the time interval set into the box a value comprised between 1 and 100 sec. (default 90 sec.).
4. Into the Automatic Shutdown box, select the Test option.
5. Press Apply.
timeout.
The setting of the Test modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
The laser transmits for the number of seconds set into the Test Time box and then it stops itself.
Port A
The Port A command manages the Ethernet internal port.
Status and communication parameters
To verify/modify the enabling status of the internal port (pag.211)
To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific
table for the internal port (pag.212)
Virtual Lan parameters
To verify/modify the default Vid value of the internal port (pag.212)
To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal port
(pag.214)
To verify/modify the behaviour of the internal port towards the packets in output (pag.214)
To force the value of Vid of the internal port to the default value (pag.215)
To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the internal port
(pag.215)
Priority parameters
To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the internal
port to the output queue (pag.215)
To verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the internal
port which, in output, the Tag is added to (pag.216)
To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (internal port)
(pag.217)
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) parameters
To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol (pag.217)
To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the internal port (pag.218)
To verify/modify the priority of the internal port (pag.219)
To verify/modify the connection cost of the internal port (pag.219)
For more information about the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) go to pag.225.
To verify/modify the enabling status of the internal port
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command.
The Port A contextual area opens with the Interface tab active.
The Port parameter points out the enabling status of the internal port (see Fig.70).
Disable. The internal port is not enabled to the use.
Enable. The internal port is enabled to the use.
Reading/Writing
Fig.70 Interface tab (Port A contextual area)
Fig.70 notes
(1) Option:
Disable. The internal port is not enabled to the use.
Enable. The internal port is enabled to the use.
(2) Option:
To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in
the specific table for the internal port
The MAC-based routing functionality in the Ethernet switch is available only if enabled this function.
The Port A contextual area opens with the Interface tab active.
The MAC Learning parameter points out the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Ad-
dress in the specific table (MAC Table) (see Fig.70).
To verify/modify the default Vid value of the internal port
The Port A contextual area opens.
The Default Vid parameter points out the default Vid value of the port (see Fig.71).
The default Vid of a port is used as Vid in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port in subject
without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the switch.
3. To change the parameter, type a numeric value in the box (maximum 4095).
Fig.71 VLan(802.1Q) tab (Port A contextual area)
Fig.71 notes
(1) Option:
Disable 802-1Q. The internal port does not analyse the Tag of the packets in input. They will
be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.
Fallback. The internal port uses both the following modalities:
If the Tag 802.1Q is present in the list of VLAN, the packet is sent to the other ports
enabled in the list for the same Tag.
If the Tag 802.1Q is not present in the list of VLAN or if no Tag is present, the packet
will be sent to the port listed in the Port Based VLAN area.
Secure. The internal port discards the packets which have not, in their Tag, a known VLAN
identifier, that is present in the list of VLAN; furthermore it discards the packets if the port
does not belong to the VLAN itself.
(2) Option:
Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority infor-
mation and VLAN identifier).
Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port:
the identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.
Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged. If the packet is al-
ready tagged, a second Tag is added. If the packet is not tagged, the Tag is added. The add-
ed Tag is composed by:
The Vlan identifier set in the Default Vid box of the port from which the message en-
tered in the equipment.
is disabled on this port. Otherwise by the native priority of the incoming packet if the
option 802.1p is enabled on this port.
When the Add Double Tag value is active, besides the insertion of a Tag (Provider Tag)
on the packets in output from the considered port, the Provider Tag is always removed on
the packets in input to the same port.
The Provider Tag added by the Double Tag function has an identifier (Ethernet Type) which
can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
(3) Check-box:
Active ( ). The forcing is enabled.
Inactive. The forcing is disabled.
(4) For each single Ethernet port, if the set:
Disable value, the packets, in input from the internal port, are not enabled to transit through
the specific external port.
Enable value, the packets, in input from the internal port, are enabled to transit through the
specific external port
The Port A box is not displayed.
To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal
port
The Ingress Filtering Check parameter points out, if active, the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages
in input from the port (see Fig.71).
Disable 802-1Q. The internal port does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input.
Fallback. The internal port uses both the following modalities:
If the Tag 802.1Q is present in the list of VLAN, the packet is sent to the other ports en-
abled in the list for the same Tag.
If the Tag 802.1Q is not present in the list of VLAN or if no Tag is present, the packet will
be sent to the port listed in the Port Based VLAN area.
Secure. The internal port discards the packets which have not, in their Tag, a known VLAN
identifier, that is present in the list of VLAN; furthermore it discards the packets if the port does
not belong to the VLAN itself.
For each configuration (selection of the value Disable 802-1Q, Fallback and Secure) the table of
Port Based VLAN must be ALWAYS configured even if the traffic management is executed only on
Tag base (see pag.215).
If you wish to obtain a bidirectional traffic routed according the Vlan table, the control of the Tag
802.1Q (Fallback or Secure) must be activated on all the ports.
To verify/modify the behaviour of the internal port towards the packets in output
The Frame Egress Mode parameter points out the behaviour of the internal port towards the packets in
output (see Fig.71).
Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority information
and VLAN identifier).
Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port: the
identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.
Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged. If the packet is already
tagged, a second Tag is added. If the packet is not tagged, the Tag is added. The added Tag is
composed by:
The Vlan identifier set in the Default Vid box of the port from which the message entered
in the equipment.
is disabled on this port. Otherwise by the native priority of the incoming packet if the op-
tion 802.1p is enabled on this port.
When the Add Double Tag value is active, besides the insertion of a Tag (Provider Tag) on
the packets in output from the considered port, the Provider Tag is always removed on the pack-
ets in input to the same port.
The Provider Tag added by the Double Tag function has an identifier (Ethernet Type) which can
be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
To force the value of Vid of the internal port to the default value
The Force Default VID parameter points out if the forcing of the Vid value of the internal port to the
default value is active (see Fig.71).
3. To change the parameter:
Activate the Force Default VID ( ) check-box to enable the forcing.
Deactivate the check-box to disable the forcing.
To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the internal
port
The enabling status of the ports, through which can transit the messages in input from the internal port,
is pointed out in the Port Based VLAN area (see Fig.71).
The Port A box is not displayed.
3. To change the parameters, set the value:
Disable, not to enable the packets in input from the internal port to transit through the specific
external port.
Enable, to enable the packets in input from the internal port to transit through the specific ex-
ternal port.
To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the
internal port to the output queue
The Priority parameter points out the priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the
internal port, to the output (see Fig.71).
Disable, to disable the priority management.
802.1P, to analyse the value of 802.1p priority (level 2) for the choice of the output queue.
IpTOS, to analyse the value of TOS (Type Of Service) (level 3).
802.1P-IpTOS, to analyse the value of 802.1p and, if not evaluate, the value of TOS for the
choice of the output queue.
IpTOS-802.1P, to analyse the value of TOS and, if not evaluate, the value of 802.1p priority for
the choice of the output queue.
Fig.72 Priority Selection tab (Port A contextual area)
Fig.72 notes
(1) Option:
Disable. The priority is disabled.
802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the output
queue.
IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3).
802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value
of TOS for the choice of the output queue.
IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p pri-
ority for the choice of the output queue.
(2) Option:
0. Lowest priority
(3) The priority 802.1p present in a packet in input to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch
with a different priority value.
The remapping of a priority is pointed out in the table by a check sign.
For example, as shown in the figure, a packet in input with priority 3 is remapped in output from
the switch with priority 5.
The table is available and meaningful only if the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p (pa-
rameter Priority set to the value 802.1P, 802.1P-IpTOS or IpTOS-802.1P) is active.
the internal port which, in output, the Tag is added to
The Default Priority parameter points out the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input
from the internal port which, in output, the Tag is added to (see Fig.72).
3. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (internal
port)
Operation available and meaningful only if the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p (parameter
Priority set to the value 802.1P, 802.1P-IpTOS or IpTOS-802.1P - see Fig.72) is active.
If the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p is active, the mapping of the priority in the Tag VLan
is pointed out in the tab (see Fig.72).
3. In order to modify a value, select in the table the box (the check sign is displayed) corresponding to
the wished combination values of Tag 802.1p in input to the port - value of Tag 802.1p in output from
the Switch.
To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
2. Bring in front of page the STP tab.
In the tab are pointed out the parameters of the internal port relevant to the Spanning Tree protocol
(see Fig.73).
Fig.73 STP tab (Port A contextual area)
Fig.73 notes
(1) Parameter:
(2) Value:
Disable. STP protocol disabled
Enable-Bridge1. STP protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1)
Enable-Bridge2. STP protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2)
(3) Value:
15. Lowest priority.
To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the internal port
The STP parameter points out the enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the selected port
(see Fig.73).
Disable. Protocol disabled
Enable-Bridge1. Protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1)
Enable-Bridge2. Protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2)
Port
status
Receive
traffic
Forward
traffic
Update the
Address Table Unit
Receive/pro-
cess BPDU
Re-transmit
BPDU
To verify/modify the priority of the internal port (STP)
The Priority parameter points out the priority of the internal port (see Fig.73).
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value (0: highest priority, 15: lowest priority).
To verify/modify the connection cost of the internal port (STP)
The Path Cost parameter points out the cost of the network part directly connected to the internal port
(see Fig.73). This cost determines, priority being equal among two or more redundant connections, the
preference of a port with respect to the others.
This cost must be inversely proportional to the bit rate of the port
3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.
It is suggested to set a value belonging to the Recommended Range according to what pointed out in
the Standard IEEE 802.1w.
Spanning Tree
The change of the default values of the configuration (Hello Time, Forward Delay, Max Age) of the Span-
ning Tree protocol could damage the correct operation of the Spanning Tree protocol itself.
The Spanning Tree command manages the spanning tree in the network
:
To verify/modify the version of the Spanning Tree protocol (pag.220)
To verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets (Hello Time) (pag.221)
To verify/modify the Forward Delay interval (pag.221)
To verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets (Max Age) (pag.222)
To verify the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol (pag.222)
To verify the MAC Address of a bridge (pag.223)
To verify/modify the priority of a bridge (pag.224)
Moreover, if for one or more external ports (LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4) the Spanning Tree protocol is
not active, but the Ethernet line protection is active, by means of the Spanning Tree command it is pos-
sible:
To verify the status of the external ports in relation to the ethernet line protection (pag.224)
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) go to pag.225.
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) go to pag.225.
To verify/modify the version of the Spanning Tree protocol
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Spanning Tree command.
The Spanning Tree contextual area opens with the Settings tab active.
The Force Version parameter points out the version of the Spanning Tree protocol to use (see Fig.74).
rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol characterized
by a greater speed (lower convergence time).
Reading/Writing
Fig.74 Setting tab (Spanning Tree contextual area)
Fig.74 notes
(1) Value:
rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol character-
ized by a greater speed (lower convergence time).
To verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets
The Hello Time parameter points out the time interval that passes between two consecutive transmis-
sions of the BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) packet from the Ethernet ports with the Spanning Tree
function enabled (see Fig.74).
2. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value. Default: 2sec.
To verify/modify the Forward Delay interval
The Forward Delay parameter points out the time interval which passes between the passage between
the port-blocking status and the port-learning status and between the port-learning status and the
port-forwarding status of the port (see Fig.74).
2. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value. Default: 15 sec.
To verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets
The Max Age parameter points out the maximum number of switches which the packet can pass
through before expiring. The passage from a switch to another one involves the decrease of 1 second
per equipment (see Fig.74).
2. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value. Default: 20 sec.
To verify the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
The Spanning Tree contextual area opens.
2. Bring in front of page the Summary tab.
In the Summary area for each Ethernet port, are pointed out the parameters relevant to the Spanning
Tree protocol (see Fig.75).
Fig.75 Summary tab (STP) (Spanning Tree contextual area)
Fig.75 notes
(1) Parameter:
LAN.../Port 1. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol of the specific port:
Disable. Protocol disabled.
Bridge 1. Protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).
Bridge 2. Protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).
To verify the MAC Address of a bridge
2. Select the wished Bridge tab: Bridge 1, Bridge 2.
The MAC Address parameter points out the physical address of the specific bridge.
Fig.76 shown an example.
Fig.76 Bridge... tab (Spanning Tree contextual area)
Fig.76 notes
(1) Value:
0. Maximum priority.
15. Minimum priority.
Port
status
Receive
traffic
Forward
traffic
Update the
Address Table Unit
Receive/pro-
cess BPDU
Re-transmit
BPDU
To verify/modify the priority of a bridge
2. Select the wished Bridge tab: Bridge 1, Bridge 2.
The Priority parameter points out the priority of the bridge to use in the auto negotiation of the root:
0 (maximum priority), 15 (minimum priority). If two bridges have the same priority, the bridge with
lower MAC Address is chosen as root.
Fig.76 shown an example.
3. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value.
To verify the status of the external ports in relation to the ethernet line protection
2. Bring in front of page the Summary tab.
In the Summary area for each external port, is pointed out the status (see Fig.77).
Fig.77 Summary tab (ELP) (Spanning Tree contextual area)
Fig.77 notes
(1) Parameter:
LAN.... Enabling status of the ethernet line protection of the specific port:
Prot1. Ethernet line protection enabled (Protection1).
Prot2. Ethernet line protection enabled (Protection2).
Role. Role assigned by the ethernet line protection to each port. The role defines the behav-
iour of the port:
Designated. Port active. Each Designated port is in port-forwarding status.
Version. Parameter not meaningful in this condition.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (more info)
Spanning Tree is a protocol for the management of the connections, which supports the redundancy of the
path avoiding the creation of unwished loops in the network. In order that an Ethernet network operates
correctly, only an active path must exist between two stations. Multiple active paths cause loops in the
network and, as consequence, the possible replication of the messages to infinity.
The Spanning Tree protocol constitutes a tree logic network which pass through all the bridges into a com-
plex physical network forcing the possible duplicated paths (possible loops) into a stand-by status
(Blocked).
If a network segment becomes unreachable or if the cost of a path changes, the algorithm of Spanning
Tree reconfigures the topology of the network activating an alternative path.
For more information, refer to the standard IEEE:
802.1d (Spanning Tree Protocol).
802.1w (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol).
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (more info)
The Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) is a function which allows implementing a protection at physical level
(Level 2) between two or more LAN external ports.
When the user enables the ethernet line protection, even the management of the ELP switch is enabled.
The switch operates in automatic mode: the equipment executes the switch when the LOS alarm is present
on the LAN port in service. When the alarm clears, the controller does not execute the switch again.
The ethernet line protection is implemented by means of proprietary protocol. As consequence, the ELP
switch is managed without considering alarms or settings executed on the equipment on the other side of
the LAN connection.
The parameters, which determine which LAN port among those in protection must be set as operating, are
the port parameters foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol:
1. Priority
A priority value between 1 and 9 can be assigned to every port.
When the ELP function is enabled for two or more external ports, the port currently active for the trans-
port will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest priority value.
Example. For the ports LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3 the ELP function is enabled. The port LAN 1 is enabled,
has a valid signal and priority 1, the port LAN 2 is enabled, has a valid signal and priority 2, the port
LAN 3 is enabled, has a valid signal and priority 3. The port LAN 1 is used for the transport.
2. Cost
A connection cost can be assigned to every port.
When the ELP function is enabled for two or more external ports and the ports have the same priority,
the port currently active for the transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest cost.
Example. For the ports LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3 the ELP function is enabled. The ports are all enabled,
have a valid signal and priority 1. The port LAN 1 has cost 200.000, the port LAN 2 has cost 250.000,
the port LAN 3 has cost 300.000. The port LAN 1 is used for the transport.
Port
status
Receive
traffic
Forward
traffic
Update the
Address Table Unit
Receive/pro-
cess BPDU
Re-transmit
BPDU
3. Logic position
Every port is assigned a logic position (1 4).
When the ELP function is enabled for two or more external ports and the ports have the same priority
and the same cost, the port currently active for the transport will be the enabled port with valid signal
and lowest logic position.
Example. For the ports LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3 the ELP function is enabled. The ports are all enabled,
have a valid signal, priority 1 and cost 200.000. The port LAN 1 is used for the transport.
The values of Role and Port Status foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol have
been used to represent in WEB LCT the status of the ports involved in the ELP switch:
The user can manage the criteria for the choice of the operating/reserve port executing the following op-
erations:
To enable/disable the use of the LAN ports (parameter Rate Control - Fig.61)
To enable/disable the ethernet line protection on the ports you wish to protect (parameter STP/
ELP - Fig.66).
It is possible to protect two, three or four ports or protect the ports in pairs.
In detail, in the first case the ELP function (Enable-Protection1) will be enabled for the two, three
or four LAN ports. In the second case, the ELP function (Enable-Protection1) will be enabled for
two ports and the ELP 2 function (Enable-Protection2) will be enabled for the other two ports.
To set the port priority (parameter Priority - Fig.66)
To set the port cost (parameter Path Cost - Fig.66)
LAN port Rule Port status
Operating Designated Forwarding
Reserve Alternate Blocking
TDM Tributaries
At the choice of TDM Tributaries option, the program displays the following commands:
E1 (pag.228). It manages the 2Mbit/s tributaries.
STM-1 (pag.231). It manages the 2STM-1 tributary.
VC-4 (pag.240). It manages the VC4 virtual container.
VC-12 (pag.245). It manages VC12 virtual container.
The STM-1, VC-4 and VC-12 commands are available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard
Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1
stream is active (see Fig.43).
E1
The E1 command manages the 2Mbit/s tributary.
To verify the 2Mbit/s tributary status (pag.228)
To verify/modify the label of a tributary (pag.229)
To activate/deactivate the 2Mbit/s tributaries use (pag.229)
To activate/deactivate the 2Mbit/s tributary loops (pag.230)
To verify the 2Mbit/s tributary status
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1 command.
The E1 contextual area opens, where the status of the tributaries, of the loops and of the alarms is
pointed out (see Fig.78).
Fig.78 E1 contextual area
Fig.78 notes
(1) Symbol:
. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this condition, the alarms are inhib-
ited and the LOS alarm is raised or not depending on the setting of the LOS Inv box (see
next note).
. The tributary is active (tributary used). In this condition, the controller does not inhibit
the alarms.
If the symbol relevant to tributary A and/or B is not available (grey symbol), this means that
the tributary is not available for the traffic as already used as synchronism in input and/or output
(see pag.167).
Reading/Writing
Monitor, Read Only
(2) If the box is:
The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is not raised if, with tributary disabled, the
2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/
s signal is however connected.
To verify the status of the LOS Inv box, it is sufficient to move the cursor of the mouse on the box
which points out the summary alarm status. A dynamic window is displayed containing the LOS Inv
box (the figure shows an example).
The status of the LOS Inv box IS MEANINGFUL ONLY if the tributary is not used.
(3) The colour of box points out the status of the alarm:
White. The alarm is not active.
To verify the alarm detail, it is sufficient to move the cursor of the mouse on the box. A dynamic
window is displayed, where the status of each single alarm is displayed (the figure displays an ex-
ample).
(4) Symbol:
. The line loop is active.
. The internal loop is active.
. The loop is not active.
(5) In detail, use the keys to scroll the tabs and the key to display the list of the tabs
The number of available tributaries changes according to the equipment type.
To verify/modify the label of a tributary
The E1 contextual area opens, where the label of each single tributary is pointed out (see Fig.78).
2. To modify the label of a tributary, select the label itself.
A dynamic window is displayed.
3. Type an alphanumeric string of maximum 40 characters.
4. Press Ok.
To activate/deactivate the 2Mbit/s tributaries use
Operation not available for the tributaries A and/or B if already used for the T12 synchronism in output
(see pag.167).
The E1 contextual area opens (see Fig.78).
2. Select the tributary to be enabled (or disabled).
The tributary assumes the state complementary to the previous one (if enabled, it becomes disabled
and vice versa).
If the tributary is enabled and you wish to disabled it, at the selection tributary the message Do you
want LOS inversion enable? is displayed. Pressing:
Ok, the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.
No, the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.
When the tributary is disabled the management status of LOS alarm can be modified in the following
way.
Move the cursor of the mouse over the box which points out the summary alarm status of the tributary
for which you wish to verify or modify the management of LOS alarm.
A dynamic window is displayed containing the LOS Inv box. If the box is:
the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.
the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
Select the box to enable or disable the alarm management. Each time is selected, the box assumes the
status complementary to the previous one (if enabled, it changes to disabled and vice versa).
To activate/deactivate the 2Mbit/s tributary loops
The E1 contextual area opens (see Fig.78).
2. Select the loop to be activated (or deactivated).
The loop assumes the state complementary to the previous one (if activated, it becomes deactivated
and vice versa).
The activation of the loop on internal side automatically enables the tributary, if this is already en-
abled.
3. Press Apply.
If at least one loop is going to be activated, a message is displayed that warns that you are executing
a forcing and the current setting of the timeout.
The activation of, at least, one loop causes the activation of the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is
switched off and, then, switched on, independently from the previous setting, the loops are deactivat-
ed.
If the Operation fail! ...Wrong user profile! is displayed, verify that the user profile in use can enable
the tributary.
STM-1
This menu is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard
Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.43).
At the choice of STM-1 option, the program displays the following commands:
Lim A STM-1 [x] (pag.232). It manages the configuration of the specific STM-1 stream.
The x value points out the STM-1 stream which the command is referred to (1, 2).
Lim A STM-1 [x]
This command is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or Idu-
Board Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.43).
The command relevant to the STM-1 2 stream (Lim A STM-1 [2]) is available only if the protection of STM-
1 stream (MSP mode) is active.
The Lim A STM-1 [x] command manages the configuration of the specific STM-1 stream.
To verify/modify the status of the STM-1 stream (pag.232)
To verify/modify the status of the STM-1 loops (line side and inner side) (pag.234)
To verify/modify the control status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte (pag.234)
To verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace Identifier
(pag.234)
To verify the status of the STM-1 alarms (pag.235)
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm (pag.235)
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm (pag.236)

The following operations are available only for equipment with STM-1 stream with optical interface.
To verify the current status of the laser (pag.236)
To verify the type of laser module (pag.237)
To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser (pag.237)
To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser (pag.238)
To enable manually the laser transmission (pag.238)
To execute the test laser functioning status (pag.239)
The x value points out the STM-1 stream which the command is referred to (1, 2).
To verify/modify the status of the STM-1 stream
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x] com-
mand.
The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens with the Settings tab active.
In the Loop And Alarms area the status of the STM-1 stream is pointed out (see Fig.79).
2. To change the status of the STM-1 stream, select the symbol that represents the stream.
The symbol assumes the status complementary to the previous one (if active, it switches to inactive
and vice versa).
Reading/Writing
Monitor, Read Only
Fig.79 Settings tab (Lim A STM-1... contextual area)
Fig.79 notes
(1) Symbol:
. The STM-1 loop on line side is active.
. The STM-1 loop on inner side is active.
. The loop is inactive.
(2) Symbol:
. The STM-1 stream is not active (unused stream). In this condition, the alarms are in-
hibited and the LOS alarm is raised, with disabled stream the STM-1 signal is however con-
nected.
. The STM-1 stream is active (used stream). In this condition, the controller does not
inhibit the alarms.
(3) The colour of each box points out the status of the alarm:
Disable. The control of the J0 byte is disabled.
1 byte ctrl. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 1 byte. The
inconsistency between the waited byte and the received one creates an alarm signal (J0
Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
16 bytes ctrl. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte.
The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm
signal (J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
(5) Box:
Sent Trace. Transmitted sequence of the control characters.
Expected Trace. Character sequence to be controlled at reception.
Received Trace. Character sequence in reception.
To verify/modify the status of the STM-1 loops (line side and inner side)
mand.
In the Loop And Alarms area the status of the STM-1 loops on line side and inner side is pointed out
(see Fig.79).
2. To change the parameter, select the loop.
The loop assumes the status complementary to the previous one (if active, it switches to inactive and
vice versa).
The STM-1 loops on line side and on inner side cannot be activated at the same time.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating a loop a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and
displaying the current setting of timeout.
The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the loop is inactive, independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the control status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte
mand.
Into the Trace Type area the enabling status of the J0 byte used for the control of STM-1 signal is point-
ed out (see Fig.79).
1 byte ctrl. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 1 byte. The
inconsistency between the waited byte and the received one creates an alarm signal (J0 Trace
Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
16 bytes ctrl. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte. The
inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm signal
(J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
mand.
Into the J0 Trace Identifier area the sequences of the characters at transmission and/or at reception
relevant to J0 byte used for the control of STM-1 signal is pointed out (see Fig.79).
2. To change the parameter, type a new string of ASCII characters into the box:
Sent Trace, to change the transmitted sequence of the control characters.
Expected Trace, to change the sequence of the characters to be controlled at reception.
The number of characters that has to constitute the sequence depends on the selected option push-
button into the Trace Type area (1 or 16 bytes).
To verify the status of the STM-1 alarms
mand.
In the Loop And Alarms area, the status of the STM-1 stream alarms is displayed (see Fig.79).
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm
mand.
The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens.
2. Bring in front of page the Thresholds tab.
The B2 Signal Degrade Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the B2 Signal De-
grade alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B2 of the STM-1 signal (see Fig.80).
E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.
4. Press Apply and then confirm.
Fig.80 Thresholds tab (Lim A STM-1... contextual area)
Fig.80 notes
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm
mand.
2. Bring in front of page the Thresholds tab.
The B2 Excessive BER Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the B2 Excessive
BER alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B2 of the STM-1 signal (see Fig.80).
To verify the current status of the laser
Operation available only for equipment with STM-1 stream with optical interface.
mand.
In the Laser Control area the status of the laser is pointed out (see Fig.81).
Fig.81 Laser Control tab (Lim A STM-1... contextual area)
Fig.81 notes
(1) Wording:
Status On. The laser is on transmission.
Status Off. The laser is not on transmission.
(2) Value:
optical-S11. S type laser module (application: Inter office-Short-haul), 1 (STM level: Stm-
1), 1 (fibber type: according to G.652 Spec.).
optical-L11. L type laser module (application: Inter office-Long-haul), 1 (STM level: Stm-1),
1 (fibber type: according to G.652 Spec.).
optical-L12. L type laser module (application: Inter office-Long-haul), 1 (STM level: Stm-1),
2 (fibber type: according to G.652, G.654 Specifications).
optical-I1. I type laser module (application: Intra office), 1 (STM level: Stm-1).
Unknown. The laser module is not one of the above listed modules (possible anomaly of the
laser module).
Classification of the optical interface according to G.957 Specification.
Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real
presence of the optical signal.
Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when
the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not
transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x
seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if
the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present,
after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
If the management of STM-1 stream in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality is active (see Fig.43), the
Automatic Shutdown function is permanently disabled. This means that, in the Automatic Shutdown
area, the value Disable (option not modifiable) is automatically set and the other items of the area
are not available.
(5) Auto Restart Time. Time (expressed by means of seconds) waited by the equipment controller be-
fore trying again the laser turning-on (when the transmission mode of the laser is Auto).
(6) Test Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which the equipment controller turns on the laser
during the testing operation.
To verify the type of laser module
mand.
The Module Type parameter points out the type of laser module (see Fig.81).
To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser
mand.
In the Laser Control area the enabling status of the laser is pointed out (see Fig.81).
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are disabling the laser (selection of the Off option), a message is displayed warning that
you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of the timeout.
The laser disabling activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and switched off, the
laser is enabled to transmit independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser
mand.
In the Automatic Shutdown area the transmission mode of the laser is displayed (see Fig.81).
If the management of STM-1 stream is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality (see Fig.43), the Auto-
matic Shutdown function is permanently disabled. This means that the laser transmission modality is
forced to Disable.
In this case, the change operation here below is not available.
Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real pres-
ence of the optical signal.
Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the
signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x sec-
onds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal
at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present, after x
seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
To modify the Auto Restart Time interval set into the relevant box a value comprised between
60 and 300 sec. (default 120 sec.). Press Apply and confirm.
Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of laser functioning status).
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are setting Disable, Manual or Test as transmission modality for the laser, a message is
displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of the timeout.
The selection of a modality different from Auto activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the user turns off the
equipment and then turns it on again, without taking into any account the preceding setting, the trans-
mission mode of the laser is Auto.
To enable manually the laser transmission
If the management of STM-1 stream is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality (see Fig.43), the Automatic
Shutdown function is permanently disabled. This means that the laser transmission modality is forced to
Disable. In this case, this operation is not available.
mand.
3. Into the Automatic Shutdown area, select the Manual option.
4. Press Apply.
timeout.
The setting of the Manual modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
The laser transmits for 2 seconds and then stops itself.
To execute the test laser functioning status
If the management of STM-1 stream is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality (see Fig.43), the Automatic
Shutdown function is permanently disabled (laser transmission modality is forced to Disable). In this case,
this operation is not available.
mand.
3. Set, into the Test Time box, the number of seconds during which the user wants to turn on the laser.
To modify the time interval set into the box a value comprised between 1 and 100 sec. (default 90 sec.).
4. Into the Automatic Shutdown area, select the Test option.
5. Press Apply.
timeout.
The setting of the Test modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
The laser transmits for the number of seconds set into the Test Time box and then it stops itself.
VC-4
At the choice of VC-4 option, the program displays the following commands:
Lim A VC-4 (pag.241). It manages the VC4 virtual container configuration.
Lim A VC-4
The Lim A VC-4 command manages the VC4 virtual container configuration.
To verify/modify the control status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte (pag.241)
(pag.242)
To verify the status of the VC-4 alarms (pag.242)
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm (pag.242)
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm (pag.243)
To verify/modify the Signal Label value (pag.244)
To verify/modify the control status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 command.
The Lim A VC-4 contextual area opens with the j1/Alarms tab active.
The Trace Type parameter points out the enabling status of the overhead J1 byte used for the control
of the received signal (see Fig.82).
16 bytes ctrl. The control of the J1 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte. The
inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm signal
(J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
Fig.82 J1/Alarms tab (Lim A VC-4 contextual area)
Reading/Writing
Fig.82 notes
16 bytes ctrl. The control of the J1 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte.
The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm
signal (J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
(2) Box:
Received Path Trace. Character sequence in reception.
(3) The colour of each box points out the status of the alarm:
The Lim A VC-4 contextual area opens with the J1/Alarms tab active.
In the tab the sequence of characters in transmission and/or reception relevant to the byte J1, used
for the control of the received signal, is pointed out (see Fig.82).
To verify the status of the VC-4 alarms
The Lim A VC-4 contextual area opens with the J1/Alarms tab active.
In the Alarms area the status of the VC-4 alarms is pointed out (see Fig.82).
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm
The Lim A VC-4 contextual area opens.
2. Bring in front of page the B3/Signal Label tab.
The B3 Signal Degrade Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the B3 Signal De-
grade alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B3 of the received signal (see Fig.83).
Fig.83 B3/Signal Label tab (Lim A VC-4 contextual area)
Fig.83 notes
(3) Box:
Sent Label. Specification which the transmitted value of Signal Label refers to.
Expected Label. Specification which the received value of Signal Label refers to.
Received Signal Label. Specification which the received signal refers to.
The specifications, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path UnEquipped, Tug Structure.
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm
The B3 Excessive BER Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the B3 Excessive
BER alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B3 of the received signal (see Fig.83).
To verify/modify the Signal Label value
In the Signal Label area, the setting of the value of Signal Label (byte C2) used for the control of the
received signal is displayed (see Fig.83).
The mismatch between expected value and received value generates an alarm (VC4 Signal Label Mis-
match Alarm).
3. To modify the parameter, set in the box:
Sent Label. The specification which the value of the transmitted C2 byte refers to.
Expected Label. The specification which the value of the expected C2 byte refers to.
The specifications, which can be set in the Sent Label and Expected Label boxes according to G.707
ITU-T Rec. are: Path UnEquipped, Tug Structure.
VC-12
At the choice of VC-12 option, the program displays the following commands:
VC-12 Thresholds (pag.246). It manages the intervention threshold of some VC12 alarms.
Lim A VC-12 (pag.248). It manages the configuration parameters of each VC-12 channel.
VC-12 Thresholds
The VC-12 Thresholds command manages the intervention threshold of some VC12 alarms.
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the VC12 Signal Degrade alarm (pag.246)
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the VC12 Excessive BER alarm (pag.247)
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the VC12 Signal Degrade alarm
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > VC-12 Thresholds com-
mand.
The VC-12 Thresholds contextual area opens.
The Signal Degrade Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the VC12 Signal De-
grade alarm (see Fig.84).
Fig.84 VC-12 Thresholds contextual area
Fig.84 notes
Reading/Writing
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the VC12 Excessive BER alarm
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > VC-12 Thresholds com-
mand.
The VC-12 Thresholds contextual area opens.
The Excessive BER Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the VC12 Excessive
BER alarm (see Fig.84).
Lim A VC-12
The Lim A VC-12 command manages the configuration parameter of each VC-12 channel.
To verify/modify the control status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte of a VC-12 (pag.248)
of a VC-12 (pag.249)
To verify/modify the Signal Label value of a VC-12 (pag.249)
To verify the alarms status of a VC-12 (pag.250)
To verify/modify the control status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte of a VC-12
The Lim A VC-12 Thresholds contextual area opens with the TUG-3 1 tab active (see Fig.85).
2. Select the wished VC-12 channel.
If the VC-12 channel is in TUG-3 2 or TUG-3 3, in order to select it, first it is necessary to select the
tab TUG-3 2 or TUG-3 3 and then the VC-12.
The Lim A STM-1 VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window opens.
The enabling status of the byte J2 used for the control of the received signal is pointed out in the J2
Trace Identifier area. If the active option is:
Disable. The control of the byte C2 is disabled.
Enable. The control of the byte C2 is enabled.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
Fig.85 TUG-3 x tab (Lim A VC-12 contextual area)
Reading/Writing
Fig.85 notes
(1) Each VC-12 channel is represented by a box and by the number of the channel reported into the
box.
The position of the box identifies the TUG-3 and the TUG-2 which the VC-12 belongs to.
The total status of the channel is displayed by the color of the box:
Grey. No alarm is active.
Red, orange, yellow or light blue. At least one alarm of channel is active and it has severity,
respectively, Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
If there are more alarms with different severity, the color of the box will point out the most
serious alarm present in the VC-12 channel.
of a VC-12
In the J2 Trace Identifier area, the sequence of characters in transmission and/or reception relevant to
the byte J2 used for the control of the received signal. In detail, the box:
Received Path Trace. Character sequence in reception.
To verify/modify the Signal Label value of a VC-12
In the Signal Label area, the setting of the value of Signal Label (byte C2) used for the control of the
received signal is displayed. In detail, the box:
Sent Label. Specification which the value of the transmitted byte C2 refers to.
Expected Label. Specification which the value of the expected byte C2 refers to.
The mismatch between expected value and received value generates an alarm (VC12 Signal Label Mis-
match Alarm).
3. To change the parameter, set in the Sent Label and Expected Label box the new specification.
The specifications which can be set in the Sent Label and Expected Label boxes, according to G.707
ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, Asynchronous.
To verify the alarms status of a VC-12
In the Alarms area, for each alarm of the Vc12 channel, there is a box containing the alarm name. The
color of the box indicates the alarm status:
Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has severity, respectively, Critical, Ma-
jor, Minor or Warning.
Cross Connection
Board Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion.
The Cross Connection command it manages the cross-connection matrix.
To display the connections of the equipment in graphic format (pag.251)
To display the connections of the equipment in table format (pag.257)
To execute a Tributary-Radio connection (pag.258)
To execute a Tributary-Tributary connection (pag.258)
To delete one or more connections (pag.259)
To enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop) (pag.259)
To disable an Auto-Loop (pag.260)
To verify/modify the connection label (pag.260)
To execute an E1 NBUS <-> E1 connection (AlPlus/3 Element/Protected) (pag.261)
For more information about the cross connection matrix go to pag.261.
To display the connections of the equipment in graphic format
It is possible to display only one connection at a time.
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Cross Connection command.
The Cross connection contextual area opens with the Matrix tab active (see Fig.86).
2. Press Configuration.
The Cross Connection Manager window opens where the existing connections are displayed.
3. To display a connection, point with the mouse or select a channel used for the connection you wish to
verify.
If are highlighted:
A tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) and an E1 radio connected by a blue
line, the connection is of type Tributary-Radio.
Two different tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) connected by a blue line,
the connection is of type Tributary-Tributary.
The same tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS/E1 radio) with a blue line
linking the channel itself, the connection is of Auto-Loop type.
Reading/Writing
Fig.86 Matrix tab (Cross Connection contextual area)
Fig.87 Cross Connection Manager window
Fig.87 notes
(1) This area displays the (tributary and radio) channels provided on the equipment and grouped by
membership streams.
Every channel is represented by a box.
For the E1 channels, the channel number is pointed out in the box.
For the VC-12 channels (Expansion STM-1) the TU12 number is pointed out in the box while the
position of the box identifies the TUG3 and the TUG2 of membership of VC-12.
The status of use of the channel is represented by the colour of the box (see note 3). The currently
selected channel is represented by the yellow box.
The streams displayed in this area change according to the settings made by the user in the View
area (see note 2).
When an used channel is selected, the connection is displayed represented by a blue line with a
yellow rectangle next where the connection name is reported.
A connection is named on its creation by means of a default name composed by the names of the
channels composing the connection separated by /. The default name can be modified by the user.
(2) The parameters present in the View area determine the streams displayed in the channels area.
If the selected option is:
Tributary-Radio. The channels area contains:
The radio stream subdivided in the group of high priority E1 channels (Radio Perma-
nent E1 (<radio branch label>) and the group of low priority E1 channels (Radio Extra
E1 (<radio branch label>).
The order used to display the Extra E1 Radio channels depends on the priority defined
by the user (seeFig.47).
Only one stream among the available ones.
The right part of the View area displays the parameter Tributary which is used to modify the
tributary stream present in the channels area.
Selecting the arrow of the Tributary box, the list of the available streams is displayed.
Selecting a value, the central part of the channels area changes displaying the detail of the
channel for the selected tributary.
Tributary-Tributary. The channels area contains two different tributary streams.
The top part displays the tributary stream pointed out in the box 1st Trib. The bottom part
displays the tributary stream pointed out in the box 2nd Trib.
In order to display a different tributary, select the arrow of the box 1st Trib or 2nd Trib and
select a value from the list. The list contains all the available tributaries with the exception
of the tributary set in the other box Trib.
The boxes 1st Trib and 2nd Trib are displayed in the right part of the View area instead of
the parameter Tributary when the Tributary-Tributary option is selected.
In the boxes Tributary, 1st Trib and 2nd Trib the following values can be present:
Expansion 16xE1. E1 channels of the expansion (equipment IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1
16E1).
Expansion 32xE1. E1 channels of the expansion (equipment IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1).
Expansion STM-1. VC-12 channels of STM-1 streams.
NBUS.... E1 channels of Nodal Bus.
The available NBUS values change according to the equipment nodal configuration.The detail
is pointed out in Tab.6.
The availability of the above mentioned values depends on the type of equipment and on the
equipped tributary streams. The detail is pointed out in Tab.5.
If the user moves the mouse pointer over a channel used for a connection and at least one of the
(radio/tributary) streams involved by the connection is not displayed in the cross-connection win-
dow, the View area dynamically displays the connections existing between the channels and the
type of connection. Here below an example is reported.
(3) The key points out the colours that determines the status of the channels:
Dark green (Auto loop req.). The channel has been selected for an Auto-Loop. The apply
command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been transmitted to the equipment yet
(Auto-Loop requested).
Light blue (Auto loop). The channel is used for an Auto-Loop executed on the equipment (real
Auto-Loop).
Light green (Unlinked). The channel is not used.
Purple (Link requested). The channel has been selected for a Tributary-Tributary or Tribu-
tary-Radio connection. The apply command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been
transmitted to the equipment yet (connection requested).
Light blue (Linked). The channel is used for a Tributary-Tributary or Tributary-Radio connec-
tion executed on the equipment (real connection).
Grey (Linked to Trib. A/B). The channel is used for the pre-configured connection with the
Tributary A (box A) or tributary B (box B).
The pre-configured connections cannot be modified or deleted.
(4) Push-button:
Refresh. It forces the reading of the data from the equipment.
If you have made at least one modification, to the choice of the push-button a confirmation
message is displayed. Pressing:
Ok. The data present in the window are updated and all the changes made to the con-
nections and not confirmed yet (selection of Apply push-button) are lost.
No. The data present in the window are not updated.
Apply. It makes the changes operating.
When it is selected, a confirmation message is displayed. Pressing:
Ok. All the changes made on the cross-connection matrix are communicated to the
controller.
No. The operation is not executed.
Help. It opens the help on-line.
(5) This area is available and meaningful only if the equipment ALCplus2 IDU with expansion IduBoard
Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 belongs to a three-elements protected nodal configuration composed by
AL IDU plus equipment (parameter Nodal Configuration: AlPlus, Nodal Type: 3 Element, Nodal Pro-
tection: Protected - see Fig.43).
In this condition, the user can select, in the Preferential Nodal Link area, to which element of the
node transmit in preferential mode the E1 channel (protected NBUS) cross-connected with another
channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS protected/E1 radio).
The key shows the colours determining the status of only the channels involved in this type of con-
nections:
Dark orange (Link to IDU ... req). The channel has been selected for a connection composed
by a protected NBUS channel and another channel. The connection will be sent in preferential
mode to the IDU of the first nodal element. The apply command (selection of Apply push-
button) has not been sent yet to the equipment (requested connection).
Light orange (Link to IDU ...). The channel is used for a connection, composed by a protected
NBUS channel and another channel, applied on the equipment (real connection). The con-
nection is sent in preferential mode to the IDU of the first nodal element.
Bright yellow (Link to IDU ... req). The channel has been selected for a connection composed
by a protected NBUS channel and another channel. The connection will be sent in preferential
mode to the IDU of the second nodal element. The apply command (selection of Apply push-
button) has not been sent yet to the equipment (requested connection).
Yellow (Link to IDU ...). The channel is used for a connection, composed by a protected NBUS
channel and another channel, applied on the equipment (real connection). The connection is
sent in preferential mode to the IDU of the second nodal element.
The labels of the elements (To IDU...) in the Preferential Nodal Link area and in the key below
change depending on how the nodal element, which the user is connected to, has been defined:
Node A, Node B or Node C (parameter Nodal ID - see Fig.43).
Here below an example is reported.
To display the connections of the equipment in table format
2. Bring in front of page the List tab.
The tab displays the existing connections. Fig.88 shown an example.
If the List tab is not available, the list is empty.
Fig.88 List tab (Cross Connection contextual area)
Fig.88 notes
(1) Every connection is assigned a row, where is pointed out in the column:
Name. Name of the connection.
On the creation of the connection, a default name is assigned which can be modified later by
the user. The format of the default name is the following:
<Channel> / <Linked Ch.>
The values which Channel and Linked Ch. can assume are the same listed in the next para-
graph.
Channel and Linked Ch. Channels composing the connection:
Exp.16xE1 <E1 number>. E1 channel of the expansion (equipment IduBoard Exp.
Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1).
Exp.32xE1 <E1 number>. E1 channel of the expansion (equipment IduBoard Exp.
2xSTM-1 32E1).
Exp. STM-1 <TUG3-TUG2-TU12>. VC-12 channel of STM-1 stream.
NBUS... <E1 number>. E1 channel of Nodal Bus.
The available NBUS values change according to the equipment nodal configuration.
The detail is pointed out in Tab.6.
Radio Perm. E1 <E1 number>. High priority radio E1 channel.
Radio Extra E1 <E1 number>. Low priority radio E1 channel.
Remember that the connection is a bidirectional path. The table considers a possible direc-
tion of the connection (Channel -> Linked Ch.) only for clarity of explanation.
Type. Type of connection:
Standard. Connection of Tributary-Tributary, Tributary-Radio or Auto-Loop (loop of a
tributary channel on itself) type.
Pass-Through. Connection of Auto-Loop type (loop of a radio channel on itself).
The list does not points out the pre-configured connections.
(2) When the heading of a column is selected, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanu-
merical order with respect to the considered column and the arrow is displayed.
On the next selection, the rows are sorted in decreasing order (the arrow is displayed) an so on.
(3) Push-button:
Select All. It selects all the connections present in the list.
Deselect All. It deselects all the connections present in the list.
Delete Selected. It deletes the selected connections.
To execute a Tributary-Radio connection
All the connections executed by the user are single connections. The only exceptions are the connec-
tions where a protected NBUS channel is involved.
In this case, when the user executes a single connection, the matrix automatically executes the protection
connections creating, as fact, a protected connection.
The protected Nodal Bus is available in ALCplus2 IDU equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod.
2xSTM-1 16E1 in protected nodal configuration.
The Cross Connection Manager window opens (see Fig.87).
3. Select the Tributary-Radio option.
4. Set, in the Tributary box, the tributary stream you wish to use for the connection.
5. Select the unused channel on tributary side (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) and drag-and-drop
it on the unused channel on radio side (Radio Permanent E1/Radio Extra E1)
The two channels are linked by a blue line and the name assigned by default to the connection is dis-
played.
To modify the name of the connection go to pag.260.
The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the equipment type
and on the equipped tributary streams (see Tab.5).
The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.
To execute a Tributary-Tributary connection
All the connections executed by the user are single connections. The only exceptions are the connec-
tions where a protected NBUS channel is involved.
3. Select the Tributary-Tributary option.
4. Set, in the 1st Trib and 2nd Trib box, the tributaries streams you wish to use for the connection.
The list contains all the available tributaries with the exception of the tributary set in the other Trib
box.
5. Select the unused tributary channel and drag-and-drop it over a different unused tributary channel.
It is possible to select two channels of two different tributaries or of the same tributary.
played.
The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the equipment type
and on the equipped tributary streams (see Tab.5).
To delete one or more connections
To delete one or more Tributary-Tributary and/or Tributary-Radio connections (Cross Connec-
tion Manager window)
3. Select a channel of the Tributary-Tributary and/or Tributary-Radio connection you wish to delete and
drag-and-drop it over the trash icon.
The connection is deleted.
4. Repeat the step 3 to delete all the wished connections.
To delete an Auto-Loop in the Cross Connection Manager window, use the procedure To disable an
Auto-Loop (pag.260).
To delete one or more connections (List tab)
2. Bring in front of page the List tab (see Fig.88).
3. Select ( ) the connections you wish to delete.
Press Select All to select all the connections present in the window.
4. Press Delete Selected and confirm.
To enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop)
3. Double click on the unused tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or radio channel
(E1 Permanent/E1 Extra) for which you wish to execute the auto-loop.
The Auto Loop <channel> window is displayed.
4. Select the Enabled option.
5. Press Ok.
A blue line, which closes in loop on the selected channel, and the name assigned by default to the con-
nection are displayed.
To disable an Auto-Loop
3. Double click on the on the tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or on the radio
channel (E1 Permanent/E1 Extra) with auto-loop enabled (light blue box) for which you wish to disable
the auto-loop.
The Auto Loop <channel> window is displayed.
4. Select the Disabled option.
5. Press Ok.
The channel changes from used to free (light green box).
To verify/modify the connection label
To verify/ modify the name of a connection (Cross Connection Manager window)
3. Select one of the channels that form the connection.
The connection line is displayed and, next to it, its name in a yellow rectangle (see Fig.87).
4. To modify the name of the connection, select the rectangle.
The Cross Connection Label window opens.
The parameters Current Value and New Value point out the current name of the connection.
5. Set the new name in the New Value field: alphanumeric string of, at most, 45 characters.
To verify the name of the connections (List tab)
2. Bring in front of page the List tab.
The column Name displays, for each connection, the relevant name (see Fig.88).
To execute an E1 NBUS <-> E1 connection (AlPlus/3 Element/Protected)
Operation available and meaningful only if the equipment ALCplus2 IDU with expansion IduBoard Exp.
Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 belongs to a three-elements protected nodal configuration composed by AL IDU plus
equipment (parameter Nodal Configuration: AlPlus, Nodal Type: 3 Element, Nodal Protection: Protected -
see Fig.43).
In this particular configuration, for the connections involving a NBUS channel (single connections which are
automatically protected by the matrix - see pag.261) it is necessary to set the element of the node which
you wish to send the connection to in preferential mode.
3. Select the Tributary-Tributary or Tributary-Radio option.
4. Set the NBUS stream and the tributary or the Radio stream you wish to use for the connection setting
the parameters present in the View area.
5. Select, in the Preferential Nodal Link area, the element of the node (option To IDU...) which you wish
to send the connection to in preferential mode.
6. Select the unused NBUS tributary channel and drag-and-drop it over a different unused tributary/radio
channel.
played.
Cross connection matrix (more info)
For ALCplus2 IDU equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-
1 16E1, a TDM matrix is available for the cross-connection of the E1 channels.
The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the type of equipment and
on the equipped tributary streams. The detail is pointed out in Tab.5.
Connection Type
The TDM matrix manages the following types of connection:
Tributary-Radio. Single connection between a tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/
E1 NBUS) and a radio E1 (Radio Permanent E1 or Radio Extra E1).
Tributary-Tributary. Single connection between two different tributary channels (E1 expan-
sion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS).
Auto-Loop. Loop of a tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or a radio E1
channel (Radio Permanent E1 or Radio Extra E1) on itself.
The TDM matrix can manage single and protected connections.
All the connections executed by the user are single connections.
Only exceptions are the connections (Tributary-Radio, Tributary-Tributary) involving a protected NBUS
channel.
Display of the cross-connections
The user can display the cross-connections existing in an equipment as graphic or as table.
In the first case, the tributary and radio streams are graphically displayed in a window (Cross Connection
Manager window).
When a channel involved by a connection is selected, a line is displayed representing the connection. The
edges of the line point out the channels composing the connection (see Fig.87).
In the second case, a table is displayed with the list of the existing cross-connections (List tab).
Each row of the table represents a connection where the name, the edge channels and the connection type
are pointed out (see Fig.88).
Here below the operations which can be performed in the two displays:
GRAPHICAL display (Cross Connection Manager window):
To verify the connections of the equipment (one at a time)
To execute a Tributary-Radio connection
To execute a Tributary-Tributary connection
To delete one or more connections
To enable the loop of a channel (Auto-Loop)
To disable an Auto-Loop
To verify/modify the name of a connection
TABLE display (List tab):
To verify the connections of the equipment
To delete one or more connections at the same time
To verify/modify the name of the connections
Creation of a cross-connection
All the cross-connections in the TDM matrix must be created by the user (see pag.258, pag.258, pag.259).
It is possible to create a connection only in the graphical display (Cross Connection Manager window -
Fig.87).
Manual deletion of the cross-connections
It is possible to delete one or more cross-connections from the graphical display of the connections or from
the table display (see pag.259).
In both cases, the connections removed in a type of display are automatically removed even from the other type.
Automatic deletion of the cross-connections
The following operations automatically delete the connections where the (tributary or radio) stream, object
of the change, is terminated:
STM-1 stream
Passage of the STM-1 stream (STM-1 MST Mode) from the status 1+0, 1+1 MSP or 1+1 MSP No
ALS to the None status (see Fig.43).
Nodal Bus (1, 2 and protected)
Passage of the Nodal Configuration:
From one of the statuses (Al...) to the status No Nodal (see Fig.43).
From the status AlcPlus2 (not protected) to the status AlcPlus2 (protected) and vice
versa (see Fig.43)
E1 Radio - Permanent
All those operations, executed in the Modulation & Capacity tab, which decrease the number of
high priority E1 channels (Permanent TDM Traffic) (see Fig.44).
E1 Radio - Extra
All those operations, executed in the Modulation & Capacity tab, which decrease the maximum
number of low priority E1 channels (Extra TDM Cap) (see Fig.44).
All the operations, executed in the tab Extra TDM Priority, which change the order used to dis-
card the dynamic E1 channels (Extra TDM Cap) from the adaptive modulation (see Fig.47).
Tab.5 Ports of the cross-connection matrix
*
(1) The E1 channels of the base board (tributaries A and B) and the A and B channel Radio Extra E1 are
not available in matrix for the realization of connections because these channels are already used
for the following pre-configured connections:
Trib. A <-> A Radio Extra E1
Trib. B <-> B Radio Extra E1
The pre-configured connections cannot be modified nor deleted.
(2) The order used to display the Extra E1 Radio channels depends on the priority defined by the user
(see Fig.47).
Equipment
ALCplus2 IDU
Ports of the cross-connection matrix
Port Stream Configuration Availability
IduBoard The equipment is not provided with the cross-connection matrix
IduBoard
Exp. 16E1
The equipment is not provided with the cross-connection matrix
IduBoard
Exp 2xSTM-1
32E1
(1)
Expansion 32xE1
E1 tributaries of
the expansion
32 E1 channels Always available
Expansion STM-1 STM-1 63 VC-12 channels
Port/channels available when the
management of STM-1 stream is
active (parameter STM-1 MST
Mode, values 1+0, 1+1 MSP or
1+1 MSP No ALS - see Fig.43)
Radio Permanent
E1 (Radio-A)
Radio
(high priority E1
channels)
x E1
x = Value of the parameter Per-
manent TDM Traffic (see Fig.44).
value x is greater than 0
Radio Extra E1
(Radio-A)
Radio
(low priority E1
channels)
y E1
y = Value of the parameter Extra
TDM Cap. relevant to the ACM
profile with the highest number
of E1 (see Fig.44)
(2)
.
value y is greater than 0
IduBoard
Exp. Nod.
2xSTM-1
16E1
(1)
Expansion 16xE1
E1 tributaries of
the expansion
16 E1 channels Always available
Expansion STM-1 STM-1 63 VC-12 channels
management of STM-1 stream is
active (parameter STM-1 MST
Mode, values 1+0, 1+1 MSP or
1+1 MSP No ALS - see Fig.43)
NBUS... Nodal Bus
The available NBUS ports change according to the equipment nodal
configuration. The detail is pointed out in Tab.6.
Radio Permanent
E1 (Radio-A)
Radio
(high priority E1
channels)
x E1
x = Value of the parameter Per-
manent TDM Traffic (see Fig.44).
value x is greater than 0
Radio Extra E1
(Radio-A)
Radio
(low priority E1
channels)
y E1
y = Value of the parameter Extra
TDM Cap. relevant to the ACM
profile with the highest number
of E1 (see Fig.44)
(2)
.
value y is greater than 0
Tab.6 NBUS ports of the cross-connection matrix
*
(1) The first group of 63 E1 channels (163) of the Nodal Bus 1 is protected by the second group of 63
E1 channels (64126) of the Nodal Bus 1.
The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the first group (E1-1) is protected by the first chan-
nel of the second group (E1-64); the second channel of the first group (E1-2) is protected by the
second channel of the second group (E1-65) and so on.
(2) The first group of 63 E1 channels (163) of the Nodal Bus 2 is protected by the second group of 63
E1 channels (64126) of the Nodal Bus 2.
The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the first group (E1-1) is protected by the first chan-
nel of the second group (E1-64); the second channel of the first group (E1-2) is protected by the
second channel of the second group (E1-65) and so on.
(3) The first group of 63 E1 channels (163) of the Nodal Bus 1 is protected by the first group of 63 E1
channels (163) of the Nodal Bus 2.
The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the first group of the Nodal Bus 1 (NBUS 1 - E1-
1) is protected by the first channel of the first group of the Nodal Bus 2 (NBUS 2 - E1-1); the second
channel of the first group of the Nodal Bus 1 (NBUS 1 - E1-2) is protected by the second channel of
the first group of the Nodal Bus 2 (NBUS 2 - E1-2) and so on.
(4) The second group of 63 E1 channels (64126) of the Nodal Bus 1 is protected by the second group
of 63 E1 channels (64126) of the Nodal Bus 2.
The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the second group of the Nodal Bus 1 (NBUS 1 -
E1-64) is protected by the first channel of the second group of the Nodal Bus 2 (NBUS 2 - E1-64);
the second channel of the second group of the Nodal Bus 1 (NBUS 1 - E1-65) is protected by the
second channel of the second group of the Nodal Bus 2 (NBUS 2 - E1-65) and so on.
Nodal
configuration
(see Fig.44)
Protection
NBUS ports - Cross-connection matrix
NBUS port Stream Configuration
No Nodal - - - -
ALCplus2
Not protected
NBUS 1 [1..63]
Nodal Bus 1
63 E1 channels (163)
NBUS 1 [64..126] 63 E1 channels (64126)
NBUS 2 [1..63]
Nodal Bus 2
NBUS 2 [64..126] 63 E1 channels (64126)
Protected
NBUS 1 [1..63] Protected Nodal Bus 1 63 protected E1 channels
(1)
NBUS 2 [1..63] Protected Nodal Bus 2 63 protected E1 channels
(2)
ALPlus
Not protected
NBUS 1 [1..63]
Nodal Bus 1
NBUS 1 [64..126] 63 E1 channels (64126)
NBUS 2 [1..63]
Nodal Bus 2
NBUS 2 [64..126] 63 E1 channels (64126)
Protected
NBUS [1..63] Protected Nodal Bus 63 protected E1 channels
(3)
NBUS [64..126] Protected Nodal Bus 63 protected E1 channels
(4)
RADIO
At the choice of Radio option, the program displays the following commands:
Radio Branch... (pag.266). It manages the radio parameters.
Radio Branch
For the equipment in 1+0 configuration is present the Radio Branch 1A command.
For the equipment in 1+1 configuration are present the Radio Branch 1A (branch 1 radio parameters)
and Radio Branch 2A (branch 2 radio parameters) commands.
The Radio Branch command manages the radio parameters.
RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment (pag.266)
Modulation status of the RF carrier (Carrier Only) (pag.268)
Operation of the transmitter (Tx Transmitter) (pag.268)
Operation of the RT power supply (RT PSU) (pag.268)
Resolution of the received power (Measurements Resolutions) (pag.269)
Resolution of the transmitted power (Measurements Resolutions) (pag.269)
Functioning status of the ATPC (Tx Power Control) (pag.269)
Maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx value) (pag.271)
Intervention threshold of the ATPC device (ATPC Threshold on local Prx) (pag.271)
To display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for eve-
ry ACM profile (pag.271)
To verify/modify the RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment
This operation does NOT automatically modify also the RF channel of the remote equipment.
In 1+1 Hot Stand-by configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch.
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Radio > Radio Branch command.
The Radio Branch contextual area opens.
The Tx Frequency Selector parameter points out the RF channel (see Fig.89).
2. To change the parameter, use the UP/DOWN push-buttons to increase/decrease the RF channel.
The RF channel can be modified at steps of 10 channels at a time (if the COARSE is present) or at steps
of 1 channel at a time (if the COARSE is not present).
Press Mode to activate/deactivate the display of the word.
The frequency values change according to the equipment connected with the program.
Reading/Writing
Monitor, Read Only
Fig.89 Settings tab (Radio Branch contextual area)
Fig.89 notes
(1) If it is pointed out the wording UNAVAILABLE. Reason: Outdoor Unit Hardware Failure, check that
the connection cable between the IDU section and the ODU one is not failure or missing.
The word COARSE points out the granularity: if the word is displayed, the RF channel can be mod-
ified at steps of 10 channels at a time, while if the word is not present, the value can be modified
at steps of 1 channel at a time. To activate/deactivate the display of the word, use the Mode push-
button.
On. The carrier is not modulated.
Off. The carrier is modulated.
On. The RT power supply is on.
Off. The RT power supply is off.
On. The transmitter is turned on.
Off. The transmitter is turned off.
(5) Box:
Prx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power received by the equipment
(Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated PRx value
corresponds to -70 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the changing of
the transmitted power when the PRx gets a value <-72 or > -68.
Ptx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power transmitted by the equip-
ment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated Ptx value
corresponds to 10 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the changing of the
transmitted power when the Ptx gets a value < 8 or > 12.
To verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier
In 1+1 Hot Stand-by configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch.
The Carrier Only parameter points out the modulation status of the RF carrier (see Fig.89).
On. The carrier is not modulated.
Off. The carrier is modulated.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are deactivating the modulation (selection of the On option) a message is displayed warning
that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout.
The modulation deactivation of the carrier activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched
off and, then, switched on, the modulation is active independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the operation of the transmitter
The Tx Transmitter parameter points out the operation of the transmitter (see Fig.89).
On. The transmitter is turned on.
Off. The transmitter is turned off.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are switching off the transmitter (selection of the Off option) a message is displayed warning
The turning off of the transmitter activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and,
then, switched on, the transmitter is on, independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply
The RT PSU parameter points out the operation of the RT power supply (see Fig.89).
On. The RT power supply is on.
Off. The RT power supply is off.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are switching off the transmitter (selection of the Off option) a message is displayed warning
The deactivation of the RT power supply activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched
off and, then, switched on, the power supply of RT is active, independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx)
For the equipment in 1+1 configuration, the setting of a value for the resolution of the Prx relevant to
a branch automatically modifies also the value of the Prx resolution of the other branch.
The Prx parameter points out the resolution used to communicate the changes of the power received
by the equipment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx change) (see Fig.89).
2. To change the parameter set, into the box, the wished value.
To verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx)
For the equipment in 1+1 configuration, the setting of a value for the resolution of the Ptx relevant to
a branch automatically modifies also the value of the Ptx resolution of the other branch.
The Ptx parameter points out the resolution used to communicate the changes of the power transmitted
by the equipment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx change) (see Fig.89).
2. To change the parameter set, into the box, the wished value.
To verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC
2. Bring in front of page the Powers tab.
In the Tx Power Control area the functioning status of the ATPC is pointed out (see Fig.90).
Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable).
In this condition, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (Max Ptx value cursor).
Automatic. The ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.
In this condition, the transmitted power is automatically adjusted according to the level of the
signal at reception. The intervention thresholds of the ATPC device can be configured (see
pag.271). Then, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (see pag.271).
Fig.90 Powers tab (Radio Branch contextual area)
Fig.90 notes
Manual, the ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable).
Automatic, the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.
(2) The parameter affects the ATPC device as when it is in manual functioning mode as in automatic
one.
(3) This parameter defines the range of the ATPC regulation (expressed in dB) with respect to the cur-
rent value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the upper limit of the range.
(4) Cursor:
High: <current value> dBm. Intervention threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the
transmitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher
than the set threshold value
Low: <current value> dBm. Intervention threshold of the ATPC device to increase the trans-
mitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the
set threshold value.
(5) Press the push-button to display the table resuming the power in transmission/reception for every
ACM profile. In detail, in the column:
Active Modulation. ACM profile.
Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter
RX Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in input to the receiver.
To verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter
In 1+1 Hot Stand-by system configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch.
The Max Ptx value parameter points out the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Ptx nom-
inal value) (see Fig.90).
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value.
To verify/modify the intervention threshold (High/Low) of the ATPC device
In 1+1 Hot Stand-by system configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch.
In 1+1 Freq. Div. system configuration the changes, to be active, must be set in both branches.
In the ATPC Threshold on local Prx area the intervention threshold of the ATPC is pointed out (see
Fig.90):
3. To change the threshold move the High and/or Low cursor to the wished value. In detail, the parame-
ter:
High: <current value> dBm. Intervention threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the trans-
mitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than the set
threshold value.
Low: <current value> dBm. Intervention threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmit-
ted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the set
threshold value.
To display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/recep-
tion for every ACM profile
3. Press View Current ATPC Pow.
The table resuming the power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile is displayed. In detail, in
the column:
Active Modulation. ACM profile
Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter
RX Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in input to the receiver.
Fig.91 Table resuming the transmitted/received power for every ACM profile
MAINTENANCE
At the choice of Maintenance option, the program displays the following commands:
LAN Statistics (pag.274). It manages the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from
the Ethernet ports.
S/N Meas (pag.277). It displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N).
Fade Margin (pag.278). It manages the calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin).
PRBS (pag.282). It manages the PRBS device.
Radio Loop (pag.285). It manages the radio loops.
Radio Switch A (pag.287). It manages the radio switch.
LAN Statistics
* The reset of the counters result can be executed only by users Station Operator and System.
The LAN Statistics command manages the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ether-
net ports.
To verify the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ethernet ports (pag.274)
To reset the counters results (pag.276)
To verify the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ethernet ports
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > LAN Statistics command.
The LAN Statistics contextual area opens.
2. Select the port, whose counters you wish to verify.
Under the selected port, the list of the relevant counters is displayed.
The counters of only one port at a time can be displayed.
Notes relevant to the counters.
The depth of the events stored by each single counter is equal to 2E32.
The counters are in compliance with the specification RFC 2819.
The Total Bytes Received counter, differently from what specified in RFC 2819, does not include the
bytes belonging to packets of sizes greater than the Max Packet Size.
Fig.92 LAN Statistics contextual area
Curr. Profile Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System*
Fig.92 notes
(1) Counter:
Dropped Frames. Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by the
probe due to lack of resources.
This value is not necessarily the absolute number of discarded packets, as it represents only
the number of times that this condition occurred after the exhaustion of the memory re-
sources; the packets can be discarded also for other causes.
Total Bytes Received. Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) re-
ceived on the network.
This value includes 4 FCS octects.
Total Frames Received. Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets,
and multicast packets) received.
Broadcast Frames Received. Total number of good packets received that were directed to
the broadcast address.
This does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Frames Received. Total number of good packets received that were directed to a
multicast address.
This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
CRC Align Errors. Total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and n
(parameter Max Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets with bad Frame Check
Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-inte-
gral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Frames. Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and
were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Frames. Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max
Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets and were otherwise well formed.
Fragments. Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had
either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or
a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers. Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max Packet
Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets, and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number
of octets (Alignment Error).
Collisions. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this EthLannet segment.
Frames 64 Oct. [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received and
transmitted that were 64 octets in length.
Frames 65 to 127 Oct. [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) re-
ceived and transmitted that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive.
Frames 1024 to max pck size [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of transmitted and received pack-
ets with a length greater than 1024 octects (incorrect packets included).
Late Collisions. Evaluation relevant to the total number of collisions detected in this EthLan-
net segment, after the transmission of more than 512 bits from the beginning of TXEnable.
Valid Bytes Received. Total number of received bytes relevant to correct packets. This coun-
ter is increased once for every data octet of good packets (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast)
received.
Bytes Sent. Number of transmitted bytes.
This counter is increased once for every data octet of a transmitted good packet.
Valid Frames Received. Number of received correct frames.
This counter is increased once for every good packet (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) re-
ceived.
Frames Sent. Number of transmitted frames. This counter is increased once for every trans-
mitted good packet.
Out Multicast Frames. Number of Multicast frames sent. This counter does not include Broad-
cast packets.
Out Broadcast Frames. Number of Broadcast frames sent.
Out Unicast Frames. Number of Unicast frames sent. This is given by: Frames Sent - Out
Multicast Frames - Out Broadcast Frames.
In Pause Frames. Number of good Flow Control frames received.
Out Pause Frame. Number of Flow Control frames sent.
To reset the counters results
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > LAN Statistics command.
The LAN Statistics contextual area opens (Fig.92).
2. Press Reset and confirm.
The counters are reset.
S/N Meas
The S/N Meas command displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N), which allows evaluating the
quality of the radio communication channel.
To verify the measure of the S/N ratio
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > S/N Meas command.
The S/N Meas. contextual area opens.
The S/N parameter points out the value of the S/N measure (see Fig.93).
Fig.93 S/N Meas. contextual area
Fig.93 notes
(1) The measure is always in progress and the value is updated at regular intervals.
The period between an update and the next one is displayed by the clock present in the Events List
area (pag.33) of the WEB LCT page. If you wish to update the value immediately, press Refresh.
For the equipment in 1+0 configuration is present the Branch 1A area.
For the equipment in 1+1 configuration are present the Branch 1A (branch 1 S/N measure) and
Branch 2A (branch 2 S/N measure) areas.
Fade Margin
The Fade Margin command manages the calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin).
With details it is possible:
To execute the calculation of the link margin and check/delete the results (pag.278).
To verify the values of the power parameters stored into the equipment and used for the calcu-
lation of the Fade Margin (pag.280).
For more information about the Fade Margin go to pag.281.
To execute the calculation of the link margin and check/delete the results (Fade Mar-
gin)
The operation is traffic affecting.
In order to execute the operation, it is necessary that:
The remote equipment is inserted in the list of the remote equipment of the local equipment,
and it is configured as Remote Link (equipment type) (see pag.51).
If more equipment configured as Remote Link are present in the remote equipment list, the
application will automatically acknowledge as remote equipment the FIRST equipment of Re-
mote Link type present in the list, even if this one is not physically connected, with respect to
the local equipment, to the other side of the radio link.
In the remote equipment table, the equipment are sorted in increasing order by their IP address.
The user is connected to both the terminals (local and remote) with profile System or Station
Operator.
In both the terminals, the re-timing modulation is not active (see pag.156).
In both the terminals, there is not active alarms, except for the following:
Alarms of group ETH LAN, P.M..., Plug-in module, STM-1 (see pag.308).
Common group: Equip Manual Operation, MNGT/1 cable Fail, MNGT/2 cable Fail, RMON
Alarm...
LIM group: Local... Alarm Synthesis, REMOTE LIM Radio... Alarm Synthesis, IDU Board
Trib... Rx AIS Alarm, ... Signal loss Alarm, ...Re-Timing Alarm.
Radio group: ...PRBS Fail Alarm, ...Reserve Radio Branch Selected in Revertive Mode
RT group: ...RT Rx Power Low Alarm, ...RT REMOTE ODU Alarm Synthesis, ...RT LOCAL
ODU Alarm Synthesis, ...Rx Active Status, ...Tx Active Status
SETS group: IDU Sets... Drift Alarm, IDU Sets... LTI Alarm, IDU Sets Free Running Sta-
tus.
SNTP group: SNTP servers lost Alarm.
During the operation:
In the WEB LCT page of the local terminal, it is not possible to change the context (the selection
of the commands is forbidden).
In both the terminals, the manual operation Fade Margin evaluation active is active.
The messages that can be displayed during the operation are reported at pag.280.
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Fade Margin command.
The Fade Margin contextual area opens (see Fig.94).
If the Fade Margin command is not available, this means that the calculation of the link margin is not
enabled for the equipment. Some functionalities of the equipment are available after the enabling. To
verify the functionalities enabled select the Features Management command (pag.141).
Reading/Writing
2. Type the expected value of Fade Margin into the Fade M. box.
This value is normally present in the document related to the branch calculation (for example in LER -
Link Engineering Report).
3. A control on the typed value and the Ptx value, stored into the controller of the equipment, is executed.
If the difference between the two value is greater of the maximum capacity of the fader internal to the
equipment, the message Max available attenuation dB. An external attenuator is required. Continue
anyway? is displayed.
In this case, it is necessary to use an external attenuator and type, in the Ext. Att. box, the value of
attenuation externally provided, otherwise the calculation will be executed on the basis of the attenu-
ation made available by the equipment.
4. Press Start.
The calculation of the link margin is started.
The label of the Start button changes to Abort, whose choice stops the operation.
The Current Ptx area indicates, step by step, the lowering of the transmission level.
The Status box displays the progress of the operation as messages.
For the 1+1 systems, the calculation is executed using the transmitter active at the moment of the start
of the measure and relevant to both the remote receivers (see pag.281).
At the end of the check, the message Step <value> of <value> completed. Continue? is displayed on
each single branch. Press:
No, if you wish to stop the procedure.
Yes, if you wish to continue.
The display of the message Procedure Completed points out that the operation has been executed suc-
cessfully.
5. Press View Log File to display the power levels and the calculations executed by the system during
the calculation of the link margin.
The WEB FadeMarginViewLog page opens.
If you wish:
To save the result, it is necessary to select and copy them into a text editor.
To delete the result, press Reset Log File and confirm.
If the results of the Fade Margin are not deleted, at the next activation of the calculation of the
link margin (selection of the Start push-button) the data will be added to those already present.
Fig.94 Fade Margin contextual area
Fig.94 notes
(1) Column:
Current Step. Transmitter and the receiver (radio link) which the results of the operation are
referred to.
Real F.M. (dB). Fade Margin value, recalculated considering the really measured character-
istics of the equipment.
Real Fade Margin Ver. Fade Margin value verified by the procedure (it is the result of the
procedure).
Messages displayed during the execution of the Fade Margin
Message:
Local equipment is not probably logged or Check local login
The user is not connected to the local equipment with profile System or Station Operator.
Execute the login (pag.28).
Check remote login
The user is not connected to the local equipment with profile System or Station Operator.
Execute the login (pag.28).
Local equipment has one or more alarms. The procedure cant go on
The local equipment has at least one alarm active that does not allow the execution of the Fade
Margin.
Verify the active alarms (see pag.33) and operate on the equipment to clear these alarms.
Remote equipment has one or more alarms. The procedure cant go on
The local equipment has at least one alarm active that does not allow the execution of the Fade
Margin.
Verify the active alarms (see pag.33) and operate on the equipment to clear these alarms.
Remote equipment is unreacheable...
The remote equipment is unreachable.
Restore the connection or wait for the restore of the connection.
Fade Margin Procedure active on this equipment
The calculation of the link margin is already in progress.
Adaptive modulation is active on local equipment. Turn it off and restart procedure
In the local terminal the adaptive modulation is active.
Disable the adaptive modulation (see pag.159).
Remote Link Not Found!
In the remote equipment table there is not an equipment configured as Remote Link (equipment
type).
Add the remote equipment to the list (see pag.53).
To verify the values of the power parameters stored into the equipment and used for
the calculation of the Fade Margin
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Fade Margin command.
The Fade Margin contextual area opens (see Fig.94).
If the Fade Margin command is not available, this means that the calculation of the link margin is not
enabled for the equipment.
Some functionalities of the equipment are available after the enabling. To verify the functionalities en-
abled select the Features Management command (pag.141).
2. Press View Tables.
The FadeMarginTablesLog page WEB is opened where the parameters stored in the controller of the
local equipment are saved.
Calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin) (more info)
With calculation of the link margin, we mean the calculation of the difference between the level normally
received by the equipment and the level received on the activation of the Rx Quality Low Alarm.
The operation is automatically executed by the program using the parameters set by the user (expected
value of Fade Margin and possible external fading) and the power parameters (Ptx, rated Ptx, etc.) stored
in the equipment during the test of the equipment itself.
The calculation is executed on the radio link composed by the equipment which the Fade Margin contextual
area is referred to (local equipment) and by the equipment located on the other end of the link (remote
equipment).
For the system in:
1+0, only the measure Tx1\Rx1 is executed, using the operating and attenuated PTx correc-
tions.
1+1 Hot Stand By, the calculation is executed on both the branches: first the operation is exe-
cuted on the working Tx branch and both the remote receivers, then the program forces the
switch in transmission and repeats the operation in such a way to calculate the link margin for
all the possible Tx/Rx combinations: Tx1-Rx1, Tx1-Rx2, Tx2-Rx1, Tx2-Rx2.
The measure is executed using the operating and attenuated PTx corrections and the alarms of
the corresponding branch.
1+1 Frequency Diversity, the measures Tx1\Rx1 and Tx2\Rx2 are executed, using the operating
and attenuated PTx corrections and the alarms of the corresponding branch.
Local equipment 1+0 - remote equipment 1+1 Hot StandBy, the measures Tx1 local\Rx1 remote
and Tx1 local\Rx2 remote are executed.
Local equipment 1+1 Hot StandBy - remote equipment 1+0, the measure Tx local working\Rx1
remote and, after the switch on the local terminal, the measure Tx local working\Rx1 are exe-
cuted.
When the calculation is activated, the Ptx level of the local equipment is automatically faded by 1dB at a
time. For each single fading, the Ptx value and the possible alarms are stored to a file. The Ptx level is
faded step by step until the activation of the Rx Quality Low Alarm on the remote terminal.
Before activating the calculation, the following operations are automatically executed (he operations are
executed only if the parameters are not in the indicated condition):
In the local terminal the operation of the device for the automatic control of the transmitted
power (ATPC) is forced to manual.
In both the terminals, the value of 1800 seconds is set as timeout for the manual operations.
At the end of the calculation, the following operations are automatically executed:
The level of power transmitted by the local equipment is reported to the initial value (before the
activation of the calculation).
In the local terminal the ATPC device is reported to the initial operating modality (before the
activation of the calculation).
The restore of the initial values of the above mentioned parameters is automatically executed even after
an interruption of the procedure.
PRBS
The PRBS command manages the PRBS device.
To verify the PRBS measure status (pag.282)
To activate/reset the PRBS measure (pag.283)
To deactivate the PRBS measure (pag.283)
To verify/modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure (pag.283)
To enable/disable the E1 signal used for the measure (pag.284)
To verify the PRBS measure status
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > PRBS command.
The PRBS contextual area opens.
The Start/Stop parameter points out the PRBS measure status (see Fig.95).
Fig.95 PRBS contextual area
Fig.95 notes
(1) Box:
Sync Loss Alarm. The colour of box points out the status of the alarm:
Green. The alarm is not active.
Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has, respectively, severity
Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
Fail Alarms. Number of times that the Sync Loss Alarm activated from the start of the meas-
ure.
Reading/Writing
Monitor, Read Only
Start-Reset. The PRBS measure is active.
Stop. The PRBS measure is deactivated.
Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used as pattern for the measure.
2 ^ 15-1. The indicated algorithm is used as pattern for the measure.
2 ^ 23-1. The indicated algorithm is used as pattern for the measure.
Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream.
Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the IDU board (A or B) or
of the expansion (116 or 132).
(5) The value is meaningful only if the Enable option in the E1 Signal area is active.
To activate/reset the PRBS measure
The PRBS contextual area opens (see Fig.95).
2. In the Start/Stop area, select the Start-Reset option.
The measure will be active until the user does not stop it.
To deactivate the PRBS measure
The PRBS contextual area opens (see Fig.95).
2. In the Start/Stop area, select the Stop option.
To verify/modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure
The Test Pattern parameter points out the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure (see Fig.95).
Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used for the measure.
2 ^ 15-1. The indicated algorithm is used for the measure.
2 ^ 23-1. The indicated algorithm is used for the measure.
To enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure
The E1 Signal parameter points out the status of the used E1 signal for the measure (see Fig.95).
Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream/data channel.
Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the IDU board (A or B) or of
the expansion (116 or 132).
The enabling of the E1 signal used for the measure determinates also the connector (2Mbit/s
tributary), which a measurement instrument can be connected to for the control of the error rate
by means of the PRBS functionality.
3. ONLY if the enabled the E1 signal, set the tributary in the 2 Mbit/s Selection box.
If a value is not available, the relevant tributary is used as T12 synchronism in output (see Fig.51).
Only if the option Enable is selected, a message is displayed informing that the set tributary is imme-
diately enabled to the use and then a message is displayed warning you are executing a forcing and
displaying the current setting of the timeout.
Enabling of the E1 signal activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on the forcing is inactive independently from the previous setting.
If the message Operation fail! ...Wrong user profile! is displayed, check that the user profile can enable
the tributary.
Radio Loop
The Radio Loop command manages the radio loops.
To verify the radio loops status (pag.285)
To activate a radio loop (pag.286)
To deactivate a radio loop (pag.286)
For more information about the radio loop go to pag.286.
To verify the status and to activate/deactivate the base band loops go to pag.182.
To verify the radio loops status
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Radio Loop command.
The Radio Loop contextual area opens
The Loop Branch... parameter points out the current status of the loops (see Fig.96).
Fig.96 Radio Loop contextual area
Fig.96 notes
(1) Each loop is coupled with an option. When the option is selected, it points out that the loop is acti-
vated, while when it is selected the Loop OFF option, it points out that there is not any activated
loop.
(2) For the equipment in configuration 1+0, it is present the Loop Branch 1 area. For the equipment in
configuration 1+1, there are present the Loop Branch 1 (loops branch 1) and Loop Branch 2 (loops
branch 2) areas.
Reading/Writing
Monitor, Read Only
Read and Write, Station Operator, System
To activate a radio loop
The activation of the radio loop can affect the traffic. For more information see pag.286.
The Radio Loop contextual area opens (see Fig.96).
2. Select the option relevant to the loop that you want to activate.
It is not possible to preset more loops at the same time as the choice of a option automatically dis-
ables the preceding one.
3. Press Apply.
timeout.
The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned
on again, the loop results deactivated without taking into account the preceding setting.
To deactivate a radio loop
The Radio Loop contextual area opens (see Fig.96).
2. Select the Loop OFF option present in the Loop Branch area, relevant to the loop that you want to
deactivate.
Radio loop (more info)
In the 1+0 systems, the activation of the radio loop affects the traffic.
In the 1+1 systems, the activation of the radio loop on the active branch affects the traffic. The activation
of the radio loop on the stand-by branch does not affects the traffic. However, in this case, before executing
the loop, the receiver must be forced to the active branch (see pag.287).
Anyway, before activating a loop, it is suggested to verify that the timeout of the manual operations is set
(see pag.129). If the timeout is not active, the loop will be active until its deactivation by the user, the
switch-off/switch-on of the equipment or the equipment reset.
Radio Switch A
This command is available only for the equipment in 1+1 configuration.
The Radio Switch A command manages the radio switch.
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches (pag.287)
To modify the management of the switching at reception (Rx Forced Switch) (pag.288)
To modify the management of the switching at transmission (Tx Forced Switch) (pag.288)
To modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential) (pag.289)
To modify the Wait Time parameter (pag.289)
To force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
(pag.289)
For more information about the radio switch go to pag.289.
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Radio Switch A command.
The Radio Switch A contextual area opens displaying the status and the radio parameters of the radio
switch (see Fig.97).
Fig.97 Radio Switch A contextual area
Fig.97 notes
Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms.
Branch-1. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 for the service.
Reading/Writing
Monitor, Read Only
Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does not
use a branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.
Branch-1. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the
branch 1.
branch 2.
(3) Tx Preferential and Tx Forced Switch parameters are available only for the equipment in isofrequen-
tial configuration 1+1. For the heterofrequential configuration 1+1, the parameters are not availa-
ble because the two branches (1 and 2) transmit at the same time because the selection of the
signal is executed at reception.
(4) Time period can be defined (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the non-preferential
branch before being restored to the preferential branch, in such a way to avoid the continue switch
between the two branches in case of fleeting alarms.
To modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch)
The Radio Switch A contextual area opens.
The Rx Forced Switch parameter points out the management of the switching in reception (see Fig.97).
Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal
functioning mode of the equipment).
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Branch option) a message is displayed warning
Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on
again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding set-
ting.
To modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch)
The Tx Forced Switch parameter points out the management of the switching in transmission (see
Fig.97).
Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal
functioning mode of the equipment).
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Branch option) a message is displayed warning
ting.
To modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential)
The Tx Preferential parameter points out the management of the preferential branch in transmission
(see Fig.97).
Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does not use a
branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.
branch 1.
branch 2.
To modify the Wait Time parameter
The Wait Time parameter points out the value of Wait Time (see Fig.97).
2. To change the parameter, type the time interval wished: value comprised between 0 and 150 sec.
To force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time ex-
piration
The Radio Switch A contextual area opens (see Fig.97).
2. Press Reset.
Radio switch (more info)
The radio switches (reception and transmission), for the ALCplus2 IDU equipment in protected configura-
tion, generally operate in automatic mode: the equipment executes a switch when specific alarms raises
on the operating radio branch.
The user can manage the radio branch executing some forcing operations and enabling the preferential
branch.
Forcing a radio branch to operate (switch in reception and switch in transmission)
This function foresees the user can force a radio branch to operate independently from alarms which can
be active (see pag.287/pag.288).
This function must not be used for the normal operation of the radio switch in reception and/or transmis-
sion. It is a maintenance operation and remains active until when the user deactivates it or the timeout
period of the manual operation expires (if set).
Preferential radio branch (switch in transmission)
This function provides the choice of a branch to be used in a preferential way in transmission when there
are not alarms that cause the switching (see pag.289).
In fact, when the switching is automatically managed by the controller, it executes the switching when on
the branch on service there are present some specific alarms.
When the alarms have been reset, the controller does not execute again the switching. While, if it has been
set a preferential branch when the operator resets the alarms, if the branch on service is not the prefer-
ential one, the controller executes the switching and it uses for the service the branch set by the operator
as the preferential one (naturally if the branch does not have any alarms).
Besides a time period can be defined (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the non-preferential
branch before being restored to the preferential branch, in such a way to avoid the continue switch between
the two branches in case of fleeting alarms.
For instance, suppose that an alarm occurs causing the switch of the service from the preferential branch
to the other branch. When the alarm clears, the preferential branch is not immediately restored to service
but postponed by n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the controller verifies that the same alarm
has not occurred again on the preferential branch. At the end of the Wait Time period, if the alarm has not
occurred again, the service is restored to the preferential branch. Otherwise, the switch is delayed by other
n seconds, during which the controller verifies that the same alarm has not occurred again and so on.
In any moment the user can force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time
period expiration (see pag.289).
SWITCH
Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the protection of the STM-1 stream and/or protection of the nod-
al configuration is active (see Fig.43).
At the choice of Switch option, the program displays the following commands:
STM-1 (pag.292). It manages the switch of the protected STM-1 stream.
Nodal Bus (pag.296). It manages the switch of the protected Nodal Bus.
STM-1
Board Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the protection of the STM-1 stream is active (MSP mode
- see Fig.43).
The STM-1 command manages the switch of the protected STM-1 stream.
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch (pag.292)
To modify the management of the STM-1 switch (pag.293)
To modify the logic of the STM-1 switch (pag.294)
To set the primary STM-1 stream as preferential (pag.294)
To force the switch on the preferential STM-1 stream without waiting for the Wait Time expira-
tion (pag.294)
For more information about the STM-1 switch go to pag.295.
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Switch > STM-1 command.
The STM-1 contextual area opens.
In the Switch Status area the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch is pointed
out (see Fig.98).
Fig.98 STM-1 contextual area
Reading/Writing
Monitor, Read Only
Fig.98 notes
(1) As displayed in the legend, the active STM-1 stream is pointed out by the green box while the stand-
by STM-1 stream by the yellow box.
(2) Option:
Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal op-
eration of the switch).
Lock Out. The equipment is forced to use the primary STM-1 stream.
Forced. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1 stream: the switch is never
executed, independently from the type of alarm that can raise.
Manual. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1 stream: the switch is executed
only in case of alarms of type Signal Fail or Signal Degrade.
(3) Option:
Unidirectional. The switch logic (MSP protection) is managed at level of local equipment,
which commands the switch without notifying this situation to the remote equipment.
Bidirectional. The switch logic is managed at link level: the local equipment agrees the switch
with the remote equipment.
(4) Option:
Not revertive. The primary STM-1 stream is not preferential: after a switch (primary -> sec-
ondary) the secondary STM-1 stream remains active even when the alarms that caused the
switch clear.
Revertive. The primary STM-1 stream is preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary),
when the alarms clear, the primary stream is restored as active STM-1 stream.
(5) Wtr Time. Period (expressed in minutes) during which a non alarm condition must persist on the
main stream so that the service is restored on it.
To modify the management of the STM-1 switch
The parameter MSP Protection points out the management mode of the STM-1 switch (see Fig.98).
Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal opera-
tion of the switch).
Lock Out. The equipment is forced to use the primary STM-1 stream.
Forced. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1 stream: the switch will be never
executed, independently from the type of alarm which can raise.
Manual. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1 stream: the switch is executed
only in case of alarms of type Signal Fail or Signal Degrade.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Lock Out, Forced or Manual option) a message is
displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout.
ting.
To modify the logic of STM-1 switch
The Direction parameter points out the modality of management of the logic of the STM-1 switch (see
Fig.98).
Unidirectional. The switch logic (MSP protection) is managed at level of local equipment, which
commands the switch without notifying this situation to the remote equipment.
Bidirectional. The switch logic is managed at Link level: the local equipment agrees the switch
with the remote equipment.
To set the primary STM-1 stream as preferential
The parameter Protection Mode points out if the primary STM-1 stream is set as preferential (see
Fig.98).
Not revertive. The primary STM-1 stream is not preferential: after a switch (primary -> second-
ary) the secondary STM-1 stream remains active even when the alarms that caused the switch
clear.
Revertive. The primary STM-1 stream is preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary),
when the alarms clear, the primary stream is restored as active STM-1 stream.
The Wtr Time (Min)parameter points out the value of Wait Time (see Fig.98).
2. To change the parameter, set the time interval wished: value comprised between 0 and 12 minutes.
To force the switch on preferential STM-1 stream without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration
The STM-1 contextual area opens (see Fig.98).
2. Press Wtr Clear.
The main stream, after the clearing of the alarms that caused the switch, is immediately used for the
service. The Wtr Time period is considered elapsed.
STM-1 switch (more info)
The ALCplus2 IDU equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-
1 16E can be configured by the user to operate with the STM-1 stream disabled, enabled or protected (see
pag.153).
When the user enables the protection of the STM-1 stream (MSP mode - Multiplex Section Protection) even
the management of the STM-1 switch is enabled.
The switch generally operates automatically: the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms raise
on the operating STM-1 stream.
STM-1 switching criteria
When the STM-1 switch operates in automatic mode, the user can set one of the following switching logics:
Unidirectional Logic. Only the local alarms are considered among the criteria which determine
the switch.
Bidirectional Logic. The local equipment agrees the switch of the STM-1 stream with the remote
equipment: both the local and the remote alarms are considered among the criteria which de-
termine the switch.
Forcing of the STM-1 stream to operation
This function foresees the possibility for the user to force the primary or secondary STM-1 stream to op-
erate, independently from the alarms which could be active (see pag.293).
This operation must not be used for the normal operation of the STM-1 switch. It is a maintenance oper-
ation and remains active until when the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operation
expires (if set).
Preferential primary STM-1 stream
This function foresees the choice of the primary STM-1 stream to use in preferential mode when there are
not alarms which determine the switch (see pag.294).
In fact, when the switch operates in automatic mode, the equipment executes the switch when specific
alarms raises on the STM-1 streams in service.
When the alarms clear, the controller does not execute the switch again.
If the primary STM-1 stream is set as preferential, when the switch is executed, if the STM-1 stream in
service is not the primary, the controller executes the switch and uses the primary STM-1 stream for the
service (naturally if the stream is not alarmed).
Moreover it is possible to define a time period (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the not pref-
erential (secondary) STM-1 stream before this returns to the preferential (primary) STM-1 stream, in such
a way to avoid the continue switch between the two STM-1 streams in case of fluctuating alarms.
For example, suppose an alarm raises which determines the switch of the service from the primary STM-
1 stream to the secondary. When the alarm clears, the service is not immediately restored on the primary
(preferential) STM-1 stream, but this is postponed by n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the con-
troller verifies that the alarms has not raised again on the preferential STM-1 stream. At the end of the
Wait Time period, if the alarm has not raised again, the service is restored on the primary STM-1 stream.
On the contrary, the switch is postponed by other n seconds during which the system verifies the alarm
has not raised again and so on.
In any moment the operator can force the switch on preferential STM-1 stream without waiting for the Wait
Time period expiration (see pag.294).
Nodal Bus
This command is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1
expansion when the protection of the Nodal Bus is active (see Fig.43).
The Nodal Bus command manages the switch of the protected Nodal Bus.
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch (pag.296)
To modify the management of the nodal switch (pag.297)
To force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time ex-
piration (pag.297)
For more information about the nodal switch go to pag.298.
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Switch > Nodal Bus command.
The Nodal Bus contextual area opens, where the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal
switch is pointed out (see Fig.99).
Fig.99 Nodal Bus contextual area
Reading/Writing
Monitor, Read Only
Fig.99 notes
(1) Wtr Time. Period (expressed in seconds) during which a non alarm condition must persist on the
preferential NBUS connection so that the service is restored on it.
(2) Option:
Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal op-
eration of the switch).
NBUS1. The equipment is forced to use the primary Nodal Bus.
NBUS2. The equipment is forced to use the secondary Nodal Bus.
To modify the management of the nodal switch
The Nodal Bus contextual area opens.
The Forced Switch parameter points out the management mode of the nodal switch (see Fig.99).
Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal opera-
tion of the switch).
NBUS1. The equipment is forced to use the primary Nodal Bus.
NBUS2. The equipment is forced to use the secondary Nodal Bus.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the NBUS1 or NBUS2 option) a message is displayed
warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout.
ting.
The Nodal Bus contextual area opens.
The Wtr Time (s) parameter points out the value of Wait Time (see Fig.99).
2. To change the parameter, set the time interval wished: value comprised between 0 and 12 seconds.
To force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait
Time expiration
The Nodal Bus contextual area opens (see Fig.99).
2. Press Wtr Clear.
The primary Bus, after the clearing of the alarms that caused the switch, is immediately used for the
service. The Wtr Time period is considered elapsed.
Nodal switch (more info)
The ALCplus2 IDU equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E can be configured by the
user to operate with the Nodal Bus disabled, enabled or protected (see pag.153).
When the user enables the protection of the Nodal Bus even the management of the nodal switch is ena-
bled.
The switch generally operates automatically: the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms raise
on the operating Nodal Bus.
Forcing of the Nodal Bus to operation
This function foresees the possibility for the user to force the primary or secondary Nodal Bus to operate,
independently from the alarms which could be active (see pag.297).
This operation must not be used for the normal operation of the nodal switch. It is a maintenance operation
and remains active until when the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires
(if set).
Preferential NBUS (Nodal Bus) connection
When the user executes a single connection, which involves a protected NBUS channel, the matrix auto-
matically executes the protection connection creating, in fact, a protected connection.
In this case, the connection created by the user is the preferential connection (preferential NBUS connec-
tion) while the connection created by the matrix is the protection connection (protection NBUS connection).
When the switch operates in automatic modality, the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms
are present on the working NBUS connection.
When the alarms clear, the controller, if the working NBUS connection is not the preferential one, executes
the switch and uses the preferential NBUS connection to work (of course if alarms are not present on the
connection).
In this condition it is possible to define a time period (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the
not preferential NBUS connection before this returns to the preferential NBUS connection, in such a way
to avoid the continue switch between the two connections in case of fluctuating alarms.
For example, suppose an alarm occurs causing the switch from the preferential NBUS connection to the
protection one. When the alarm clears, the service is not immediately switched to the preferential NBUS
connection, but postponed of n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the controller verifies that the
alarm on the preferential NBUS connection has not occurred again. At the end of the Wait Time period, if
the alarm has not occurred again, the switch takes place. Otherwise, the switch is postponed of other n
seconds, during which the system verifies that the alarm has not occurred again and so on.
In any moment the operator can force the switch on preferential Nodal Bus without waiting for the Wait
Time period expiration (see pag.297).
USER INPUT
At the choice of User Input option, the program displays the following commands:
Local User Input (pag.300). It manages the local user input.
Remote User Input (pag.303). It manages the remote user input.
Local User Input
The Local User Input command manages the local user input configuration.
To verify the local user input status (pag.300)
To verify/modify the name of a local user input (pag.301)
To verify/modify the rest condition of a local user input (pag.301)
To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local user input (pag.301)
For more information on the enabling of the user input alarms go to pag.302.
To verify the local user input status
1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Input > Local User Input command.
The Local User Input contextual area opens, where the status of the local user inputs is pointed out
(see Fig.100).
Fig.100 Local User Input contextual area
Fig.100 notes
(1) The colour and the wording inside the box point out the status of the local user input:
Reading/Writing
Colour Wording Status
Green Inactive User input alarm not activated
Green Active User input status signal activated
Light blue Active User input alarm activated and with Warning severity level
Yellow Active User input alarm activated and with Minor severity level
Orange Active User input alarm activated and with Major severity level
Red Active User input alarm activated and with Critical severity level
(2) Option:
Normally Open. The user input is considered active when its terminal is referred to ground.
Normally Close. The user input is considered active when its terminal is open.
(3) Option:
Disable. The alarm is disabled.
Status. The alarm is enabled; its severity is equivalent to a status signalling.
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. The alarm is enabled; its severity is respectively of level
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.
To verify/modify the name of a local user input
The Local User Input contextual area opens, where the name of the local user inputs is pointed out (see
Fig.100).
2. To change the name of a user input type, into the relevant text box, an alphanumeric string with min-
imum 1 and maximum 31 characters.
To verify/modify the rest condition of a local user input
The Local User Input contextual area opens, where the rest condition of the local user inputs is pointed
out (see Fig.100).
2. To change the rest condition of a user input set, into the Input Operation box, the option:
Normally Open. The user input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its
terminal is referred to ground.
Normally Close. The user input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its
terminal is open.
To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local user input
The Local User Input contextual area opens, where the status/severity of the alarms of the local user
inputs is pointed out (see Fig.100).
2. To change the status/severity of a user input set, into the Severity box, the option:
Disable, to disable the alarm created by the activation of the user input.
Status, to:
Enable the alarm created at the activation of the user input.
Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to a status signal.
Warning, to:
Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Warning level.
Minor, to:
Minor level.
Major, to:
Major level.
Critical, to:
Critical level.
Enabling the user input alarms (more info)
Disabling an user input alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not recorded in the equip-
ment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the
alarm has never occurred.
On the other hand, enabling an user input alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is recorded
in the equipment controller and communicated to the management program which displays it in the current
alarms and in the alarm history.
Remote User Input
The Remote User Input command manages the remote user input configuration.
To verify the remote user input status (pag.303)
To change the name of a remote user input (pag.304)
To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote user input (pag.304)
It is not possible to modify the rest condition of the remote user input. The rest condition is set only locally.
For more information about the enabling of the user input alarms go to pag.302.
To verify the remote user input status
1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Input > Remote User Input command.
The Remote User Input contextual area opens, where the status of the remote user inputs is pointed
out (see Fig.101).
Fig.101 Remote User Input contextual area
Fig.101 notes
(1) The colour and the wording inside the box display the status of the remote user input:
Reading/Writing
Green Inactive User input alarm not activated
Green Active User input status signal activated
Light blue Active User input alarm activated and with Warning severity level
Yellow Active User input alarm activated and with Minor severity level
Orange Active User input alarm activated and with Major severity level
Red Active User input alarm activated and with Critical severity level
(2) Option:
Disable. The alarm is disabled.
Status. The alarm is enabled; its severity is equivalent to a status signalling.
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. The alarm is enabled; its severity is respectively of level
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.
To change the name of a remote user input
The Remote User Input contextual area opens, where the name of the remote user inputs is pointed
out (see Fig.101).
2. To change the name of a remote user input type, into the relevant text box, an alphanumeric string
with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters.
To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote user input
The Remote User Input contextual area opens, where the status/severity of the alarms of the remote
user inputs is pointed out (see Fig.101).
2. To change the status/severity of a user input set, into the Severity box, the option:
Disable, to disable the alarm created by the activation of the user input.
Status, to:
Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to a status signal.
Warning, to:
Warning level.
Minor, to:
Minor level.
Major, to:
Major level.
Critical, to:
Critical level.
USER OUTPUT
The User Output command manages the user output configuration.
To verify the user output status (pag.305)
To verify/modify the user output name (pag.306)
To verify/modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of each user output (pag.306).
To verify/modify the signals coupled to the user output (pag.306).
To enabled the forced activation of the relays contacts from operator (pag.307).
To force the user output activation (pag.307).
To remove the forcing of the user output (pag.307).
To verify the user output status
1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Output command.
The User Output contextual area opens, where the status of the user outputs is pointed out (see
Fig.102).
Fig.102 User Output contextual area
Fig.102 notes
(1) The colour/wording inside the box display the status of the user output:
Reading/Writing
Green Inactive User output not activated
Red Active User output activated (relay contacts activated)
(2) Option:
Forced by Op. + label of the R.H. push-button Force. The UO is enabled to force the activa-
tion by operator.
Forced by Op. + label of the R.H. push-button Unforce. The UO is activated after the forcing
by operator.
Unmapped. No signal is associated to UO.
Mapped. One or more signals are associated to UO (group of alarms and/or user input).
In order to verify the detail of the signals, press Mapping.
(3) Option:
Open. With absence of signal (alarm or user input or manual forcing), the relays contacts
are closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are open
Close. With absence of signal (alarm or user input or manual forcing), the relays contacts
are open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are closed.
To verify/modify the name of an user output
The User Output contextual area opens, where the name of the user outputs is pointed out (see
Fig.102).
2. To change the parameter type, into the text box, an alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maxi-
mum 31 characters.
To verify/modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an user out-
put
The User Output contextual area opens, where the operating modality of the relay contacts of the user
outputs is pointed out (see Fig.102).
2. To change the parameter set, into the Active State box, the option:
Open. With absence of signal (alarm or user input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are
closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are open
Close. With absence of signal (alarm or user input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are
open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are closed.
To verify/modify the signals coupled to the user output
The User Output contextual area opens, where the signals associated to the user output (UO) are point-
ed out (see Fig.102).
2. To change the parameter set, into the Linked to box, the Map option.
3. Press Mapping.
The Mapping window opens.
4. To activate the check-box of the:
Alarm Synthesis box, to associate the group of alarms, which a specific severity level corre-
sponds to, to the UO. Select the wished severity level or the levels:
Alarm Synthesis Warning. Alarms, which the Warning severity corresponds to.
Alarm Synthesis Minor. Alarms, which the Minor severity corresponds to.
Alarm Synthesis Major. Alarms, which the Major severity corresponds to.
Alarm Synthesis Critical. Alarms, which the Critical severity corresponds to.
Radio Branch box, to associate to the UO the group of local or remote equipment alarms (ODU).
Select the group or the groups of wished alarms:
Radio Branch Local Odu <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the specific radio branch of
the ODU section of the local equipment.
Radio Branch Remote Odu <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the specific radio branch
of the ODU section of the remote equipment.
Radio Equipment box, to associate to the UO the group of local or remote equipment alarms
(IDU). Select the group or the groups of wished alarms:
Radio Equipment Local Lim A. Alarms relevant to LIM section of the local equipment.
Radio Equipment Remote Lim <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the LIM section of the
remote equipment connected with the specific radio branch.
User Input box, to associated to the UO one or more local (User Input ) and/or remote (User
Input Remote) user inputs. Select the wished user inputs.
The selection of a signal is indicated by the check sign inside the box and by the change of colour of
the relevant name: from black to blue. Its deactivation removes the check sign and the colour becomes
black again.
The selection/deselection of a group automatically selects/deselects all the relevant signals.
5. Press OK.
To enable the forced activation of the relays contact from operator
The User Output contextual area opens (see Fig.102).
2. Into the Linked to box, set the Forced by Op. option.
To force the user output activation
The user output has to be enabled for the forcing by operator (wording Forced by Operator into the
State field - UO status box green, wording Inactive - see Fig.102). If it is not enabled, it is necessary to
enable it (see pag.307).
2. Press Force. The push-button is replaced by the Unforce push-button.
The user output will remain activated until the removal of the forcing (see pag.307).
To remove the forcing of the user output
2. Press Unforce. The push-button is replaced by the Force push-button.
The Unforce push-button is present when the forcing of the UO is active (wording Forced by Oper-
ator into the State field - UO status box red, wording Active - see Fig.102).
ALARMS LIST
Tab.7 points out the list of the alarms relevant to the ALCplus2 IDU equipment.
The alarms are not listed in alphabetical order but they are grouped according to the corresponding parts
of the equipment. In detail:
Equipment
User input
Common
Eth Lan
LIM
Node
P.M. G.828
P.M. G.829 B1
P.M. G.829 B2-M1
P.M. Rx Power
P.M. Tx Power
P.M. VC12 G.828
P.M. ACM
Plug-in module
Radio
RIM
RT
SETS
SNTP
STM-1
Unit
Vc4
Vc12
For each alarm, the wording present in the Event List area of the WEB LCT page (see Fig.10) and the word-
ing present in the Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area (see Fig.37) are displayed.
Some alarms have some wordings in italic contained between the symbols < >. They, in the alarm dis-
played in the Event List area, represent a variable.
The symbol -means that the alarm is not meaningful for the Alarm Severity Configuration contextual ar-
ea.
Tab.7 - Alarms list
Events List alarms Alarm Severity Configuration
Equipment
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Critical -
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Major -
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Minor -
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Warning -
User input
User Input - <UI number> <UI name> Alarm Status -
Common
[<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Line side AIS Alarm radioEquipE1G.704LineLimAAisAlarm
[<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Line side Fail Alarm radioEquipE1G.704LineLimAFailAlarm
[<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Radio side AIS Alarm radioEquipE1G.704RadioLimAAisAlarm
[<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Radio side Fail Alarm radioEquipE1G.704RadioLimAFailAlarm
Communication EOC (E1/Stm1) Data Link Alarm radioEquipEoc(E1/Stm1)Alarm
Equip Manual Operation equipManualOperation
Fan Alarm radioEquipFanAlarm
MNGT/1 cable Fail equipMngt1CableFailAlarm
MNGT/2 cable Fail equipMngt2CableFailAlarm
RMON Alarm <alarm description> equipRmonAlarm
WAKE UP Manager IP address: <IP address> -
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Communication Radio EOC Data
Link Alarm radioEquipEOCRadioLinkAlarm
Eth Lan
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Link Loss Forwarding Alarm ethLanPhyLinkLossForwarding
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Loss of Signal Alarm ethLanPhyLinkLoss
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Master-Slave Configuration fault Alarm ethLanPhyMasterSlaveConfigurationFault
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Physical Coding Sublayer Sync Alarm ethLanPhySync
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Unresolved Autonegotiation Alarm ethLanPhyAutoNegotiation
LIM
IDU Board LIM Temperature radioEquipLimTemperatureAlarm
IDU Board Trib.-<tributary number> - [<tributary label>] - Rx AIS Alarm ppiRxAisAlarm
IDU Board Trib.-<tributary number> - [<tributary label>] - Signal loss Alarm ppiLosAlarm
IDU BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Demodulator Fail Alarm radioBranchDemodulatorFailAlarm
IDU BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Modulator Fail Alarm radioBranchModulatorFailAlarm
LIM BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] ODU-IDU Communication fail Alarm radioBranchRtOduIduCommAlarm
Local [<radio branch label>] Alarm Synthesis radioEquipLocalLimAlarmSynthesis
REMOTE LIM Radio <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Alarm Synthesis radioEquipRemoteLimAlarmSynthesis
IDU Trib.-<tributary number> - [<tributary label>] Re-Timing Alarm ppiE1SynchAlarm
Node
Node <bus number> Signal loss Alarm nodeLinkLosAlarm
Node <bus number> Loss of frame Alarm nodeLinkLofAlarm
Node <bus number> MS AIS Alarm nodeLinkMsAisAlarm
Node <bus number> Check identifier Alarm nodeLinkCheckAlarm
P.M. G.828
P.M. G.828-<measure type>* 15Mcounter ES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-15MEsAlarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>* 15Mcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm pmG828-15MSepAlarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>* 15Mcounter SES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-15MSesAlarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>* 24Hcounter ES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-24HEsAlarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>* 24Hcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm pmG828-24HSepAlarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>* 24Hcounter SES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-24HSesAlarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>* UAS Alarm pmG828-UASAlarm
P.M. G.829 B1
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>* 15M cnt ES thr. cross Alarm pmG829RstB1-15MEsAlarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>* 15M cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm pmG829RstB1-15MSepAlarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>* 15M cnt SES thr. cross Alarm pmG829RstB1-15MSesAlarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>* 24H cnt ES thr. cross Alarm pmG829RstB1-24HEsAlarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>* 24H cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm pmG829RstB1-24HSepAlarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>* 24H cnt SES thr. cross Alarm pmG829RstB1-24HSesAlarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>* UAS Alarm pmG829RstB1-UASAlarm
P.M. G.829 B2-M1
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 15M cnt ES thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MEsAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 15M cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MEsFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 15M cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MSepAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 15M cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MSepFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 15M cnt SES thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MSesAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 15M cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MSesFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 24H cnt ES thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HEsAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 24H cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HEsFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 24H cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSepAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 24H cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSepFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 24H cnt SES thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSesAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 24H cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSesFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* UAS Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-UASAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* UAS-BIDI Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-UASBIDIAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* UAS-FE Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-UASFEAlarm
P.M. Rx Power
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRltsAlarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRlt2sAlarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts3 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRlt3sAlarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts4 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRlts4Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts5 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRlts5Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRltsAlarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRlts2Alarm
P.M. Tx Power
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-15MTltsAlarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-15MTlts2Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-24HTltsAlarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-24HTlts2Alarm
P.M. VC12 G.828
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt
ES thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MEsAlarm
ES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MEsFEAlarm
SEP thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MSepAlarm
SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MSepFEAlarm
SES thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MSesAlarm
SES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MSesFEAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt
ES thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HEsAlarm
ES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HEsFEAlarm
SEP thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HSepAlarm
SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HSepFEAlarm
SES thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HSesAlarm
SES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HSesFEAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS
Alarm pmG828Vc12PathUASAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS-BIDI
Alarm pmG828Vc12PathUASBIDIAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS-FE
Alarm pmG828Vc12PathUASFEAlarm
P.M. ACM
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm pmACM-15M-Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 128QAM threshold cross Alarm pmACM-15M-128QAMAlarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 8PSK threshold cross Alarm pmACM-15M-8PSKAlarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm pmACM-24H-Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 128QAM threshold cross Alarm pmACM-24H-128QAMAlarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 8PSK threshold cross Alarm pmACM-24H-8PSKAlarm
Plug-in module
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Fail Alarm plug-inModuleAlarm
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Loss of Signal Alarm plug-inLosAlarm
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Mismatch Alarm plug-inModuleMismatchAlarm
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Status plug-inStatusChange
Radio
[<radio branch label>] PRBS Fail Alarm radioEquipPrbsFailAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Adaptive Modulation Reduced Capacity No-
tification radioEquipReducedCapacityAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Link Id. Alarm radioEquipLinkIdAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Link Telemetry Fail Alarm radioEquipLinkTelemetryFailAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Transmitter Switch on Remote Terminal
BER radioEquipTxFailCheckAlarm
RADIO SWITCH 1A [<radio branch label>] Reserve Radio Branch Selected in Rever-
tive Mode radioEquipRevertiveAlarm
RIM
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] REMOTE RIM Alarm Synthesis radioBranchRemoteRimAlarmSynthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] IDU-ODU Cable Open Alarm radioBranchCableOpenAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] IDU-ODU Cable Short Alarm radioBranchCableShortAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] LOCAL RIM Alarm Synthesis radioBranchLocalRimAlarmSynthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RIM Power Supply Alarm radioBranchRimPsuFailAlarm
RT
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT IDU-ODU Communication fail Alarm radioBranchIduOduCommunicationAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT If Fail Alarm radioBranchRtIfFail
* Refer to pag.56
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT LOCAL ODU Alarm Synthesis radioBranchLocalOduAlarmSynthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT REMOTE ODU Alarm Synthesis radioBranchRemoteOduAlarmSynthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Vco Fail Alarm radioBranchRtVcoFail
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Rx Power Low Alarm radioBranchRxPowerLowAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Tx Power Low Alarm radioBranchTxPowerLowAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx If Out Alarm radioBranchRxIfOutalarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Quality Low Alarm radioBranchRxQualityLowAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Quality Low Warning radioBranchRxQualityLowWarning
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Active Status radioBranchRxActiveStatus
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Tx Active Status radioBranchTxActiveStatus
SETS
IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> Active Status timingSinkActiveStatus
IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> Drift Alarm timingSinkDriftAlarm
IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> LTI Alarm timingSinkLosAlarm
IDU Sets Free Running Status timingGeneratorFreeRunningStatus
IDU Sets Holdover Status timingGeneratorHoldoverStatus
SNTP
SNTP servers lost Alarm sntpClientUnicastServerLost
STM-1
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> B2 Excessive Ber Alarm stm1B2ExcessiveBerAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> B2 Signal Degrade Alarm stm1B2SignalDegradeAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm stm1J0TraceIdentifierMismatchAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Loss of Frame Alarm stm1LofAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Loss of Signal Alarm stm1LosAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Ms Ais Alarm stm1MsAisAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Ms Rdi Alarm stm1MsRdiAlarm
Unit
<unit name> Unit Fail Alarm unitFailAlarm
<unit name> Unit Hw Mismatch Alarm unitHwMismatchAlarm
<unit name> Unit Missing Alarm unitMissingAlarm
<unit name> Unit Not Responding Alarm unitNotRespondingAlarm
<unit name> Unit Sw Mismatch Alarm unitSwMismatchAlarm
Vc4
IDU VC4 AU-4 AIS Alarm vc4Au4AisAlarm
IDU VC4 AU-4 Loss of Pointer Alarm vc4Au4LossPointerAlarm
IDU VC4 B3 Excessive Ber Alarm vc4B3ExcessiveBerAlarm
IDU VC4 B3 Signal Degrade Alarm vc4B3SignalDegradeAlarm
IDU VC4 J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm vc4J1TraceIdentifierMismatchAlarm
IDU VC4 RDI Alarm vc4HpRdiAlarm
IDU VC4 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm vc4SignalLabelMismatchAlarm
IDU VC4 Unequipped Alarm vc4UnequippedAlarm
IDU VC-4 Loss Of Multiframe Alarm vc4LossOfMultiframeAlarm
Vc12
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Excessive BER Alarm vc12ExcessiveBerAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 RDI Alarm vc12RdiAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Signal Degrade Alarm vc12SignalDegradeAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm vc12SignalLabelMismatchAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarmvc12TraceIdentifierMismatchAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 TU LOP Alarm vc12TuLopAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 TU Path AIS Alarm vc12TuPathAisAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Unequipped Alarm vc12UnequippedAlarm
OPERATIONS LIST
A
Activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ...............................................144
Activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism, verify/modify .....196
Adaptive modulation configuration parameters, verify .................................................................156
Aging time of the MAC addresses stored in the specific table, verify/modify ....................................183
Alarm/status signals, save to file ..............................................................................................102
Alarms status of a VC-12, verify ...............................................................................................250
ATPC
Functioning status, verify/modify .........................................................................................269
Intervention threshold, verify/modify ...................................................................................271
Auto negotiation for the external port, restart the procedure ........................................................196
B
Behaviour of the external port towards the packets in output, verify/modify ...................................199
Behaviour of the internal port towards the packets in output, verify/modify ....................................214
Branches functional status, verify .............................................................................................. 26
C
Calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin), execute ..................................................................278
Characteristics of the equipment units (type, code, version and functional status), verify .................127
Communication ports, verify/modify .......................................................................................... 38
Communication stack
Modify .............................................................................................................................123
Verify ..............................................................................................................................122
Connection cost of the external port (STP/ELP), verify/modify ......................................................204
Connection cost of the internal port (STP), verify/modify .............................................................219
Control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the external port, verify/modify .....................199
Control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal port, verify/modify ......................214
Control status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte (STM-1), verify/modify .............................................234
Control status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte (VC-4), verify/modify ...............................................241
Control status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte (VC-12), verify/modify .............................................248
Current status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical), verify ..............................................................208
Current status of the laser (STM-1 - optical int.), verify ...............................................................236
D
Deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ...........................................144
Default Vid value of the external port, verify/modify ...................................................................197
Default Vid value of the internal port, verify/modify ....................................................................212
Delete one or more connections ...............................................................................................259
Disable an Auto-Loop ..............................................................................................................260
Display the connections of the equipment in graphic format .........................................................251
Display the enabling/disabling status of the collection of the statistic counters of the equipment
Ethernet ports .......................................................................................................................143
Display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port ........................................................144
E
E1 tributary
Activate/deactivate the loop ................................................................................................230
Activate/deactivate the use .................................................................................................229
Verify the status ................................................................................................................228
Verify/modify the label .......................................................................................................229
ELP for the external port, enable/disable ...................................................................................205
Emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue, verify/modify ...............................185
Enable manually the laser transmission (Lan3, Lan4 - optical) ......................................................210
Enable manually the laser transmission (STM-1 - optical int.) .......................................................238
Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop) ...................................................................259
Enable the new functionalities ..................................................................................................142
Enabling of the alarms
Enable/disable ..................................................................................................................132
Verify ..............................................................................................................................131
Enabling of the switch in transmission, verify/modify ..................................................................164
Enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation
modality and the transmission speed used by the external port, verify/modify ................................195
Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table for
the external port, verify/modify ................................................................................................196
Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table for
the internal port, verify/modify ................................................................................................212
Enabling status of the external port, verify/modify ......................................................................192
Enabling status of the flow control of the external port, verify/modify ............................................195
Enabling status of the internal port, verify/modify .......................................................................211
Enabling status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical), verify/modify ..................................................209
Enabling status of the laser (STM-1 - optical int.), verify/modify ...................................................237
Enabling status of the LLF modality of the external port, verify/modify ..........................................206
Equipment configuration
Save to file .......................................................................................................................102
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 26
Equipment connection status, verify ........................................................................................... 26
Equipment firmware
Switch the functioning of the memory benches ......................................................................121
Update .............................................................................................................................120
Verify the version ..............................................................................................................119
Equipment functional status, verify ............................................................................................ 26
Equipment identifier
Modify .............................................................................................................................. 37
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 26
Equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (ALCplus2), verify/modify ......................................154
Equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (ALplus), verify/modify ..........................................154
Equipment login/monitor status, verify ....................................................................................... 26
Equipment properties (type, MIB version, identifier, addresses, reference date/time), verify .............. 36
Equipment reference date/time, align to the PC date/time ............................................................ 37
Equipment software reset .............................................................................................37, 43, 123
Equipment type, verify ............................................................................................................. 26
Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field, verify/modify .................................................................185
Ethernet Line Protection
Verify the status of the external ports ..................................................................................224
Execute a Tributary-Radio connection .......................................................................................258
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection ...................................................................................258
Execute an E1 NBUS E1 connection (AlPlus/3 Element/Protected) ................................................261
Execute the login of the user .................................................................................................... 28
Execute the logout of the user .................................................................................................. 29
Execute the test "laser functioning status" (Lan3, Lan4 - optical) ..................................................210
Execute the test "laser functioning status" (STM-1 - optical int.) ...................................................239
F
Fade Margin results, delete ......................................................................................................278
Fade Margin results, verify ......................................................................................................278
Forwarding of the trap of the alarm
Enable/disable ..................................................................................................................132
Verify ..............................................................................................................................131
Functionalities enabled for the equipment, verify ........................................................................141
H
Hysteresis of the LLF modality, verify/modify .............................................................................186
I
Input synchronism sources
Enable/disable the use .......................................................................................................169
Force the use ....................................................................................................................171
Set a source as preferential ................................................................................................172
Set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for T2/T3 2 ..................................................172
Set the source type used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0) ..........................................172
Verify the alarms status .....................................................................................................173
Verify/modify the use priority ..............................................................................................171
Interface type of the external port (Lan3, Lan 4), verify/modify ....................................................197
Intervention threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm (STM-1), verify/modify ................................236
Intervention threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm (STM-1), verify/modify ...............................235
Intervention threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm (VC-4), verify/modify ..................................243
Intervention threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm (VC-4), verify/modify .................................242
Intervention threshold of the VC12 Excessive BER alarm (VC-12), verify/modify .............................247
Intervention threshold of the VC12 Signal Degrade alarm (VC-12), verify/modify ............................246
Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the external port, verify/modify ......................................194
IP address of remote users, set ................................................................................................139
IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment, modify ............................................................... 37
L
LAN Statistics
Reset the counters results .................................................................................................276
Verify the counters ............................................................................................................274
Link identification number, verify/modify ...................................................................................160
Local user input
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity ...............................................................301
Name, verify/modify ..........................................................................................................301
Rest condition, verify/modify ..............................................................................................301
Status, verify ....................................................................................................................300
Logout of a user, force ............................................................................................................135
Loop on line side of the external port, activate/deactivate ............................................................207
Lower threshold of the modulation, verify/ modify ......................................................................160
M
Management of nodal configuration, verify/modify ......................................................................153
Management of STM-1 stream, verify/modify .............................................................................153
Management of synchronisation, verify/modify ...........................................................................153
Manual Operations Timeout, verify/modify .................................................................................130
Mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (external port), verify/modify .........................202
Mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (internal port), verify/modify .........................217
Maximum output power value at the transmitter, verify/modify ....................................................271
Maximum size of the accepted packet, verify/modify ...................................................................185
Modulation status of the RF carrier, verify/modify .......................................................................268
N
Network password and timeout, modify .....................................................................................138
Nodal switch
Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration .........................................................................................................................297
Modify the switch management ...........................................................................................297
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..........................................................................................297
Verify the configuration parameters .....................................................................................296
Verify the switch status ......................................................................................................296
Number of E1 streams assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams), verify/modify ...................160
Number of equipment of the nodal configuration (ALCplus2), verify/modify ....................................154
Number of equipment of the nodal configuration (ALplus), verify/modify ........................................154
Number of high priority E1 streams, verify/modify ......................................................................160
O
Operating modality of the line synchronism (role), verify/modify ..................................................196
Operating status of the adaptive modulation
Modify .............................................................................................................................159
Verify ..............................................................................................................................156
Operation of the RT power supply, verify/modify ........................................................................268
Operation of the transmitter, verify/modify ................................................................................268
Operations executed by the users, save to file ............................................................................102
Operations list stored into the equipment controller, delete ..........................................................105
Output queue of a packet according to its Tag 802.1p, verify/assign .............................................185
P
Password and timeout of the NMS5UX user (CEM password), change .............................................139
Password and timeout of the System user, modify ......................................................................138
PM
Activate a measure ........................................................................................................ 62, 66
Activate all measures in a group ........................................................................................... 62
Change the type of the displayed counters (ACM Radio A) ........................................................ 91
Change the type of the displayed parameters (G828..., G829...) ............................................... 66
Change the type of the displayed parameters (RxPwr Radio) .................................................... 97
Change the type of the displayed parameters (TxPwr Radio) ...................................................100
Deactivate a measure .................................................................................................... 62, 66
Deactivate all measures in a group ....................................................................................... 63
Display the results of the measurements ............................................................................... 63
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio A) ............................................. 94
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms ................................................................................... 66
Reset the values of the records (daily and primary) ................................................................. 66
Set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure ....................................................................... 81
Set the thresholds (ACM Radio A) ......................................................................................... 91
Set the thresholds (G828 E1...) ............................................................................................ 80
Set the thresholds (G828 Radio) ........................................................................................... 76
Set the thresholds (G828 STM-1 Vc12) .................................................................................. 86
Set the thresholds (G829 MstB2M1 STM-1) ............................................................................ 71
Set the thresholds (G829 RstB1 STM-1) ................................................................................ 67
Set the thresholds (RxPwr Radio) ......................................................................................... 97
Set the thresholds (TxPwr Radio) .........................................................................................100
Verify the status of the measurements .................................................................................. 61
Ports through which the messages in input from the external port, enable/disable ..........................200
Ports through which the messages in input from the internal port, enable/disable ...........................215
Power profile of the RF transmitter, verify/modify .......................................................................159
PRBS
Activate/reset the measure .................................................................................................283
Deactivate the measure .....................................................................................................283
Measure status, verify ........................................................................................................282
Pattern type used for the measure, verify/modify ..................................................................283
Used E1 signal for the measure, enable/disable .....................................................................284
Priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the external port to the output queue,
verify/modify .........................................................................................................................201
Priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the internal port to the output queue,
verify/modify .........................................................................................................................215
Priority of the dynamic E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.), verify/modify ...............................................161
Priority of the external port (STP/ELP), verify/modify ..................................................................204
Priority of the internal port (STP), verify/modify .........................................................................219
Protection of the nodal configuration (ALplus), verify/modify ........................................................155
Q
Queue to which the packet must be assigned to depending on its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3),
verify/modify .........................................................................................................................186
R
Radio branch label, verify/modify .............................................................................................166
Radio configuration, verify/modify ............................................................................................151
Radio loop
Activate ...........................................................................................................................286
Deactivate ........................................................................................................................286
Radio parameters, verify .......................................................................................................... 26
Radio switch
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .............289
Modify the management of the switching in reception .............................................................288
Modify the management of the switching in transmission ........................................................288
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission ..................................................289
Verify the configuration parameters of the switches ...............................................................287
Verify the switches status ...................................................................................................287
Reference band/modulation
Modify .............................................................................................................................159
Verify ..............................................................................................................................156
Remote element list
Remove an equipment ........................................................................................................ 54
Remote equipment list
Add a station ..................................................................................................................... 52
Add an equipment .............................................................................................................. 53
Remove a station ............................................................................................................... 53
Rename a station ............................................................................................................... 52
Reset ................................................................................................................................ 54
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 51
Remote user input
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity ...............................................................304
Status, verify ....................................................................................................................303
Resolution of the received power (Prx), verify/modify ..................................................................269
Resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx), verify/modify .............................................................269
Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation ........................175
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation
of configuration restore (configuration revert) ............................................................................126
RF channel, verify/modify ........................................................................................................266
Running Default Gateway
Delete ............................................................................................................................... 46
Set/modify ........................................................................................................................ 46
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 44
Running Routing Table
Add an element .................................................................................................................. 45
Remove one or more elements ............................................................................................. 45
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 44
S
S/N measure, verify ...............................................................................................................277
Save the equipment configuration, the alarm/status signals and the operations executed
by the users to file .................................................................................................................102
Save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup) ...................................................125
SD memory card
Automatic equipment restart from SD memory in case of replacement of IDU unit .....................113
Automatic update of the equipment sw from SD memory ........................................................114
Copy the equipment sw from SD memory to controller (Sw Dwl SD) .........................................116
Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from SD memory .................................115
Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory (data + sw) ....................................116
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench after
an automatic sw update from SD memory ............................................................................116
Force the restore, from SD memory to controller, of the configuration data and of the
equipment sw ...................................................................................................................116
Status and configuration, verify ................................................................................... 111, 115
Sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace Identifier (STM-1), verify/modify ....234
Sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J1 Trace Identifier (VC-4), verify/modify ......242
Sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J2 Trace Identifier (VC-12), verify/modify .....249
Severity level of the alarm
Modify .............................................................................................................................133
Verify ..............................................................................................................................131
Signal Label value (VC-12), verify ............................................................................................249
Signal Label value (VC-4), verify/modify ....................................................................................244
Signals (Events List)
Filter the list ...................................................................................................................... 34
Verify the current filters ...................................................................................................... 34
Signals stored into the equipment controller, delete ....................................................................105
SNTP functionality
Activate ...........................................................................................................................107
Deactivate ........................................................................................................................107
Set the execution parameters .............................................................................................107
Spanning Tree Protocol
Verify the MAC Address of a bridge ......................................................................................223
Verify the status of the ethernet ports ..................................................................................222
Verify/modify the Forward Delay interval ..............................................................................221
Verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets .......................................................222
Verify/modify the priority of a bridge ....................................................................................224
Verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets ...................................................221
Verify/modify the version ...................................................................................................220
Start-up of the WEB LCT application
From browser .................................................................................................................... 17
From SCT/LMT ................................................................................................................... 23
Status of the external port in relation to the ELP, verify ...............................................................204
Status of the external port in relation to the STP, verify ...............................................................202
Status of the internal port in relation to the STP, verify ...............................................................217
Status of the STM-1 alarms, verify ............................................................................................235
Status of the STM-1 loops (line/inner side), verify/modify ............................................................234
Status of the STM-1 stream, verify/modify .................................................................................232
Status of the VC-4 alarms, verify ..............................................................................................242
STM-1 switch
Force the switch on preferential STM-1 stream without waiting for the Wait Time expiration ........294
Modify the switch management ...........................................................................................293
Set the primary STM-1 stream as preferential .......................................................................294
Switch logic (modify) .........................................................................................................294
Verify the configuration parameters .....................................................................................292
Verify the switch status ......................................................................................................292
Stored Default Gateway
Delete ............................................................................................................................... 50
Set/modify ........................................................................................................................ 50
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 48
Stored Routing Table
Add an element .................................................................................................................. 49
Remove one or more elements ............................................................................................. 50
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 48
STP for the external port, enable/disable ...................................................................................204
STP for the internal port, enable/disable ....................................................................................218
T
T and N parameters, verify/modify ...........................................................................................165
T0 synchronisation
Force the status ................................................................................................................173
Verify the alarms status .....................................................................................................173
T12 synchronisation
Manage the output of synchronism (T12) on tributary A/B and define the interface
(output/input) of tributary A/B ............................................................................................174
Table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile,
display ..................................................................................................................................271
Table summarizing the radio transport, display ...........................................................................158
Threshold level of the signal at reception, verify/modify ..............................................................164
Timeout used for the update of all the information present in the WEB LCT page, verify/modify ......... 28
To display the connections of the equipment in table format .........................................................257
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration restore) ...............................125
Transmission mode of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical), verify/modify ............................................209
Transmission mode of the laser (STM-1 - optical int.), verify/modify .............................................238
Transmitter Switch on Remote... alarm, reset ............................................................................166
Type of laser module (Lan3, Lan4 - optical), verify ......................................................................209
Type of laser module (STM-1 - optical int.), verify ......................................................................237
U
Upper threshold of the modulation, verify/modify .......................................................................160
User list
Add a user ........................................................................................................................137
Delete a user ....................................................................................................................138
Modify a user ....................................................................................................................137
Verify ..............................................................................................................................136
User output
Enable the forced activation of the relays contact from operator ..............................................307
Force the activation ...........................................................................................................307
Functioning mode of the relay contacts, verify/modify ............................................................306
Remove the forcing ...........................................................................................................307
Signal coupled, verify/modify ..............................................................................................306
Status, verify ....................................................................................................................305
User profile, verify ................................................................................................................... 26
Users connected to the equipment, verify ..................................................................................134
V
Value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the external port which,
in output, the Tag is added to, verify/modify ..............................................................................202
Value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the internal port which,
in output, the Tag is added to, verify/modify ..............................................................................216
Values of the Ptx parameters stored in the equipment controller and used for
the calculation of the Fade Margin, verify ...................................................................................280
Verify/modify the connection label ............................................................................................260
Vid of the external port to the default value, force ......................................................................200
Vid of the internal port to the default value, force .......................................................................215
VLan
Create a virtual Lan ...........................................................................................................189
Delete a virtual Lan ...........................................................................................................190
Modify a virtual Lan ...........................................................................................................189
Verify the existing virtual LANs ............................................................................................187
W
Wake Up functionality
Activate ...........................................................................................................................108
Deactivate ........................................................................................................................109
Set the execution parameters .............................................................................................108
WEB LCT
Update .............................................................................................................................122
Verify the version ........................................................................................................ 28, 121
PARAMETERS LIST
Numerics
2Mb/s EOC, communication port .................. 41
802.1p Priority Management ......................185
A
ACM Engine .............................................159
ACM Radio A (PM) ..................................... 89
Active Manual Operation ............................129
Agent IP Address ....................................... 36
Alarm ...................................................... 34
Alarm Threshold .......................................166
ATPC
ATPC Regulation ..................................270
ATPC Threshold on local Prx ..................271
Max Ptx value .....................................271
Tx Power Control .................................269
ATPC Threshold on local Prx .......................271
Automatic Shutdown .................................209
Automatic Shutdown (STM-1 - optical int.) ..238
Available Remote Element List .................... 22
Conn. Status ........................................ 22
Equipment ID ...................................... 22
IP Address ........................................... 22
Radio Direction .................................... 22
Radio Link Status ................................. 22
Station ................................................ 22
B
B2 Excessive BER Threshold (STM-1) ..........236
B2 Signal Degrade Threshold (STM-1) .........235
B3 Excessive BER Threshold (VC-4) ............243
B3 Signal Degrade Threshold (VC-4) ...........242
Bandwidth & Modulation ............................159
BER ........................................................282
Branches functional status .......................... 26
Broadcast Frames Received .......................275
Bytes Sent ..............................................275
C
Cable crossover .......................................194
Carrier Only .............................................268
CEM Password .........................................139
Check Period ...........................................166
Collisions .................................................275
CRC Align Errors .......................................275
Curr. Profile .............................................. 26
Current Ptx Set ........................................279
Current Step ............................................279
Current user profile ................................... 26
D
Default Gateway ....................................... 47
Default Priority ................................. 202, 217
Default Vid ...................................... 197, 212
Delay ......................................................187
Direction .................................................294
Dropped Frames .......................................275
DSCP ......................................................187
E
E1 Retiming .............................................175
E1 Signal ................................................284
Egress Priority Policy .................................185
Elapsed Time ...........................................282
ELP
LAN-1 ................................................224
LAN-2 ................................................224
LAN-3 ................................................224
LAN-4 ................................................224
Role ...................................................224
Status ................................................225
Version ..............................................225
Equipment Bench Status ...........................119
Equipment configuration ............................. 26
Equipment connection status ...................... 26
Equipment Date/Time ................................ 36
Equipment functional status ........................ 26
Equipment ID ........................................... 36
Equipment identifier .................................. 26
Equipment login/monitor status ................... 26
Equipment radio parameters ....................... 26
Equipment Software Restart ....................... 36
Equipment Software Version ......................119
Equipment Type ................................... 26, 36
Errors .....................................................282
Ethernet IP Address ................................... 36
Ethernet Switch
802.1p Priority Management .................185
Egress Priority Policy ............................185
LLF Hysteresis .....................................186
MAC Addr. Aging Time .........................183
Max Packet Size ..................................185
QinQ ETH Type ....................................185
Ethernet, communication port ..................... 39
Ethernet/OSI Address Relation
Gosip .................................................. 37
IP Address ........................................... 37
Excessive BER Threshold (VC-12) ...............247
Expected Trace ................................ 233, 242
Expected Type (equipment hardware) .........127
External Atten. .........................................279
Extra TDM Cap .........................................160
F
Fade Margin ............................................279
Current Ptx Set ...................................279
Current Step .......................................279
External Atten. ....................................279
Fade Margin ........................................279
Local IP ..............................................279
Real Fade Margin .................................279
Real Fade Margin Ver. ..........................279
Remote IP ..........................................279
Fail Alarms ..............................................282
Flow Control Full Dplx/Back Pressure
Half Dplx .................................................195
Force Default VID ............................. 200, 215
Force Version ...........................................220
Forced Switch ..........................................297
Forward Delay .........................................221
Fragments ...............................................275
Frame Egress Mode .......................... 199, 214
Frames 1024 to max pck size .....................275
Frames 128 to 255 Oct. ............................275
Frames 256 to 511 Oct. ............................275
Frames 64 Oct. ........................................275
Frames 65 to 127 Oct ...............................275
Frames Sent ............................................276
FTP, protocol .............................................. 9
G
G828 E1 Line Side (PM) ............................. 78
G828 E1 Radio Side (PM) ........................... 82
G828 Radio (PM) ....................................... 74
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 (PM) ........................ 69
G829 RstB1 STM-1 .................................... 64
H
Hello Time ...............................................221
Help Web Server ......................................... 9
HW Version (equipment hardware) .............127
I
ID ........................................................... 26
In Pause Frames ......................................276
Ingress Filtering Check ...................... 199, 214
Interface Type .........................................197
Internal Source ........................................168
IP ...........................................................123
IP Over OSI, communication port ................ 42
IP v4 DSCP ..............................................187
IP v6 DSCP ..............................................187
J
J0 Trace Identifier (STM-1)
Expected Trace ...................................233
Received Trace ....................................233
Sent Trace ..........................................233
Trace Type .........................................234
J1 Trace Identifier (VC-4) ..........................241
Expected Trace ...................................242
Received Path Trace .............................242
Sent Trace ..........................................242
J2 Trace Identifier (VC-12) ........................248
Expected Trace ...................................249
Received Path Trace .............................249
Sent Trace ..........................................249
Jabbers ...................................................275
L
LAN 1 ............................................. 191, 224
LAN 1,2 - 3,4 (electrical int.)
Cable crossover ...................................194
M/S Autoneg. ......................................197
Master/Slave Role ................................196
LAN 1,2,3,4
802.1Q
Default Vid ....................................197
Force Default VID ...........................200
Frame Egress Mode .........................199
Ingress Filtering Check ....................199
Port Based VLAN ............................200
ELP
Role ..............................................205
SPT/ELP ........................................206
Status ...........................................205
Version .........................................205
Flow Control Full Dplx/Back Pressure
Half Dplx ............................................195
Line Loop ...........................................207
LLF ....................................................206
MAC Learning ......................................196
Priority
Default Priority ...............................202
Priority ..........................................201
Rate Control .......................................192
Speed/Duplex .....................................195
STP
Role ..............................................203
SPT/ELP ........................................204
Status ...........................................203
Version .........................................203
STP/ELP
Path Cost ......................................204
Priority ..........................................204
LAN 2 ............................................. 191, 224
LAN 3 ............................................. 191, 224
LAN 3,4
Interface Type ....................................197
LAN 3,4 (optical)
Laser Control
Automatic Shutdown .......................209
Module Type ..................................209
Transmitter Control .........................209
LAN 4 ............................................. 191, 224
LAN Statistics
Broadcast Frames Received ..................275
Bytes Sent .........................................275
Collisions ............................................275
CRC Align Errors ..................................275
Dropped Frames ..................................275
Fragments ..........................................275
Frames 1024 to max pck size ................275
Frames 128 to 255 Oct .........................275
Frames 256 to 511 Oct. ........................275
Frames 512 to 1023 Oct .......................275
Frames 64 Oct. ...................................275
Frames 65 to 127 Oct. .........................275
Frames Sent .......................................276
In Pause Frames .................................276
Jabbers ..............................................275
Late Collisions .....................................275
Multicast Frames Received ....................275
Out Broadcast Frames ..........................276
Out Multicast Frames ...........................276
Out Pause Frames ...............................276
Out Unicast Frames .............................276
Oversize Frames .................................275
Total Bytes Received ............................275
Total Frames Received .........................275
Undersize Frame .................................275
Valid Bytes Received ............................275
Valid Frames Received .........................275
LAN-1 .....................................................222
LAN-2 .....................................................222
LAN-3 .....................................................222
LAN-4 .....................................................222
Laser Control (STM-1 - optical int.) .............236
Late Collisions ..........................................275
LCT PPP, communication port ...................... 40
Link identification number .........................160
LLF .........................................................206
LLF Hysteresis .........................................186
Local IP ...................................................279
Local Link ID ...........................................160
Lower Modulation .....................................160
M
M/S Autoneg. ..........................................197
MAC Addr. Aging Time ..............................183
MAC Address ..................................... 36, 223
MAC Learning .................................. 196, 212
Manual Operation .....................................171
Manual Operation Timeout .........................129
Manual Switch .........................................172
Master/Slave Role ....................................196
Max Age ..................................................222
Max Packet Size .......................................185
Max Ptx value ..........................................271
Module Type ............................................209
Module Type (STM-1 - optical int.) ..............237
MSP Protection .........................................293
Multicast Frames Received .........................275
N
Network Password ....................................138
NODAL 1 (T0) ..........................................168
Nodal Configuration ..................................153
Nodal ID .................................................154
Nodal Protection .......................................155
Nodal switch
Forced Switch .....................................297
Wtr Clear ...........................................297
Wtr Time ............................................297
Nodal Type ..............................................154
Node Id ..................................................154
Number of Nodes .....................................154
O
OSI ........................................................123
Out Broadcast Frames ...............................276
Out Multicast Frames ................................276
Out Pause Frames ....................................276
Out Unicast Frames ..................................276
Oversize Frames ......................................275
P
Par Part Num (equipment hardware) ...........127
Part Number (equipment hardware) ............127
Path Cost ........................................ 204, 219
PC Date/Time ........................................... 36
Performances ............................................ 61
Permanent Login ......................................139
Permanent TDM Traffic ..............................160
PM
ACM Radio A ........................................ 89
G828 E1 Line Side ................................ 78
G828 E1 Radio Side .............................. 82
G828 Radio ......................................... 74
G828 STM-1 - Vc12 .............................. 84
G828 STM-1 - Vc12 (PM) ....................... 84
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 ........................... 69
G829 RstB1 STM-1 ............................... 64
RxPwr Radio ........................................ 95
TxPwr Radio ........................................ 98
Port ........................................................211
Port 1 .....................................................222
Port A .....................................................211
802.1Q
Default Vid ....................................212
Force Default VID ...........................215
Frame Egress Mode ........................214
Ingress Filtering Check ....................214
Port Based VLAN ............................215
MAC Learning .....................................212
Port ...................................................211
Priority
Default Priority ...............................217
Priority ..........................................215
STP
Path Cost ......................................219
Priority ..........................................219
Role ..............................................218
Status ...........................................218
STP ..............................................218
Version .........................................218
Port Based VLAN .............................. 200, 215
Port Configuration
2Mb/s EOC
EOC ............................................... 41
IP Address ...................................... 41
IP NetMask ..................................... 41
IP Unnumbered ............................... 41
PPP Mode ....................................... 41
Signal input .................................... 41
Ethernet
In band management ....................... 39
IP Address ...................................... 39
IP NetMask ..................................... 39
MNGT/x Alarm Sev .......................... 39
MNGT/x Cable Cross ........................ 39
IP Over OSI
EOC ............................................... 42
EOC 2Mbit Side ............................... 42
EOC Radio Side 1A ........................... 42
Gosip Address ................................. 42
IP Address ...................................... 42
IP NetMask ..................................... 42
Routing .......................................... 43
Signal input .................................... 42
LCT PPP
IP PPP Address ................................ 40
IP PPP NetMask ............................... 40
IP Unnumbered ............................... 40
PC IP Address ................................. 40
Radio 1A
IP Address ...................................... 40
IP NetMask ..................................... 40
IP Unnumbered ............................... 40
PPP Mode ....................................... 41
PPP, protocol .............................................. 9
PRBS
BER ...................................................282
E1 Signal ............................................284
Elapsed Time ......................................282
Errors ................................................282
Fail Alarms .........................................282
Start/Stop ..........................................282
Sync Loss Alarm ..................................282
Test Pattern ........................................283
Precedence ..............................................187
Priority .......................201, 204, 215, 219, 224
Protection Mode .......................................294
Prx resolution ..........................................269
PTOS/DSCP
Delay .................................................187
DSCP .................................................187
IP v4 DSCP .........................................187
IP v6 DSCP .........................................187
Precedence .........................................187
Queue Pri ...........................................187
Reliab ................................................187
Throug ...............................................187
Value .................................................187
Ptx resolution ..........................................269
Q
QinQ ETH Type ........................................185
Queue Pri ................................................187
R
RADIO (T0) .............................................168
Radio 1A, communication port ..................... 40
Radio A ...................................................151
Radio Branch Label ...................................166
Radio configuration ...................................151
Radio switch
Reset .................................................289
Rx Forced Switch .................................288
Tx Forced Switch .................................288
Tx Preferential ....................................289
Wait Time ...........................................289
Rate Control ............................................192
Real Fade Margin ......................................279
Real Fade Margin Ver. ...............................279
Real Type (equipment hardware) ................127
Received Path Trace .................................242
Received Trace .........................................233
Reliab .....................................................187
Remote Element Table ............................... 54
Remote equipment list ............................... 54
Remote IP ...............................................279
RF channel ..............................................266
Role ..........................203, 205, 218, 222, 224
Routing Table ........................................... 46
Routing Table (Running) ............................. 46
Routing Table (Stored) ............................... 47
RT PSU ...................................................268
Running Default Gateway ........................... 44
Running Routing Table ............................... 44
Rx Forced Switch ......................................288
Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold .................164
RxPwr Radio (PM) ...................................... 95
S
S/N ........................................................277
SCT/LMT .................................................... 9
SD memory card
Automatic data restore from SD ............112
Automatic SW download from SD ..........112
EC serial number .................................112
EC system version ...............................112
Not running Sw delete ..........................112
Status ................................................112
SW system version ..............................112
Type ..................................................112
Sent Trace ...................................... 233, 242
Serial Number (equipment hardware) .........127
Signal Degrade Threshold (VC-12) ..............246
Signal Label (VC-12) .................................249
Signal Label (VC-4) ..................................244
Expected Label ....................................243
Received Signal Label ..........................243
Sent Label ..........................................243
SNTP
Main Server IP Address ........................107
Polling Interval ....................................107
Polling Retries .....................................107
Polling Timeout ...................................107
Reserve Server IP Address ....................107
Source ....................................................173
Source E1 ...............................................172
Speed/Duplex ..........................................195
Start/Stop ...............................................282
Status ....................... 203, 205, 218, 223, 225
Status Control .........................................173
Status signal ............................................ 34
STM-1 ....................................................168
STM-1 MST Mode .....................................153
STM-1 switch
Direction ............................................294
MSP Protection ....................................293
Protection Mode ..................................294
Switch Status .....................................292
Wtr Clear ...........................................294
Wtr Time (Min) ...................................294
STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0) ................................168
Stored Default Gateway ............................. 48
Stored Routing Table ................................. 48
STP ........................................................218
Force Version ......................................220
Forward Delay ....................................221
Hello Time ..........................................221
LAN-1 ................................................222
LAN-2 ................................................222
LAN-3 ................................................222
LAN-4 ................................................222
MAC Address ......................................223
Max Age .............................................222
Port 1 ................................................222
Priority ...............................................224
Role ...................................................222
Status ................................................223
Version ..............................................223
STP/ELP .......................................... 204, 206
Switch Status ..........................................292
Sync Enable .............................................153
Sync Loss Alarm .......................................282
Synchronisation
E1 Retiming ........................................175
Internal Source ...................................168
Manual Operation ................................171
Manual Switch .....................................172
NODAL 1 (T0) .....................................168
RADIO (T0) ........................................168
Source ...............................................173
Source E1 ...........................................172
Status Control .....................................173
STM-1 ................................................168
STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0) ...........................168
T0 .....................................................169
T2/T3 1 ..............................................168
T2/T3 2 ..............................................168
TE LAN-3 ............................................168
TE LAN-4 ............................................168
Timing Sink Priority ..................... 169, 171
Trib. A ...............................................174
Trib. B ...............................................174
System Password .....................................138
T
T0 ..........................................................169
T2/T3 1 ...................................................168
T2/T3 2 ...................................................168
Tagged ...................................................188
TE LAN-3 .................................................168
TE LAN-4 .................................................168
Test Pattern .............................................283
Throug ....................................................187
Timeout, user ..........................................137
Timing Sink Priority .......................... 169, 171
Total Bytes Received .................................275
Total Frames Received ..............................275
Transmitter Control ..................................209
Trib. A ....................................................174
Trib. B ....................................................174
Tx Forced Switch ......................................288
Tx Frequency Selector ...............................266
Tx Power Constant Peak Mode ....................159
Tx Power Control ......................................269
Tx Power Mode ........................................157
Tx Preferential .........................................289
Tx Switch Control .....................................165
Tx Transmitter .........................................268
TXPwr Radio (PM) ...................................... 98
Type ........................................................ 26
U
Undersize Frames .....................................275
Unmodified ..............................................188
Untagged ................................................188
Upper Modulation .....................................160
User
NMS5UX .............................................140
Read and Write ...................................137
Read Only ..........................................136
System ..............................................140
User Force Logout ....................................135
User list ..................................................140
Utente
Station Operator .................................137
V
Valid Bytes Received .................................275
Valid Frames Received ..............................275
Value ......................................................187
Version ...................... 203, 205, 218, 223, 225
WEB LCT ............................................. 13
VLan
Label .................................................188
Lan1 ..................................................188
Lan2 ..................................................188
Lan3 ..................................................188
Lan4 ..................................................188
Port A ................................................188
Tagged ..............................................188
Unmodified .........................................188
Untagged ...........................................188
VLan ID .............................................188
VLan ID ..................................................188
W
Wait Time ...............................................289
Wake Up trap
Disable ..............................................109
Enable ...............................................109
Gosip Address .....................................109
NE Location ........................................109
NMS IP Address ..................................109
Timeout .............................................109
WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU, application ............. 12
WEB Lct Console ......................................... 9
WEB LCT version ......................................122
Wtr Time ......................................... 294, 297
GLOSSARY
A
Alarm
Signal of a failure created by an error or by a malfunctioning of the equipment or of one of its ele-
ments.
ATPC
Automatic Transmit Power Control. Device for the automatic control of the transmitted power.
Auto negotiation
The auto negotiation procedure allows the port automatically adjusting the speed and the modality
of the data transmission without the intervention of the end user to optimise these parameters.
B
BER (measure)
This measure allows to check (in normal functioning conditions of the equipment and without inter-
rupting the traffic) the quality of the signal received by the equipment.
Block
The wording block refers to a group of bit (PM measurements - BBE control parameter).
F
Firmware of the equipment
Assembly of all the firmware necessary for the management of the entire equipment (firmware of
the main controller firmware of the peripheral units).
Full-Duplex (modality)
The transmission takes place contemporary in the two directions, in such a way the devices can
transmit and receive at the same time.
H
Half-Duplex (modality)
The transmission takes place in the two directions, but in only one direction at a time.
L
Local equipment
Equipment which you are connected to.
Local User Input
Signal that enters into the local equipment from the user connector and its open close status (pro-
grammable) is reported as alarm or status signal.
M
MAC Address
Equipment physical address composed by 6 bytes. The first 3 bytes points out the manufacturing
company of the equipment, the remaining 3 ones the production serial number different for each
equipment.
Manual Operation Timeout
Time after which the manual forcing is automatically removed.
N
Network password
This password is necessary to be able to activate the connection with the remote equipment.
O
OSI network
Network where it is used also the OSI (Open System Interconnection) protocol as communication
protocol between the network elements.
P
PRBS
Pseudo Random Binary Sequence. Control functionality, integrated in the base band, that allows in-
serting a PRBS data stream on a 2Mbit/s stream for test operation and measurement of the error
rate.
R
Reduced Capacity Alarm
Alarm generated when the change of modulation and the consequent reduction of capacity take
place.
Remote Element Table
List that contains all the information concerning the network equipment. The remote equipment list
has to be set by the user and it can be increased or changed at every time.
Remote equipment
Equipment defined as Remote Link in the remote equipment list of the local equipment.
Remote User Input
Signal in input to the remote equipment, through the user connector and that is returned in output
from the local equipment through relays contacts (user output) or user connectors.
S
Signal associated to one UO
Associating one or more signals to an user output means that the activation of the signal or of the
signals associated to the UO will be signalled outside by the activation of the user output.
Server NTP (functionality)
Functionality that, via SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) protocol, can update the date/time of
the equipment using an element within the network as reference (Server NTP functionality).
Software reset
The software reset consists of initialising again all the communication channels (for instance with
the WEB LCT) of the equipment.
Status signal
Signals that refer to every event that does not point out a malfunctioning but a status change, an
operation on progress or a functioning indication.
T
Tag
4 byte optional field, containing the priority and the VLan identifier.
Tributary A
First E1 tributary of base board.
Tributary B
Second E1 tributary of base board.
U
User list
List of users that can be connected and ask for the login to the equipment.
User Output
Signal that the equipment makes available on rack as relay contact.
User timeout
Period when, if no operation is executed in the WEB LCT page, the user is automatically disconnect-
ed and, as consequence, even the equipment is disconnected.
W
Wait Time
Time that the controller keep the service on not preferential branch before coming back to the pref-
erential branch. In this way the controller doesnt continuously switch between the branches in
present of fleeting alarms.
Wake Up (functionality)
Functionality that allows the user enabling the spontaneous forward, from the equipment to a re-
mote server, of a SNMP trap for the notification of the equipment commissioning (Wake Up trap).
ASSISTANCE SERVICE
For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the com-
pany manufacturing the product.

Web LCT Alcplus2 Idu

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Web LCT Alcplus2 Idu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WEB LCT

You might also like